75 434

3Scope of Work
Procurement & Construction of 491 Villas and 3 Duplex Villas for Imam and
Muazzin
REVIEWED BY:
Review Sequence 161 Reviewer 161 Reviewer Approved by

Name Padraic Leonard Mohammed Saleh Agala
Safwani
Date and Signature
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page

1. OVERVIEW 4
…………………………………………………………………………………….
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA …………………………………………………………. 4
3. SCOPE OF WORK …………………………………………………………………………. 5
3.1 General 5
………………………………………………………………………………
3.2 Mobilization and Temporary works ………………………………… 8
3.3 Temporary water, electricity, firefighting and sewage ...….. 9
3.4 Engineering 10
…………………………………………………………………………
3.4. 1 Civil and site preparation work …………………………… 10
3.4. 2 Architectural work 11
………………………………………………..
3.4. 3 Structural Work 12
……………………………………………………
3.4. 4 Mechanical Work (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire 12
Protection System)
…………………………………………………….
3.4. 5 Electrical Work 23
……………………………………………………..
3.4. 6 Telecommunication Work 25
…………………………………….
3.4. 7 OA/ QC Plan 28
………………………………………………………….
3.4. 8 Reporting 28
……………………………………………………………..
4. PROJECT SCHDULE AND COORDINATIONPC CONTRACT …………….. 28
3. 1 Project Schedule 28
…………………………………………………………….
3. 2 Activation of Optional Scope ……………………………………….. 29
3. 3 Project Duration 29
…………………………………………………………….
3. 4 Mockup Sample 30
……………………………………………………………..
5. PERMITS 30
……………………………………………………………………………………….
6. PROJECT CLOSEOUT 30
……………………………………………………………………..
7. OPTIONAL SCOPE OF WORK 31
………………………………………………………….
8. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS 32
………………………………………………………………..
9. ATTACHMENTS 33
……………………………………………………………………………..
1. OVERVIEW:
This project, B1-28-10012, provides for the Home Ownership Lot Development,
Phase I, at Al- Mutrafiah, Jubail Industrial City in the Eastem Province of the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
This Contract will accommodate 491 house units, in total, with varying lot sizes
for sectors F1-1, F1-2 and F1-3 and the construction of three (3) Duplex type
houses for the Imam & Muzzain to be built on three (3) lots to be selected by
Saudi Aramco, in addition to three (3) Local day mosques.
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA:
The site is located in the Mutrafiah District of the Jubail Industnal City residential
area.
Mutraflah District is a new development within the Jubail Industrial City
residential area SAUDI ARAMCO has been granted a total of 491 villas.
The infrastructure (Initial Development) to the Saudi Aramco is completed by
another Contractor. The final development shall be completed once the houses
are constructed.
3. SCOPE OF WORE:
3. 1 GENERAL:
3.1. 1 The scope of work comprises the complete procurement and
construction (PC) including site adaptation for 491 Villa units plus
(3 duplex) to be constructed for Imam and Muazzin.
3.1. 2 There are 3 different villa types for employee houses to be
constructed, namely Type B (90 units, Type C (279 units), Type D
(122 units) and 1 type for which 3 duplex are to be constructed for
Imam and Muazzin Houses.
3.1. 3 The villas shall be constructed using isolated footings with
framed superstructure infill with conventional wall (CMU) cladding.
These units shall be all two stories structures with additional maid’s
quarter and laundry area at the roof deck. Each lot has a carport
area. The typical ground floor has areas for men’s majlis, women’s
majlis, family sitting, dining room, men’s wash and toilet, family
wash and toilet, kitchen and dirty kitchen.
3.1. 4 Description of the Villas:
Type Style Option Built- up No. of Others
Area Rooms
2
B- Single family Combination 531.36 m 5 Has a
medium villa. of Moroccan bedrooms driver’s
and Spanish with 5 T&B room area.
Style. at the first
floor.
2
C- Single family 3- Style 430.90 m 3 Has a
small villa. options- bedrooms provision
Moroccan, with 3 T&B for future
modern and at First extension
Spanish. floor. (two
bedrooms)
at frist
floor.
2
D- Single family 3- Style 424.07 m 3 Has a
large villa. options- bedrooms provision
Moroccan, with 3 T&B for future
modern and at First extension
Spanish. floor. (two
bedrooms)
at frist
floor.
Imam & Muazzin Modern Style. Combined 3
Villa. total lot bedrooms.
area of
500+ m2
with each
Villa has a
built- up
area of
2
250 m .
3.1. 5 PC Contractor’s Responsibilities:

The PC contractor shall be responsible:
I) To be aware, well versed and complying with Royal
commissions requirement.
II) To supply all agricultural soil required in green areas
(planting works is excluded and only optional) with in the
lot for each of the aforementioned villa types including all
associated boundary walls.
III) To coordinated with the statutory Authorities i.e. Marafiq.
SEC and STC on the basic requirements for tie- ins and
other interfaces with existing and/ or future facilities at lot
boundaries, are to be coordinated with the statutory
Authorities i.e. Marafiq, SEC and STC. Permanent
connection fees for power and water will be paid by SAUDI
ARAMCO.
IV) TO obtain all approvals from the related utility authorities
to abtain the necessary building permit for temporary
facilities and permanent buildings.
V) For all the necessary coordination and support in the
supply and installation of watt- hour meter by SCECO.
VI) For all the necessary coordination and support in the
supply and installation of water meters by marafiq.
VII) To provide provision for the future expansion shown in the
drawing provide the best practice for future expansion
installation without any impairment with the original
Utilities.
VIII) To have investigated and acquainted itself with all general,
local, climatic, physical, geological, and sub- surface
conditions at the site and assumes full responsibility for all
matters relating to works arising out of the bid documents.
IX) To provide all temporary facilities on site without any cost
to SAUDI ARAMCO including but not limited to site offices,
storage area, safety, security, water, power, telephone,
office & pantry consumables, office cleaning and
maintenance, toilet consumables, scaffolding etc. as well
as facilities for all domestic subcontractors and SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant Office.
X) To provide trash bins and skips to manage waste items;
location and distribution of skips will be as per Royal
Commission approval.
XI) To keep the construction site clean and tidy by providing
sufficient trash bins and skips that meet Royal Commission
requirements and will dispose of the waste to a designated
landfill area by Royal Commission. SAUDI ARAMCO will not
accept any uncleanness and untidiness within the
construction site, if so, SAUDI ARAMCO will require the PC
Contractor to provide additional bins at their cost.
XII) To provide perimeter fence during the construction period
Materials to be used shall be as per the approved
specification from Royal Commission, otherwise the PC
Contractor have to comply with Royal Commission
Material Specification without any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
XIII) For all builders work in connection with any works related
to the civil, electrical, mechanical (HVAC),
plumbing/sanitary/sewage included in the scope of work
and shall be included in the lump sum price. This includes
but not limited to:
a) Concrete equipment bases/pads.
b) Pipe supports, plinths including embedment as
necessary.
c) Hollow core slabs, support beams, columns and
the like, together with necessary waterproofing
(membrane, elastomeric, integral type)/damp
proofing/vapor barriers.
d) Roof access ladder.
e) Access panels in the false ceiling or shaft (If
applicable).
XIV) To coordinate the requirements for all builders' work. No
holes or fixings shall be cut or formed without the prior
approval of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant. No claim will be entertained for any abortive
work executed due to lack of coordination. Any changes
made in the field verbally will be followed by written
agreement between Client's representative and that of PC
Contractor's representative duly signed by agreeing
parties.
XV) To submit complete set of as-built drawings for each type
of villa (three hard copies + two soft copies) and refer to
Item 6 3 1 of this document.
XVI) Upon completion of all fields testing, The PC Contractor to
submit to SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant not limited to three (3) copies of Operation and
Maintenance Manuals in accordance to a pre-approved
manual structure and refer to Item 6.3.1 of this document.
XVII) To furnish all necessary labor, materials. tools and
equipment to complete the work.
XVIII) To provide sufficient technical manpower and workforce
to deliver the project as per schedule.
XIX) In case the PC Contractor doesn't meet the project
schedule of delivery, SAUDI ARAMCO has the right to
oblige the PC Contractor to provide additional technical
manpower and workforce to meet the schedule without
any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
XX) To provide a house keeping pad for all floor mounted
equipment. Pad shall be 100 mm minimum in height from
finished floor/roof level.
3. 2 MOBILIZATION, TEMPORARY WORKS & PERMANENT WORKS:

(DIVISIONI - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS):
3.2. 1 The PC Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any
necessary mobilization and relocation of such temporary works
dunng the construction period as may be required In order to
complete the permanent works. Any proposed change in location
or relocation of any temporary works must be preceded by the
submission of drawing(s), indicating such change to SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant for his approval.
3.2. 2 All temporary works shall be constructed with the standard for
similar permanent facilities and shall comply with the applicable
rules, regulations and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.2. 3 Temporary facility shall be designed and constructed as per
SAUDI ARAMCO's Space requirement. See attached Scope of Work
for Temporary Facility in Attachment I.
3.2. 4 The mobilization should commence in line with the General
Conditions of Contract (GCC) after the Notice to Proceed (NTP),
letter of acceptance or date of signing the contract and upon its
issuance.
3.2. 5 Within seven (7) calendar days of the date of commencement
of the mobilization period, PC Contractor shall submit for approval
fully dimensioned plans and details showing the proposed location
and layout on the site of all necessary temporary buildings
Including SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant office
accommodations (located apart from PC Contractor's offices),
materials stores, messing facilities etc., as such. Plans and
execution shall also Include (but not limited to) the following
without any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO:
a) PC Contractor shall provide temporary access routes to,
from, and upon the site Access should be well paved and
passable at all times with proper markings and signs for
safety and convenience In identification especially by
suppliers/vendors and other entities that have business the
project.
b) PC Contractor shall provide temporary fencing. gates, and
other security requirements. The materials for the
temporary fencing shall be approved by Royal Commission.
c) PC Contractor shall provide covered or open areas
designated for materials storage with proper markings and
signage whether for Informative or warning.
d) PC Contractor shall provide area for Equipment and for
construction light & heavy vehicles parking (like: bobcat,
dump trucks, bulldozer, backhoes and etc).
e) PC Contractor shall provide vehicle parking for PC
Contractors' personnel, covered parking area for SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant staff.
f) PC Contractor shall provide refuse storage and collection
points during the execution of temporary and permanent
works Distribution of trash bins shall be as per Royal
Commission requirement.
g) PC Contractor shall provide project sign boards, safety signs,
and accesses signs. Signage shall be placed at strategic
locations only, designated and approved by SAUDI ARAMCO.
h) PC Contractor shall provide security services. The Contractor
Security group shall be duly responsible of safe keeping and
preventing any trespassing within the entire project and
should have a close coordination SAUDI ARAMCO.
i) All the above mentioned services shall be provided and
undertaken by PC Contractor without any cost to SAUDI
ARAMCO.
3. 3 TEMPORARY WATER, ELECTRICITY, FIREFIGHTING AND SEWAGE
The Contractor shall:
3.3. 1 Provide fresh water supply, showing location of potable
drinking water storage tanks, tanker fill points.
3.3. 2 Provide temporary water Iines of distribution within the project
for the temporary facility during the project execution.
3.3. 3 Provide temporary water supply for execution of permanent
works until the temporary or permanent water supply from Marafiq is
acquired.
3.3. 4 Provide temporary power generation, temporary switch boards
etc. for all temporary facilities as required until the temporary or
permanent power supply form SEC is acquired.
3.3. 5 Provide temporary power generation, temporary switch boards
etc. for all execution of permanent works as required until the
temporary or permanent power supply form SEC is acquired.
3.3. 6 Provide temporary fire protection facilities, showing location of
the firefighting water storage tanks, tanker fill points, pumping and
fire hose stations plus fire extinguisher as per Royal Commission
requirement, within the project for the execution of permanent
works.
3.3. 7 Pay all the bills of temporary electricity and water bills during
the execution of works.
3.3. 8 Provide sewage disposal and surface water drainage for the
temporary facility during the project execution.
3.3. 9 Provide Telephone services & full IT Equipment in the
temporary facility. (Not limited to Computers, printers, scanners &
Projector in the meeting room).
3.3. 10 Provide the garbage collection and disposal services, this shall
include collecting and dumping of the bins from the site to RC land fill
area as required.
3.3. 11 All the above mentioned services shall be provided and
undertaken by the Contractor without any cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.
3.3. 12 PC contractor shall provide smoking area for workers.
3. 4 ENGINEERING (DIV.1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS)
The Contractor shall be deemed to have scrutinized, and satisfied Itself as
to the completeness, accuracy and sufficiency of the engineering
deliverables for the purposes of carrying out and completing the work
requirements and passing the tests at completion. Any data or
information received by the Contractor from SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant or otherwise, shall not relieve the Contractor
from its responsibility for the execution of the works.
3.4. 1 Civil and Site Preparation Work (Div. 1 - General Requirements
and Div. 2 - Site Works):
3.4.4.4.1 The Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary
works such as but not limited to:
a) All surveying and setting out including provision and
protection of local reference survey stations. Survey
monuments and survey control monuments and/or
benchmarks for setting out of the works are to be
established on the work site and described in the
drawings, The Contractor shall carefully preserve all
monuments. benchmarks and reference points, The
Contractor will be charged with the expense of
replacement of any such items destroyed and shall be
responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be
caused. Permanent monuments or benchmarks which
must be removed or disturbed shall be protected until
they can be properly referenced for relocation. The
Contractor shall furnish materials and assistance for the
proper replacement of such monuments or benchmarks.
Any approved changed that have been made to all the
referential markings should be reflected in the drawings
and revised drawings should be immediately and
properly disseminated/coordinated to the builders in the
field to avoid costly mistake.
3.4.4.4.2 The PC Contractor shall protect all existing infrastructure
at all times and shall be responsible for any or all damage to
other contractors work already on site or any adjoining
properly.
a) Soil replacement- The PC Contractor's attention is
directed to the soil replacement required as indicated on
the design drawings and associated structural notes.
Existing soil may have to be replaced with appropriate fill
material in accordance with the Contract Specification.
b) Testing of all materials as specified.
c) Clearing and grubbing for not less than 200 mm from the
natural existing level.
d) Removal of stripped vegetation, debris, surplus and
unsuitable material from site to a nominated off-site dip
or disposal facility.
e) Site preparation including excavation in any kind of
materials by whatever means necessary, filling and
compaction, rough grading and drainage.
f) Supply of selected material or fill.
g) Finished grading.
h) Interlock paving tiles including all consumables to
complete the work.
i) Alterations to footpaths and sidewalks including
modifications to ramp entrances.
j) Temporary work, including removal and reinstatement
at completion.
k) Onsite underground services and utilities, including
potable water, sanitary sewer lines, telecom and power
complete with testing. Whilst the bid documents show a
typical site utilities coordination layout for each house
type, The PC Contractor is responsible to make the
necessary allowances for each specific house and submit
the associated shop drawings.
l) Utility tie-ins to existing off-site services. The PC
Contractor shall liaise with the statutory authorities to
agree on the location/details of tie-ins.
m) Trenching for electrical and telecommunication cables.
n) Chambers to underground services, including manholes,
draw pits and valve boxes, ducl banks, catch basin and
the Like.
o) Underground storage tanks and their accessories.
3.4 2 Architectural Work:

The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary
works such as but not limited to:
a) Preparation of shop drawings for buildings based on
architectural system and details shown on drawings, The PC
Contractor shall submit shop drawings when required for
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant review
and approval.
b) Masonry, including ancillaries for service conduits for
boundary walls, (Diy 4 - Masonry).
c) Architectural concrete, including lintels, coping stones and
sills. (Dlv.3- Concrete).
d) Floor screeds. (Div.9- Finishes).
e) Roofing, including drainage, insulation, screed, membrane,
protection and flood test of flat roofs (Dlv.7- Thermal and
Moisture Protection).
f) Rainwater system, Including scupper drains, (Diy.15
Mechanical).
g) Doors and ironmongery. (Diy.8- Doors and Windows).
h) Windows, glazing and privacy screens, (Diy.8 Doors and
Windows).
i) Plastering and painting. (Div. 9- Finishes).
j) Floor and wall finishes, including ceramic tiles and skirtings'
Spare tiles shall be provided. (Div 9- Finishes).
k) Suspended ceilings. (Div.9- Finishes).
l) Sanitary system, including fittings, plumbing, cleaning and
testing. (Div. 15-Mechanical).
m) Fixtures and fittings, including toilet facilities, handrails and
louvers (Div.5 - Metals, Div 6 - Wood & Plastics, Div. 10 –
Specialties and Div. 11- Equipment).
n) Residential equipment, range hoods (Div.11-Equipment).
o) Kitchen Cabinet, nooks and counter tops shall be KAFCO
Brand.
p) All toilet doors shall have 25 mm undercut doors.
q) Any other works shown on the drawings or described in the
specifications or necessary to complete the work.
3.4 3 Structural Work (Div. 3 - Concrete: Reinforced and Pre-cast
Concrete):
a) All concreting works such as slabs, columns, beams, footings
and stairs among others shall be cast-in-situ using ready-mix
concrete.
b) The PC Contractor to prepare submittal forms and submit all
necessary materials, technical submittals including but not
limited to proposed suppliers, subcontractors, method
statements, mix design data, among others; for approval of
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant prior to
installation and fabrication. Any materials installed on the
buildings without any approval will be removed when it does
not conform to the drawings, plans and specification and
other contractual documents.
c) The PC Contractor shall prepare shop drawings for buildings
based on structural system and details shown on drawings.
The PC Contractor shall submit additional shop drawings
when required for SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant review and approval. The PC Contractor also to
submit bar bending schedule prior to start any work.
d) The PC Contractor shall supply and execute all structural
members shown on the drawings including but not limited
to foundations, beams, walls, columns and grade/suspended
slabs. This will include the reinforcement and shuttering and
any other works related to structure shown on the drawings
or stated in the specifications necessary to complete the
work.
e) The PC Contractor will execute all the Civil and Structural
related works Including all foundations, steel frames or
pedestals for the mechanical and electrical works whenever
and wherever it is necessary under the Contract as shown in
the Drawings or specifications required as common practice.
f) The PC Contractor shall ensure compliance with Structural
Design Drawings Including all the associated (Structural
Design) Notes included in Structural Design package.
g) Metal works for Monkey ladder shall be but not limited to
G.I pipe 25 mm diameter and painted with same color with
the external paint PC contractor to consider standard.
3.4 4 Mechanical Work (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection
System):
3.4.5. 1 HVAC Primary Scope Of Works (Div. 15- Mechanical):
3.4.4.2.1 Supply, install, test and commission the following as
shown on drawings and in accordance with technical
specifications.
a. Mini split and concealed type air conditioning
equipment and accessories.
b. Refrigerant pipework including pipe fittings, supports
and thermal insulation.
c. Ceiling mounted exhaust fans for toilet & bath rooms.
d. Inline exhaust fan for kitchen.
e. Kitchen hood extract air duct work.
3.4.4.2.2 The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all necessary
works such as but not limited to tile following unless otherwise
directed by the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant:
a. Heating ventilating and air conditioning system shall be
installed in accordance with latest guidelines,
specifications and standards and as per manufacturer’s
manual and other approved submittal data.
b. All heating ventilating and air conditioning drawings shall
be read in conjunction with general notes, specifications,
miscellaneous details; including architectural, electrical,
structural, piping and instrumentation drawings.
c. All duct work and accessories shall be designed and
fabricated in accordance with the latest edition of sheet
metal and air conditioning contractor national
association (SMACNA) duct construction standards.
d. Access to all HVAC equipment and accessories shall be
provided.
e. All duct sizes indicated are inside dimension.
f. All rotating and sliding components of equipment shall
be guarded in accordance With OSHA requirements.
g. The PC Contractor shall be responsible for preparing
shop drawings, technical calculation data sheet,
verification of heat load calculations, static pressure
calculations and verification of equipment proposed
prior to ordering the equipment.
h. Ductwork seams and joints shall be sealed with specified
sealant (if applicable).
i. All ceiling access panel shall not be less than 500 x 500
mm.
j. All dimensions must be verified, any discrepancies
shown in the drawing must be immediately reported to
the engineer in charge.
k. Mini split unit condensate drain pipes shall be connected
to the nearest floor drain with proper slope according to
the standards.
l. The nominated subcontractor is to identify and
coordinate all openings thru roof with architectural,
structural and electrical drawings before the roof
construction.
m. All pressure drops indicated In the schedules are for
reference only. The PC Contractor is to check and
calculate the pressure drops against equipment. Fittings,
accessories and unit installed as per the shop drawing
submitted for approval.
n. All duct wall penetrations shall have no less than 20
gauge sheet metal angles flashing at both sides of the
wall and the space between the duct and wall shall be
filled With 48 kg/m3 density fiber glass insulation.
o. All duct roof penetration cavities shall be filled With 48
kg/m3 density fiber glass insulation and have no less than
20 gauge sheet metal angles flashing secured to the roof
slab.
p. The PC Contractor shall submit the sectional view
drawings of areas where anticipated congestion might
occur to resolve clashes.
q. Provide supports and hangers required for proper
Installation of equipment.
r. Refrigerant piping shall be installed as shown in the
equipment detailed drawings.
s. Refrigerant piping Insulation shall be provided as shown
in the equipment detailed drawings.
3.4.5. 2 HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (Div. 15-
Mechanical):
3.4.4.2.1 The minimum requirements for testing, adjusting and
balancing (TAB) of heating, ventilating and air conditioning
(HVAC) distribution system shall be as follows:
a. The PC Contractor shall carry out the testing,
adjusting and balancing of the HVAC system as per
SMACNA or NEBB procedural standards.
b. All necessary test equipment, instruments,
materials, and labor required for performing the
entire test described in these specifications shall
be provided as a part of the work of this section.
c. The PC Contractor shall review and be thoroughly
familiar with the basic equipment layout prior to
ceiling and wall installation Prior to any closing-in
of ductwork, verify that all fittings. Dampers,
control devices, test devices and valves are
properly located and installed.
d. Examine each air distribution system to see that it
is free from obstruction and that the moving
equipment is lubricated and functioning properly
and that the required filters are clean and
installed.
e. The PC Contractor shall submit the testing,
adjusting and balancing test procedures to the
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
for approval prior to starting the TAB work.
f. The PC Contractor shall use test instruments that
have been calibrated Within a time period
recommended by the manufacturer or in the
SMACNA HVAC systems testing, adjusting and
balancing manual and that they have been
checked for accuracy prior to the start of the
testing, adjusting and balancing activity.
g. Verify that all the equipment performs as
specified.
h. Adjust kitchen exhaust inline fan to handle and
properly distribute the design air flow within +
10% of specified air flow.
i. Test all condensate drainage piping from air
treatment and handling equipment by plugging
outlets and filing to high point of each drain,
Repair or replace all defective materials, and
retest until proved tight.
j. The PC Contractor shall document the results of
all testing on SMACNA or NEBB TAB reports forms
and submit specified copies for approval and
record.
3.4.5. 3 WARRANTY:
3.4.4.3.1 For product and workmanship related warranties,
refer to Schedule A - General Conditions of Contract:
3.4.5. 4 PLUMBING PRIMARY SCOPE OF WORKS (Div. 15 -
Mechanical):
3.4.4.4.1 Supply. install, test and commission the
following as shown on the drawings and in accordance
with technical specifications:
a. Central hot water generator and accessories.
b. Unitary water heater for Driver's room.
c. Install sanitary fixtures and brass fixtures for
sanitary appliances including drainage and
water supply connections.
d. External cold water pipe work including pipe
fittings and supports.
e. Internal cold water pipe work including pipe
fittings and supports.
f. Internal hot water pipe work Including pipe
fittings. Support and thermal insulation.
g. Internal drainage pipe work including fittings,
supports and accessories.
h. External drainage pipe work Including fittings,
supports and accessories.
i. Floor drain, floor/wall cleanouts, p-traps,
grease trap, ground clean outs, building clean-
outs, vent bowels etc.
3.4.5. 5 Piping - General Notes:
3.4.4.5.1 The plumbing drawings shall be read in
conjunction with other related drawings, general
diagrams and miscellaneous details, notes.
Specifications and bill of quantities.
3.4.4.5.2 The PC Contractor shall execute all of the
work In accordance with approved shop and
installation drawings as per the provisions of the
specifications and International plumbing code.
3.4.4.5.3 No portion of any plumbing system shall be
concealed until inspected tested and approved.
3.4.4.5.4 Install all piping to allow thermal expansion
and contraction without injury to piping, equipment
or structure.
3.4.4.5.5 Conceal all pipe installations in pipe chases,
utility spaces below grade of floors, etc., unless
otherwise indicated.
3.4.4.5.6 Install all piping free of sags or bends and
with ample space between piping for proper
maintenance.
3.4.4.5.7 Install piping at right angles or parallel to
building walls, Diagonal or bent piping will not be
permitted.
3.4.4.5.8 Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or
other foreign materials during the construction
period. At the completion of the project, all dirt and
foreign matter in the piping shall be removed
completely.
3.4.4.5.9 Piping passing through exterior building
walls shall be caulked.
3.4.4.5.10 Provide drain lines from all relief valves and
condensate pans and run drain line full size to the
nearest floor or equipment drain.
3.4.4.5.11 Verify existing grades, inverts and
topographic conditions prior to any trenching,
excavation, or installations. In the event of existing
conditions prevent installation in accordance with
contract documents, immediately notify the SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant.
3.4.4.5.12 Horizontal piping shall slope uniformly
without sags or humps to provide for complete
drainage of systems and elimination of air.
3.4.4.5.13 Piping shall be cut accurately to
measurements established at the site, worked into
place without springing or forcing, and shall clear all
Windows, doors and other openings. Cutting or other
weakening of building structure to facilitate piping
installation is not permitted; install to permit free
expansion and contraction without damage. No pipe
should be subjected to torsion or elongation effect.
3.4.4.5.14 Provide necessary temporary connections,
valves, oversize flushing connections, etc. as required
to properly clean and test systems.
3.4.4.5.15 Coordinate piping installations with
structure, lighting, electrical conduit and all other
materials and equipment.
3.4.4.5.16 Any leaking joint shall be completely
disassembled and replaced with new materials.
3.4.4.5.17 All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be
cleaned and solvent cement applied for full
circumferential cover.
3.4.4.5.18 Copper joints shall be made using 95-5 Tin-
Antimony solders ASTM B32.
3.4.4.5.19 Locate all equipment that must be serviced,
operated, or maintained, in fully accessible positions,
Deviations from the drawings may be discussed with
the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
and proceed after approval.
3.4.4.5.20 PC Contractor shall be responsible for all
culling, filling, or patching of his work which may be
required to make its several parts come together
properly and fit It to receive, or be received, by work
of other trades. Cutting of structural members shall
not be done without approval of SAUDI
3.4.4.5.21 Place sleeves through all the walls, floors and
ceilings during the initial construction where it is
necessary for piping to go through. When this IS not
done, do all cutting and patching required for the
Installation of the work. Any damage caused to the
building by this cutting and patching, shall be
corrected at no additional cost No piping will be
allowed to pass though structural concrete (beams,
girders, columns, suspended slabs) unless otherwise
approved and permitted by the SAUDI ARAMCO/
Project Management Consultant in writing.
3.4.4.5.22 Patching of all openings for new Installations
(provision for future expansion) and all openings
resulting from the removal or relocation of any
installations shall be done by craftsmen skilled In the
particular trade affected, with same materials as of
adjoining openings.
3.4.4.5.23 Supports, hangers, anchors or guides shall
be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping.
3.4.4.5.24 Plumbing works herein shall be done in
accordance with the provision of RC standards and
International Plumbing Codes.
3.4.4.5.25 Before performing any work, The PC
Contractor shall thoroughly examine all existing
conditions, point of connections, sizes, depths,
locations, etc.
3.4.4.5.26 Drawings are diagrammatic and do not
show all the offsets, bends, etc. which may be
required for proper installations of work, Such work
shall be provided with additional bends and offsets as
necessary and verified at the site.
3.4.4.5.27 Locate floor drain and floor cleanout to suit
floor tiles.
3.4.4.5.28 Provide PVC pipe sleeve with caulking for all
pipes passing thru concrete structures.
3.4.4.5.29 The plumbing system shall be designed in
accordance with the local Saudi codes and
specifications and in the absence of a Saudi Code, in
accordance with the International Plumbing Codes
(IPC - 2009).
3.4.4.5.30 Any conflict or deviation from the above
mentioned standards require a waiver from SAUDI
3.4.4.5.31 The PC Contractor shall submit shop
drawings for the plumbing systems and plumbing
fixtures in compliance with SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant requirement.
3.4.4.5.32 Provision to access all serviceable plumbing
equipment and accessories shall be made,
Chipping/demolition of concrete on walls and floors to
bury or to conceal piping/electrical system aside from
those indicated in the drawings will need the written
approval from SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant.
3.4.4.5.33 Each piece of equipment and all of the
systems shall be adjusted to ensure proper
functioning of all controls, elimination of all noise and
vibration and left in excellent operating condition.
3.4.5. 6 SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM:
3.4.4.6.1 Horizontal lines shall be supported by well
secured heavy-strap hangers. Vertical lines shall be
secured strongly by hooks to the building frame and a
suitable bracket or chair shall be provided at places
where they start.
3.4.4.6.2 All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall
be extended full size to and above the roof line to act
as vents, except where otherwise specifically
indicated.
3.4.4.6.3 Vent pipes in roof spaces shall run as close as
possible to underside of roof, with horizontal piping
pitched down 10 slacks without forming traps, Vertical
pipes may be connected into one main vent riser
above the highest vented fixtures:
a. Where an end of circuit vent pipe for any
fixtures or line of fixture is connected to vent
line serving other fixtures, the connections shall
be at least 1200 mm above the floor on which
the fixtures are located to prevent the use of
any vent line as waste.
b. Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge
from two or more fixtures shall be provided
with vents before the last fixture unless
separate venting of fixtures is noted.
3.4.4.6.4 Rough-In for pipes and fixtures shall be
carried along With the building construction. Correctly
located openings of proper sizes shall be provided
where required in the walls and floors for the passage
of pipes.
3.4.4.6.5 All changes in pipe sizes on soil waste and
drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings or
reducers.
a. All changes in direction shall be made by the
appropriate use of forty five degrees wyes, or
long sweep bends, except that sanitary tees
may be used on vertical stacks and short
quarter bends or elbows may be used in Soil and
waste lines where the change in direction of
floor is from the horizontal to the vertical and
on the dischargeline from the water closet.
3.4.4.6.6 Ail vent pipes passing through the roof shall
be flashed as indicated on the drawing.
3.4.4.6.7 Soil and waste below grade shall be 2%
minimum towards flow for 4" diameter and below and
1% for pipes above 4" diameter unless otherwise
specified. Install immediately after excavation. Lay
pipe so that entire length bears on firm Soil Excavate
for hub. Do not backfill until installation has been
observed and approved by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant. Verify elevations of the
sewer line at different point before installation.
Backfilling materials should be suitable selected fill
materials free from harmful objects like woods,
timbers or any materials which might be breeding
grounds for termites or harmful insects.
a. Soil and waste above grade shall be as below
grade piping, Hang each entirely to its slope,
Support vertical stacks at each floor, both
horizontally and vertically.
b. Vents slope up to high point, connect multiple
vents to single vent before penetrating roof.
Hang each length of vent pipe from structure to
grade.
3.4.4.6.8 All vertical piping shall be supported at each
floor level with clamps and spring hangers. The
maximum spacing for horizontal pipes of 100 mm
diameter or larger shall not exceed 2,0 meters, For
pipes less than 100 mm diameter the spacing of
hangers shall be at a maximum of 1,50 meters on
centers.
3.4.4.6.9 Cast Iron sleeves shall be provided for pipes
passing through walls, partitions or floors and fitted
into place at time of construction, Each sleeve shall
extend through its respective wall, floor, and shall be
cut flush with each surface except where clamping
flanges are used. All adjoining parts of the structures
should be left In good conditions and finished to the
satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant.
3.4.4.6.10 All stacks shall be provided with accessible
cleanouts positioned above the flood level of the
highest fixture.
3.4.4.6.11 Drainage, vent and storm systems within the
interior of all villas shall be tested by the PC Contractor
and approved by the SAUDI ARAMCQ/Project
Management SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant in accordance with the provisions of the
International Plumbing Codes.
3.4.4.6.12 Combine vent stacks with soil and waste
stack before passing through roof.
3.4.4.6.13 Vent through roof shall be extended through
its flashing and shall terminate vertically not less than
150 mm above the roof nor less than 300 mm from
any vertical surface and terminate with vent cap.
3.4.4.6.14 Concrete encase the underground sanitary
sewer and waste pipe, if required by the common
practice and to the discretion of the SAUDI
3.4.5. 7 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEM:
3.4.4.7.1 All supplies, hardware, trim traps, etc. to
fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated if
exposed to view.
3.4.4.7.2 No underground or under slab water piping
within building shall be permitted unless specifically
approved by SAUDIARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant.
3.4.4.7.3 Water pipes shall not be run or laid In the
same trench with building sewer or drainage piping,
The bottom of water pipe at all points shall be at least
300 mm above the top of sewer line when crossing
occur.
3.4.4.7.4 Devices installed in the potable water supply
system for protection against backflow or back siphon
age shall be maintained in accessible position and
installed In the direction as specified by the
manufacturer.
3.4.4.7.5 Domestic water systems shall be flushed free
of ail foreign material prior to usage. Sterilization shall
be performed in accordance with the AWWA
recommendation.
3.4.4.7.6 All domestic hot and cold water piping shall
run generally in the space above false ceiling and in
the pipe chases.
3.4.4.7.7 All internal hot and cold water pipes Inside
the wails for final termination to the fixtures shall be
copper pipe type L in accordance with ASTM B88. cold
water pipes below ground to be wrapped by DENSO
type and hot water pipe above ground shall be
wrapped by insulation.
3.4.4.7.8 The size of all PVC and copper pipes shown
are nominal outside diameter.
3.4.4.7.9 Isolating valve shall be provided to each
main branch and chrome plated brass angle valves
shall be provided to each fixture.
3.4.5. 8 Testing and Balancing Procedure:
3.4.4.8.1 The PC Contractor shall completely test all
water system as part of work. The term “water
system” shall be understood and intended to mean all
cold and hot water connections and associated
equipment connected to the system Including the
building Irrigation system.
3.4.4.8.2 The testing work shall be supervised by
certified personnel experienced in testing procedure.
3.4.4.8.3 Irrigation system shall be provided during
the construction; connecting from the Villa to the
Future Expansions or any open area that may be
connected into a usable space.
3.4.4.8.4 All water system piping shall be tested for
maximum working pressure equivalent to 344.5 Kpa
(50 PSI) air pressure or 150% of the area working
pressure, valves shall be tested for maximum working
pressure equivalent to 230 Kpa air pressure as
specified by International Plumbing Code and
Regulation of Saudi Building Code.
3.4.5. 9 TESTING PLUMBING AND WATER SYSTEM:
3.4.4.9.1 Test, Flushing and Stenlization:
a. The plumbing system shall be tested in
accordance with the National Standard
Plumbing Code Procedures.
The test requirements shall be as follows:
i. Sewage systems - 3 meter head from the last
highest fixture/fitting for 24 hours duration.
ii. Hot and cold Water supply - 10 bars pressure
for 24 hours duration.
3.4.4.9.2 Defective Work.
a. If inspection or test shows defects, such
defective work or material shall be replaced or
repaired as necessary and inspection and test
shall be repeated Repairs to piping shall be
made With new materials, No caulking of
screwed joints or holes will be accepted.
3.4.4.9.3 Operational Test.
a. Upon completion of and prior to acceptance of
the installation, the PC Contractor shall subject
the plumbing system to operating tests to
demonstrate satisfactory functional and
operational efficiency. Such operating test shall
cover a period of not less than 24 hours for each
system and shall include the following
Information in a report with conclusion as to the
adequacy of the system.
i. Time, date and duration of test.
ii. Water pressures at the most remote and
the highest fixtures.
iii. Operation of each fixture and fixture
trim.
iv. Operational of each valve and faucet.
v. Temperature of each domestic hot-
water supply.
vi. Operation of each floor drain by flooding
with water.
vii. Operation of each vacuum breaker and
backflow preventer.
3.4.4.9.4 Sterilization of Hot & Cold Water System:
a. After pressure test have been made, the
entire domestic hot and cold water
distribution system to be sterilized shall
be thoroughly flushed with water of
sufficient velocity until all entrained dirt
and other foreign material have been
removed, before Introducing chlorinating
material. The chlorinating material shall
be either liquid chlorine conforming to
A\NWA 8301 or hypochlorite conforming
to A\NWA 8300. Water chlorination
procedure shall be in accordance with
A\NWA M20.
3.4.4.9.5 Hot & Cold Water System Flushing:
a. After tests are completed, potable water
piping shall be flushed. In general,
sufficient water shall be used to produce
a minimum water velocity of 0.76 MPS
through piping being flushed. Flushing
shall be continued until discharge water
shows no discoloration. System shall be
drained at low points. Strainer screens
shall be removed, cleaned and replaced
in line. After flushing and cleaning,
systems shall be prepared for service by
immediately filling water piping with
clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage,
discoloration, or other damage to finish,
furnishings, or parts of the building, due
to the PC Contractor's failure to properly
clean tI1e piping system, shall be repaired
by the PC Contractor. When the work is
complete, the hot-water system shall be
adjusted for uniform circulation, Flush
valves and automatic control devices
shall be adjusted for proper operation.
3.4.5. 10 WARRANTY:
For product and workmanship related warranties,
refer to Schedule A.
 General Conditions of Contract.
3.4.5. 11 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PRIMARY SCOPE OF WORKS:
3.4.4.12.1 Supply, install, test and
commission the following as shown on
drawings and in accordance with technical
specifications.
a. Portable fire extinguishers and specified
accessories.
b. Fire blanket.
3.4.4.12.2 The PC Contractor shall furnish

all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
transportation and services necessary to
install and test a complete functional fire
protection system.
a. Portable Fire Extinguisher:
i. All firefighting equipment’s
shall be ULI FM approved.
3.4.4.12.3 The fire protection system shall

comply with NFPA code and must be
approved by the local authority having
jurisdiction. The PC Contractor shall be
responsible for getting the required
approval of the entire fire protection system
from local civil defense authority.
3.4.5. 12 Inspection and Testing:
3.4.4.12.1 A thorough visual Inspection of
the installed system shall be performed as
per NFPA requirements for proper size,
supports, location and tie-Ins.
i. Fire extinguishing systems
shall comply with NFPA
standards No, 10.
a. Installation of Fire Extinguishers:
i. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for
installing fire extinguishers and
mounting brackets.
ii. Coordinate exact location of all
fire extinguishers with
electrical panel location, Sizes,
architectural equipment’s and
light switches. Submit shop
drawings for SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant
approval.
iii. Mounting Height.
b. Install extinguishers at a height indicated
below:
i. Install fire extinguishers mounted
on hangers or brackets attached to
a wall so that the lop of the
extinguisher is not more than
1.067 m above the floor.
ii. In no case shall the clearance
between the bottom of the fire
extinguisher and the floor be less
than 100 mm.
c. Locations:
Install extinguishers at locations stated
below:
i. Install fire extinguishers at locations
specified on the drawings or as
directed by the authority having
jurisdiction.
ii. Fire extinguishers shall be
conspicuously located, along normal
paths of travel, including exits from
areas.
Extinguishers shall not be obstructed
or obscured from view.
iii. Install portable fire extinguishers on
the hanger or in the bracket supplied
or placed in the fire extinguisher
cabinets. Provided. Verify that the
extinguisher operating instructions
face outward.
d. Smoke Detector/Heal Detector:
i. The smoke detector shall be ceiling
mounted, optical type or ionization
type, UL Listed, 220V, 60Hz and 9V
battery back-up, self-alarm.
ii. The heat detector shall be ceiling
mounted, UL Listed, 220V, 60Hz and
9V battery back-up, self-alarm.
3.4.5. 13 Installation and Testing:
3.4.4.13.1 Materials, products and
equipment furnished by the PC Contractor
shall be Installed and all work shall be
performed in a first class workman-like
manner, in conformity with the best trade,
practices, to produce satisfactory results, in
a safe, neat, orderly appearance and to
facilitate operating, servicing. Maintaining
and repairing.
3.4.4.13.2 Smoke &Heat detectors shall
conform to applicable standards. NFPA 70 &
NFPA 72.
3.4.5 Electrical Work (Div. 16 - Electrical):
3.4.6. 1 The PC Contractor shall supply and construct all
necessary works such as but not limited to:
3.4.6.1.1 Complete supply, installation, testing
and commissioning of all electrical items as per
the tender documents.
3.4.6.1.2 All provisions but not limited with the
above Item 34.5 shall have complete piping
works and wiring works for lighting points and
wiring devices, to be prepared for fixture
installations.
3.4.6.1.3 All electrical equipment and materials
shall be In accordance with the NEC & SASO
standards and specifications.
3.4.6.1.4 The Contractor shall provide all
equipment and labor as deemed necessary for
the proper execution of the work.
3.4.6.1.5 All work shall be performed In
professional manner, in conformance with the
applicable Saudi codes and standards and the
best electrical engineering practice.
3.4.6.1.6 Work shall be performed by skilled
workers appropriately equipped to produce
satisfactory results in a safe and proper manner
so as to avoid undue stresses.
3.4.6.1.7 It shall be the PC Contractor's sole
responsibility to:
a. Obtain Saudi Electric Company -Eastern
Operating Area (SEC-EOA) necessary
approvals.
b. Follow strictly SEC-EOA standard and
regulations.
c. Closely coordinate with SEC-EOA with
regards to the utility interface.
d. Coordinate with SEC-EOA.
3.4.6.1.8 The PC Contractor shall be fully
responsible for any mechanical damage upon
installation of various items and their related
accessories.
3.4.6.1.9 Submit for approval before any
material delivery to site complete technical
material submittal including manufacture
name, country of origin, local agent/supplier
details, compliance statement,
schematic/single line diagram, original
catalogue/data sheets and sample(s).
3.4.6.1.10 Submit the test certificates of the
materials/electrical equipment for SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant
review upon receiving the material/equipment
on site along with an inspection.
3.4.6.1.11 Store all the critical electrical
equipment in dust free controlled
temperature/atmosphere and preserve the
materials according to manufacturer
instruction.
3.4.6.1.12 Submit before commencing site
installation works, complete shop drawing set
for each type of villa for
SAUDIARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant review and approval.
3.4.6.1.13 Workmanship of electrical
installations shall ensure aesthetical view.
3.4.6.1.14 Submit installation inspection
ARAMCO/Project Management approval.
3.4.6.1.15 Submit testing and commissioning
method statements for all electrical systems.
Components of every system for
Consultant review and approval.
3.4.6.1.16 The PC Contractor shall carry out all
site tests, for each components of every system
in accordance with the approved testing and
commissioning method statements/
Procedures.
Testing and commissioning activities shall
commence after clearance of all snags raised on
the Installations inspection.
3.4.6.1.17 All tests shall be subject to witness by
Consultant At-least four (4) weeks prior to
scheduled tests, the PC contractor shall submit
to the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant outline testing and commissioning
plan, The PC Contractor shall submit
request/invitation for test witnessing at least
two (2) working days before the tests planned
date.
3.4.6.1.18 The PC Contractor shall provide all test
instruments, equipment and accessories
necessary for demonstration and pulling the
equipment into operation before
commissioning.
All testing equipment shall be calibrated by
approved authorities and calibration
certificates shall be submitted to SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant for
their review and approval.
3.4.6.1.19 All installation shall be in accordance
with National Electncal Code (NEG).
3.4.6 TELECOMMUNICATION WORK
3.4.6. 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
3.4.6.1.1 This Section specifies the minimum
technical requirements for supplying,
installing. storing, handling, testing and
commissioning of equipment (wherever
applicable), wires, cables, and connecting
devices used in DATNVOICE/lPTV system,
SMATV system and intercom systems within
the villas.
3.4.6.1.2 Where works Interface with Saudi
Telecommunication Company (STC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall
comply with STC standards latest revision.
3.4.6. 2 SECTION INCLUDES:
3.4.6.2.1 Supply and installation of all necessary
hardware for cable runs such as conduits, pull
boxes, channels, ducts, support units and
conduits for the future extension.
3.4.6. 3 REFERENCES:
3.4.6.3.1 The referred codes and standards are
intended to provide an acceptable level of
quality for materials and products.
3.4.6.3.2 The latest revision of tile referred
codes and standards shall be used wherever
applicable.
3.4.6.3.3 Reference standards:
a. Saudi Telecom Standards.
b. National Electrical Code (NEC) standards.
c. Telecommunication Industry
Association/ Electronic Industries
Association (TIAIEIA) standards.
3.4.6. 4 SUBMITTALS:
3.4.6.4.1 The PC Contractor shall submit to
SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant the following items for review and
approval before commencing work:
a. Detailed dimensioned shop drawings.
b. Manufacturer's data sheets indicating
the necessary installations dimensions,
weights and materials.
c. Operation and maintenance manuals.
d. Certificate of compliance stating that the
materials used conform to all
requirements of specification.
e. Copies of catalogs of all equipment to be
furnished if applicable.
3.4.6.4.2 After installation and commissioning, the PC
Contractor shall submit the following:
a. As-built drawing of complete system.
b. All the test results and commissioning reports to show
that all tests specified was performed and all
requirements have been met.
c. Operation and maintenance and manuals.
d. Test report.
3.4.6. 5 QUALITY CONTROL:
3.4.6.5.1 The PC Contractor shall be responsible for the
quality of work and shall be develop and propose programs
and methods of construction and testing such as to achieve
the specified quality to the approval of SAUDI
3.4.6. 6 COORDINATION:
3.4.6.6.1 The PC Contractor shall be responsible for the
proper coordination of all phases of the work under this
contract.
3.4.6.6.2 It shall be the responsibility of the PC Contractor to
coordinate the work and equipment as specified in
specification and drawings in order to assure a complete and
satisfactory installation.
3.4.6. 7 MATERAIL DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE:
3.4.6.7.1 The PC Contractor shall deliver, handle and store
equipment and material units in accordance with the
manufacture's requirements as well as following
requirements:
a. Ensure equipment and materials are delivered to site
originally packed, securely wrapped and labeled by
manufacturer in unopened containers. Protect
materials during delivery as directed by the
manufacturer.
b. Store materials at building site strictly according to
manufacturer's instruction.
c. Avoid damage or distortion of the materials during
handling and transportation.
d. Be responsible for damages of equipment and
materials occurring during transportation or storage
of the product.
3.4.6. 8 EXECUTION:
3.4.6.8.1 The PC Contractor shall be responsible
for coordinating the installation and activation
of tile communication systems and obtaining
any required permits.
3.4.6.8.2 The PC Contractor shall be responsible
for providing operating and supervisory
personal with adequate knowledge and
experience, All work shall be done in a
workmanlike manner by competent personnel
under the supervision of personnel who have
prior experience in the placing of conduits,
wires, cables and all other related accessories.
3.4.6.8.3 Installation of telecom
conduits/fittings/wiring devices and
termination shall be as per the drawings.
3.4.6.8.4 AJI system installation and activation
work shall be performed according to the
latest manufacturing technology if applicable
and SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant rules and regulations.
3.4.6.8.5 Inside of all conduits shall be
thoroughly clean of any dirt, moisture or other
foreign material before pulling wire and cable.
3.4.6.8.6 Install cable identification tag on each
cable at cabinet and these shall be installed in
easily visible and readable from front access.
3.4.6.8.7 Separation of wires shall comply With
EIA/TIA-569 rules or NEC standards for
separating communication cables from
potential EMI sources, including electrical
power lines.
3.4.6. 9 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING:
3.4.6.9.1 The PC Contractor shall carry out all
site tests in accordance with approved test
procedures to ensure that the materials and
related accessories comply with specifications
and operational requirements All tests are
subject to witnessing by SAUDI
3.4.6.9.2 Upon completion of installation and
prior to final acceptance, each component of
each system shall be tested to the complete
satisfaction of the SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant.
3.4.6.9.3 Upon completion of all testing, the PC
Contractor shall submit certified reports In
accordance with the approved test procedures.
The report for each test shall include the name
of the person in-charge of the test and the date
of performance. All factory and field tests shall
be included in Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
3.4.6.9.4 Care shall be taken that the test
apparatus does not damage the equipment or
other related accessories during the testing.
3.4.6.9.5 All data cables shall be tested using a
Pent Scanner for Cat 6 NEXT lest or SAUDI
accepted equivalent as appropriate:
Measurement shall include:
 Wire map.
 Length.
 Attenuation.
 NEXT.
 PSNEXT.
 ACR.
 Return Loss.
 Propagation Delay.
 Delay Skew.
3.4.7 QA/QC Plan (Div.1 - General Requirements):
3.4.7. 1 The PC Contractor has to establish and
control the procedures of the QNQC, prepare and
submit the quality plan that has to be followed and
implemented during and over the work period
that has to be approved by SAUDI
3.4.7. 2 All procedures as directed by SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant have
to be strictly followed and to be coordinated with
other contractors to ensure the compatible and
unified procedures are applicable to the whole
project. These include but not limited to:
3.4.7.2.1 Work scheduling. Monitoring and
control.
3.4.7.2.2 QN/QC monitoring and record
keeping.
3.4.7.2.3 Progress evaluation, billing and
payments presentation.
3.4.7.2.4 Safety and loss prevention.
3.4.7.2.5 Reporting either regularly (daily,
weekly. monthly) or upon the SAUDI
request.
3.4.7.2.6 HSE Plan, Procurement Plan. Progress
Measurement Plan.
3.4.7. 3 The PC Contractor has to comply and
implement HSE Plan during the construction
period as approved by SAUDI
3.4.8 Reporting:
3.4.8. 1 Reporting requirements are
detailed in the specific Tender/Contract
Appendix. Daily reports by The PC
Contractor will be required to ensure the
work progress. Weekly progress report
including work schedule updates. as well
as HSE and QA/QC reports Will be
required from The PC Contractor, In
addition to any other report needed for
inspections & testing.
4. 4 Project Schedule end Contract Coordination PC Contract:
4.1The PC Contractor shall submit within 30 days from the date of Letter of
Acceptance {LOA}, a P&C schedule for the procurement, execution and
completion of the works, which shall be consistent with the milestones
set out below. The PC Contractor should submit a detailed delivery
schedule as part of their technical proposal. This is to be prepared and
submitted in an Employer approved version of either the PrimaveraP3, or
the MS Project Management software, and this approved scheduling
system shall be adopted for use with the project Bidder to submit detailed
level 3 schedules in P3 based on the agreed pay items of work grouped
into below milestones.
4.2 Activation of Optional Scope, following condition shall be applied:
4.2.1 If SAUDI ARAMCO will activate any of the OPTIONAL SCOPE
during the First Three (3) Months after official handover of the Site,
CONTRACTOR shall include this additional works within the original
Project Duration.
4.2.2 If SAUDI ARAMCO will activate any of the OPTIONAL SCOPE
more than First Three (3) Months after official handover of tile Site,
CONTRACTOR shall submit revised Project Duration Schedule and
subject for SAUDI ARAMCO Approval.
4.3 Duration of Project shall start after handing over the site officially to the
CONTRACTOR:
Areas No. of units Duration Remarks
Area 1 (Mock- up) 3 10 Months 10 Months from receiving

Villas official Handing over
documents from SAUDI
ARAMCO.
Area 2 127 20 Months 18 Months from receiving

official Handing over
ARAMCO.

ARAMCO.

ARAMCO.
Total 491 39 Months The project shall b e handed

over (Taking Over)
completely no later than 30
Months from the Project Start
Date as mentioned in the
Face Sheet In this Contract.
Schedule No 1. Project Phases and Schedule.

5.4Mockup Sample:
The PC Contractor shall prepare mock-up samples for Type A villa, Type C
villa and Type D villa to show all permanent works/dimensions, sizes and
type of finishing in order to be Inspected by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant for approval. All comments given on such
mockup have to be implemented on all other units including the mockup
unit. Mock up units will be the reference for all other units. These mock-
ups shall be constructed for villa No 047, 048 and 049.
5. Permits:
5.1 The PC Contractor shall do all acts and things necessary, including
following-up on behalf of the SAUDI ARAMCO with the concerned public
authorities, In order to obtain the required clearance certificates and
approvals from all the services providers as pre-requisites.
5.2 The PC Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits necessary
to complete the works, The PC Contractor shall identify a suitably
qualified individual with the necessary experience who With proper
approval, introduction and coordination by SAUDI ARAMCO/Project
Management Consultant approval. Permit application, processing and
approvals take significant time and effort to complete. The PC Contractor
is responsible for planning and allowing sufficient duration for such
permits and approvals to support the project master schedule.
6. Project Closeout (Division 1-General Requirements):
6.1 Cleaning Up:
6.1.1 Shaft, electrical closets, pipe and duct shafts, chases, furred
spaces and similar spaces which are generally unfinished shah be
cleaned and left free from rubbish, loose plaster, mortar drippings,
extraneous construction materials, dirt and dust.
6.1.2 Remove rubbish by means of chutes, hoists or receptacles. Do
not drop or throw rubbish or waste from one level to another
within or outside the building. Dust Screens should be provided for
these chutes, hoists or receptacles, And this applies to the dump
trucks or vehicle which Will carry the garbage/trash/surplus
materials to their destination or dumpsite/storage out of the
project site.
6.1.3 Care shall be taken by workmen not to mark soil or otherwise
deface finished surfaces In the event that finished surfaces become
defaced, clean and restore such surfaces to their original condition.
6.1.4 Clean up dung and immediately upon completion of each
trade’s work.
6.1.5 Clean areas in which painting and finishing work is to be
performed just prior to the start of this work and maintain these
areas in a clean condition. Cleaning includes the removal of
rubbish, broom cleaning of floors, the removal of any plaster,
mortar, dust and other extraneous materials from finish surfaces
and surfaces that will remain after the project is complete.
6.1.6 In addition to the cleaning specified above and the more specific
cleaning which may be required in various sections of the
specification, prepare the building for occupancy by a thorough
cleaning, including washing (or cleaning by other appropriate
methods) surfaces on which dirt or dust has collected and by
washing glass on both sides. Wash exterior glass using a window
cleaning contractor specializing in such work. Provide and maintain
adequate runner strips of staining reinforced Kraft building paper
on finished floors for protection. Leave equipment in an
undamaged, bright, clean, polished condition. Re-cleaning will not
be required after the works have been accepted unless after
operations of The PC Contractor makes Re-cleaning necessary.
6.1.7 Ensure that no mud and debris is allowed to dirty the
surrounding public highway by being carried off the construction
site by trucks or other vehicles. Trucks to be subject to cleaning,
particularly wheels and the underside of the chassis, prior to
accessing the surrounding roads from site.
6.2 Removal of Plant and Temporary Works (Demobilization):
6.2.1 Upon completion of the works or when directed by the SAUDI
ARAMCO/Project Management Consultant clear away ail surplus
materials, plant and temporary works including scaffolding,
temporary buildings, equipment. Utilities, services, facilities,
access, fencing, gates, coverings enclosures, etc., and make good
to the satisfaction of SAUDI ARAMCO/Project Management
Consultant. Backfill and compact trenches after removal of
temporary drains. Break-up and remove temporary manholes,
septic tanks or, if permitted by the consultant and local authorities
having jurisdiction, disinfect and fill in solid with approved filling.
Comply with all Municipality Regulations regarding final site
clearance and obtain relevant approvals and certificates.
6.3 Handover Materials & Documents:
6.3.1 The PC Contractor shall provide all Three (3) Original copies of
operation and maintenance instruction manuals. Three (3) Original
copies of brochures, Three (3) Original copies of catalogue cuts, and
Three (3) A3 size sets of as-built drawings for each villa as specified
and required by the contract. This will include all guarantees and
warranties required by the contract including those required of
manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors together with all
spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment for use after the
expiry of the period of maintenance, also, One (1) box for full set of
keys for every each villa.
7. OPTIONAL SCOPE OF WORK:
The optional scope compensation shall be in accordance with Schedule C of
this Contract. SAUDI ARAMCO has the right to activate the Optional Scope
anytime during the contract period, and shall be eligible to choose which
optional item to be constructed. The price validity shall be within the
contract duration.
7.1 Future Expansion:
7.1. 1 Subject items may be activated as per SAUDI ARAMCO
requirement. Future items which includes guest rooms, bedrooms,
toilet, diwaiya & driver room.
7.1. 2 The PC Contractor shall provide the best practice to make it
easier for the user to expand the house In the future as mentioned in
Item No (3.1.5.vi) of this document.
Villa/ Guest 2 Diwanly a Driver Reference
Items Room Bed room room
with with Toilet
Toilet
Villa B - - 1 - Refer to
Type B
BOQ.
Villa C - 1 1 1 Refer to
Type C
BOQ.
Villa D - 1 1 1 Refer to
Type D
BOQ.
Schedule No 2. Future Expansion Items:
7.2 Cabinet (Bedroom & Storage Cabinets):

7.2. 1 Not used.
7.2. 2 The specification for the above Item shall be considered but not
limited to Body, MDF Boards, exposed surfaces (wooden veneer,
walnut or cherry) Internal part (white Formica mat) and PC Contractor
shall provide complete cabinet accessories as specified in the Drawing
and BOQ.
7.3 Hidden Lights (Cove Light):
7.3 1 Not used.
7.3 2 PC shall provide the best practice for future expansion as
mentioned In Item No. (3.1.5.vi) of this document.
7.3 3 Items may be activated to be installed as per SAUDI ARAMCO
requirement.
Villa/ Ground First Floor Men Majlis Dining Reference

Items Floor Living Area Area
Location Living
Area
Villa B 1 1 1 1 Refer to
Type B
BOQ.
Villa C 1 1 1 1 Refer to
Type C
BOQ.
Villa D 1 1 1 1 Refer to
Type D
BOQ.
Schedule No 3. Optional Lighting Items:
7.4 Landscape:
7.4 1 Design shall be as per the IFC Drawing in Schedule B -
Attachment III.
7.4 2 PC shall provide the best practice for future expansion as
mentioned in Item No. (3 1 5 VI) of this document.
7.5 Not used.
7.6 CCTV Security System:
7.6 1 The PC Contractor shall provide the price during the bidding
stage.
8. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS:
The codes and standards as listed below are the principle
ones applicable to this contract; however, this list of Codes
is not intended to be exclusive and exhaustive. For the full
scope of applicable codes and standards refer to the
referenced codes and standards listed in the project
specification. The Latest editions at the time of contract
placement shall apply unless modified by requirements
specified herein; the facilities shall comply with these
publications.
No. Title Specification Number
1 scope of Work for Temporary Attached Document
Facility
2 3.2 Mobilization and Division 1- General
Temporary Works Requirements
3 3.4 Engineering Division 1- General
Requirements
4 3.4.1 Civil and Site Preparation Division 1- General
Work. Requirements.
3.4.3 Structural Work Division 2- Site Works
(Concrete: Reinforced and Pre- Division 3- Concrete
cast Concrete
5 3.4.2 Architectural work.
6 3.4.2 b Masonry, including Division 4- Masonry
ancillaries and service conduits
for boundary walls.
7 3.4.2 c Architecture concrete, Division 3- Concrete
including lintels, coping and
sills.
8 3.4.2 d Floor screeds. Division 9- Finishes
9 3.4.2 Roofing, including Division 7- Thermal and
drainage, insulation, screed, Moisture protection
membrane, protection and
flood test of flat roofs.
10 3.4.2 f Rainwater s stem, Division 15- Mechanical
Including scupper drains
11 3.4.2 g Doors and ironmongery. Division 8- Doors and
Windows.
12 3.4.2 h windows, glazing and Division 8- Door and
privacy screens. Windows.
13 3.4.2 i Plastering. Division 9- Finishes
14 3.4.2 j Floor and wall finishes. Division 9- Finishes
Including ceramic
tiles and skirting .Spare tiles
shall be provided
.
15 3.4.2 K Suspended ceilings Division 9- Finishes
16 3.4.2 I Sanitary system, Division 15- Mechanical
including fittings, plumbing,
cleaning.
17 3.4.2 m Fixtures and fittings, Division 5- Metals, Division 6-
including toilet Division Woods & Plastic, Division 10-
facilities, handrails and louvers. Specialties and Division 11-
Equipment
18 3.4.2 n Residential equipment, Division 11- Appliances
range hoods.
19 3.4.3 Structural Work. Division 3 - Concrete
20 3.4.4 Mechanical work (HVAC, Division 15 -Mechanical
Plumbing and Fire Protection
System
).
21 3.4.4.1 HVAC Work. Division 15 - Mechanical and
Division 16- Electrical
22 3.4.4.2 HVAC Testing, Adjusting Division 15 - Mechanical
and Balancing.
23 3.4.4.4 Plumbing system. Division 15 - Mechanical
24 3.4.4.11 Fire Protection System. Division 15 – Mechanical and
Division 16- Electrical
25 3.4.5 Electrical Work Division 16- Electrical
26 3.4.6 Telecommunication Division 16- Electrical
Work.
27 3.4.7 OAIQC Plan. Division 1- General
Requirements
28 3.4.8 Reporting. Division 1- General
Requirements
29 3.14 Permits. Division 1- General
Requirements
30 3.15 Project Closeout Division 1- General
Requirements
9. LIST ATTACHMENT:
9.1 Attachment I - Temporary Facility Documents with
Attachments.
9.2 Attachment II – Royal Commission Specifications &
Requirements.
9.3 Attachment III – IFC Drawings.
9.4 Attachment IV - Technical BOQ.
END OF SCHEDULEB
Scope of Work
Temporary Facilities
Date of Issue: February 2015
REVIEWED BY:

Safwani
Date and Signature
1. OVERVIEW:
This project, BI-28-10012, provide for the Home Ownership Lot Development,
Phase I, at AI-Mutrafiah, Juball industrial City In the Eastern Province of the
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. This Contract will accommodate 491 house units, in
total, with varying lot sizes for sectors Fl-1, Fl-2 and F1.3 and the construction
of three (3) Duplex type houses for the Imam & Muzzain to be built on three (3)
lots to be selected by Saudi Aramco, in addition to three (3) local day mosques.
The following is the scope of work which provide for the supply, installation, of
Portable office and Storage for Temporary Facility at SAUDI ARAMCO HOP
Project site located at Mutrafiah Area, In addition to provide operation and
Maintenance 5ervices for this facility.
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA:
The site is located in the Mutrafiah District of the Jubail Industrial City residential
area.
Mutrafiah District is a new development within the Jubail industrial City
residential area and SAUDIARAMCO has been granted a total of 491 villas.
The infrastructure (Initial Development) to the Saudi Aramco is completed by
another Contractor. The final development shall be completed once the houses
are constructed or nearing completion.
3. Standards and Specification:
This Temporary Facility shall be supplied and installed in accordance with latest
edition, of applicable standards and procedures as per SAUDI ARAMCO
requirements. ATIACHMENT 1 shows the material specification that shall be
followed.
4. Responsibilities and Assurance:
4.1 Contractor shall visit the project site to make the site survey, and collect
the necessary and required information.
4.2 Contractor shall adhere to the space requirement provided by SAUDI
ARAMCO Representative.
4.3 Contractor shall coordinate with SAUDI ARAMCO Representative for the
any permits required.
4.4 Contractor shall adhere to the working hours 5Chedule with SAUDI
ARAMCO Representative and Project Management Consultant.
4.5 Contractor shall maintain the project site safe and clean working area.
4.6 Contractor shall provide Support Service, Janitorial Service, office and
pantry consumable, IT equipment's (Computers and Printers) and
Maintenance Service for the Facility during the project period.
4.7 Contractor shall provide waste bin, for the facility and manage the waste
disposal inside and outside the facility.
4.8 Contractor shall provide all but not limited to complete furniture,
computers, appliances, office supplies & consumables, pantry supplies
and consumables.
4.9 Contractor shall be liable on providing the Temporary Utilities not limited
to Electrical Power/Generator, IT Equipment, Air Conditioning, Potable
Water, Drainage system and Sewer line system.
5. Portable office Building Requirements:
5.1 Space Requirement:
Space Number
Offices 12
Achieve Room 1
Toilets 6
Meeting room 1
Prayer room 1
Pantry Area 1
Storage Area 2
Total Area 300 m2
 Proposed layout of the space requirement is shown in ATTACHMENT 2.
5.2 Facility Furniture:
 12 tables (160 cm width), Drawers, coffee table cabinets.
 12 High back wire mesh chairs.
 44 Low back wire mesh chairs.
 1 Meeting Table.
 Fully furnished Pantry room including the appliances {Coffee machine,
boiler and sink).
5.3 IT Connection and Ports:
 Network Port per workstation.
 IT Equipment per workstation, Projector for meeting room.
 Network coble duct to one assembly point.
5.4 IT equipment:
 12 Computers.
 Network printer (1) or Individual 1Printers (12).
 1 Projector to be installed in the meeting room.
 The maintenance of this equipment is part of the contractor scope of
work.
5.5 Potable Water:
 Drinking Water Station.
 Water for the wash area/ Toilet Area.
5.6 Electrical Connection and Ports:
 2 Electrical ports 220V per workstation.
 Electrical wiring ducts to Main panel board.
 Provide emergency lights.
5.7 Toilets (Saudi ceramic fixtures): with Complete Waste management
service:
 Wash downs w/ perennial spray.
 Wash basin.
 Water heater.
 Exhaust Fans.
5.8 Fire safety requirements:
 THE CONTRACTOR shall include the following:
 Hard Wire Fire Detection System - Battery System with 220V
connection.
 Adequate number of Fire Extinguishers (6 kg Dry Powder, 6 kg C02
inside the building).
 Fire Hydrant availability depends on the design of the Facility.
5.9 Steel or concrete steps in the main entrance and fire exit doors.
6. OPERATION and MAINTENANCE SERVICES:
The contractor shall provide Operation and Maintenance services during the
project period the service shall include the following services:
6.1 Maintenance and Janitorial staff:
6.1 1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all janitorial and
maintenance services within the facility.
6.1 2 The Contractor shall supply the required labor, materials, tools,
equipment and consumables for the execution of the works. This
includes, but is not limited to; mops, brushes, buckets, polishing
machines, industrial vacuum cleaners.
6.1 3 The Contractor shall provide all disinfectants, detergents,
sanitizing agents, special cleaners, strippers, polishes, shampoos,
fabric cleaner, and any other cleaning agents that may be required
to perform the works. A minimum 7 days stock shall be maintained
in suitable, lockable stores or in the pantry.
6.1 4 All toilet facilities and pantry shall be cleaned daily. Any other
requirements not listed but necessary to deliver a complete and
quality service are deemed to be included in the scope of work.
6.1 5 Particular attention shall be paid to all areas to ensure that the
precise standard of cleanliness is achieved.
6.2 General Cleaning & Upkeep:
6.2 1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all general cleaning
& upkeep services within the Portable office buildings.
6.2 2 General cleaning & upkeep services shall include the following
non exhaustive list of requirements, Any other requirements not
listed herein but necessary to deliver a complete and quality
service are deemed to be included within the OM&S Contractor
scope of service:
 Provision of cleaning of all indoor areas to ensure a clean,
tidy and presentable area.
 All indoor areas shall include vacuum cleaning, dusting and
polishing as required to ensure a dust free clean
environment is maintained.
 Clean the furniture on a Daily basis to ensure that it is in a
clean and hygienic condition.
6.3 Pantry Service:
6.3 1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all pantry
services within the Portable offices Buildings.
6.3 2 The Contractor shall supply all labor, supervision, kitchen
utensils, crockery and consumables for the execution of the
works. Pantry services shall include all provision of teas, coffees,
drinking water dispenser, for an approximate daily staff number
of 15 persons.
6.4 Other included services:
7.4 1 The contractor shall provide the following services and
materials for the facility:
7.4 2 Provide first aid services (1 set).
7.4 3 The Garbage collection and disposal services, this shall
Include Providing pins inside the offices, Garbage plastic bags,
outside pins, moving the pins from the site to RC land fill area as
require.
7.4 4 Pest control. (As require)
7.4 5 Roads and parking lot general cleaning.
7. Other items (Portable office Requirements):

7.1 Internet Network and telecommunication system shall be
provided by Contractor.
7.2 The land shall be compacted and leveled.
7.3 Shaded parking area shall be provided and reserved for SAUDI
ARAMCD Representatives. (4 Parking's).
7.4 Air-conditioning:
7.4 1 Portable offices building shall be provided with sufficient
Air-conditioning. The air conditioners shall be designed to
control and maintain the room design temperature.
7.4 2 Heating shall be provided to maintain the required winter
indoor design temperature, the air conditioner shall be
accomplished with factory assembled indoor and outdoor units.
8. Contract Duration:
The contractor has to establish the construction of this facility after signing the
contract with SAUDI ARAMCO HOP Project. This contract shall commence during
the mobilization stage.
9. Prices AND Payment Method:
The Facility shall be available within 30 Days after NTP. Prices shall be reflected
with the HOP Project BOQ including the operation and maintenance services
during the project period.
10. Testing and Commissioning:
Contractor shall perform the required tests, inspections, and commissions of the
completed work under the supervision of SAUDIARAMCO Representative prior
to mobilization.
11. General Instructions:
The contractor must abide by the building's safety rules and regulations in the
site location (SAUDI ARAMCO project site).
6 ATTACHMENT
- ATIACHMENT 1 – Temporary Facility Layout
- ATIACHMENT 2 - Material Specifications
=== End ===
Engineering Office Temporary Facility
The Location to be determined later
The Scope sholl include provide mg 10 shaded proking in front
of the facility
Scope of Work
Temporary Facilities
REVIEWED BY:

Safwani
Date and Signature
1. Methods and Specifications for Roads and Asphalt Laying:

1.1 General:
All design, materials, and work shall comply with the requirements of this
specification. All design calculations. Drawings, and specifications shall be
submitted to SAUDI ARAMCO for approval.
1.1 1 Design Criteria - Temporary Training facilities:
1.1.1.1 Design of Roadways and Traffic conditions:
Design of roadway pavements shall be In accordance with
Chapter 4 "Low Volume Road Design" of AASHTO GDPS-4
"Guide for Design of Pavement Structures". For thickness design
of roadways, the following design traffic levels in l8-kips
ESAL(Equivalent Single Axle Load) as defined in AASHTO GDPS-
4 shall be used:
1.1.1.2 Design Period:
Roadway and Parking Areas shall be designed for a period of 5
years traffic:
1.1.1.3 Drainage:
Roads shall be crowned (minimum 1 to maximum 2 percent for
concrete pavement and minimum 2 to maximum 4 percent for
bituminous, the minimum surface slope shall not be less
than0.25% to provide adequate drainage, A cross-fall may be
constructed to provide drainage of roadways only with prior
approval from Company. Area concrete pavements shall have a
minimum slope of 1 percent and a maximum slope of 4 percent.
The pavement slope shall be uniform to prevent water
accumulation.
1.1.1.4 Road Width:
Roads shall be classified into the following categories:
A. Major roads shall have a minimum width of 8,0 m.
B. Minor roads shall have a minimum width of 6,0 m.
The actual width of roads around each facility shall be based on the related
plot plan drawings.1.0 m wide crushed stone hard shoulder shall be provided
to both sides of roads with following exceptions.
1.1.1.5 Intersection Radii:
Road Junctions or bends shall provide for the safe movement of
traffic without undue restrictions. The design shall allow for the
type of vehicles to be used and limitations of space at such
locations, but the internal radius to the kerbing shall not be less
than 6 m, other intersection radii shall be provided as required
by anticipated vehicles, and shall be in accordance with their
respective minimum turning paths.
1.1.1.6 Turnouts:
Roads less than 6 m wide shall have a minimum of 6m wide
turnouts and standing areas at fire hydrant locations, Length of
turnouts shall be a minimum of 1S m to allow fire vehicles to be
parked clear of main traffic lanes.
1.1 2 Sub-grade:
Definition: Sub-grade is the foundation for the pavement structure.
1.1.2.1 Design:
The condition and classification of sub-grade soil shall be
determined for the pavement design; THE CONTRACTOR shall
perform the soil investigation and the appropriate field tests in
accordance With the relevant standards to obtain the sub-grade
classification values, such as sub-grade Reaction (K), California
Bearing Ratio (CBR), and Resistance Value (R).
1.1.2.2 Construction:
The preparation and compaction of sub-grade soil shall be in
accordance with relevant standards.
1.1 3 Bituminous Concrete Paving:
Bituminous concrete paving mixes shall be used for surfacing and base
courses of all roadways and parking areas, full-depth asphalt concrete
design and shall be constructed using hot-mix; hot-laid mixtures
spread and compacted in layers.
1.1.3.1 Materials:
Materials for tI1e hot-mixed hot-laid bituminous concrete shall
conform to the following requirements:
a. Cutback asphalt for prime coat shall conform to ASTM D2027
Grade MC30, MC-70 or MC-2S0.
b. Emulsified asphalt for tack coat shall conform to ASTM D977 Grade
SS-1 or SS-1h.
c. Tack coat shal1l be diluted one part water to one part emulsified
asphalt.
d. Cutback asphalt for tack coat shall conform to ASTM 02028 Grade
RC-70 or RC-T.
e. Bituminous concrete shall conform to ASTM 03515, job mix
formula design density between 95 to 97 percent of void-less
mixture determined by the Marshall Test in accordance with ASTM
D1559.
f. Asphalt cement shall be prepared from petroleum. It shall be
uniform in character, free from water and shall not foam when
heated to 177 degrees C. It shall conform to Grade 85 to 100 as
defined in ASTM 0 946.
g. Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM D 692. Coarse aggregate
is defined as all material retained on a No. 10 sieve as tested by
ASTM C136 and when tested in accordance with Los Angles
Abrasion Test according to ASTM C 131 shall have a percent of wear
not exceeding 40. The coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed
stone, crushed gravel or a combination of the two.
Gravel shall be free from clay, organic or other injurious matter
occurring either free or as a coating on the aggregate, and material
removed by decantation shall not be more than 3 percent.
Coarse aggregate shall contain no more than 5 percent by dry
weight of soft or semi-hard sandstone shale, conglomerate
particles, or other unsound material.
h. Fine aggregate is defined as all material passing the No, 10 sieve
and retained on No 200 sieve, It shall consist of sand, or stone
screenings or a combination of the two The portion of the fine
aggregate which passes the No, 40 sieve shall have a Plasticity
Index of not more than 6 as determined prior to the addition of
mineral filler.
As delivered to the mixer, it shall be free from clayey lumps,
bonded aggregations, and other deleterious materials. Fine
aggregate shall conform to ASTM 0 1073.
i. Mineral filler is defined as all material passing the No, 200 sieve, If
filler in addition to that naturally present in the aggregate is
necessary it shall consist of thoroughly dry stone dust. Volcanic ash
or Portland cement. As delivered to the mixer, it shall be free of
lumps and loosely bonded aggregations. Up to one percent of
hydrated lime may be added to tile mix, particularly with
aggregates that are subject to stripping, Fly ash shall not be used
as mineral filler. Mineral filler shall conform to ASTM D 242.
1.1 4 Construction Joints:
Construction joints shall be made in such a manner as to assure a neat
junction, thorough compaction, and bonded throughout, Where new
paving meets existing, the edge of existing paving shall be saw-cut
Square for the full depth of paving, Feathering of the edges on new
paving shall not be permitted.
1.1 5 Bituminous Surface Course:
Bituminous concrete surfacing shall be minimum thickness of 40 mm.
Bituminous concrete surfacing and final ponding test shall be
performed on all roadways and parking areas.
1.1 6 Base Course:
The bituminous base, of full-depth asphalt design, shall be constructed
using hot-mix, hot-laid bituminous aggregate mixture spread and
compacted in layers. This base shall be compacted and densified with
smooth-wheeled, tandem power-driven rollers with a minimum metal
weight 10 tons.
1.1 7 Construction of Bituminous Pavement:
a. General:
Bituminous concrete construction for roads and paving shall
conform to the recommendations contained in local highway
department specifications, AASHTO GDPS-4, and AIIS-91, IS-96,
MS-1, M8-2, MS-8, MS-23, and 8S-1.
b. Weather Limitations:
Asphalt primer. tack coal. and bituminous concrete shall be placed
when the humidity, general weather conditions, air temperature,
and conditions of the compacted base course are suitable as
determined by SAUDI ARAMCO.
In general, no paving materials shall be placed when the air
temperature is below 10 degrees C and falling, but may be placed
when the air temperature IS above 4 degree C and rising No
materials shall be placed until the underlying surface is clean and
dry.
c. Surface Preparation:
The compacted aggregate base shall be maintained and cured until
the moisture content of the entire thickness of the base does not
exceed 70 percent of the optimum moisture for crushed limestone
base martial or 60 percent of optimum moisture for other types of
aggregate base material. The compacted aggregate surface shall be
swept clean of all dust, dirt, and loose particles before the primer
is applied.
d. Primer:
When bituminous concrete is placed on a newly constructed or
existing aggregate base the top surface of the base course shall
receive a prime coat of cut-back asphalt.
The rate of application of primer shall be between 0,9 and 2.3 liter
per square meter as required filling all voids, and uniformly coating
the surface of the compacted aggregate base. The type and rate of
application of the primer shall be adjusted to Suit the gradation of
the compacted aggregate base material.
Grade M-30 or MC-70 shall be used for dense graded surfaces and
Grade MC-250 for open graded surfaces. The primed surface shall
be cured for not less than 24 hours, if the primer is not completely
absorbed by the compacted aggregate base within 24 hour period,
excess primer shall be blotted with sand. Blotter sand shall pass a
No.4 sieve and be retain on a No. 200 sieve.
e. Tack Coat:
When bituminous concrete IS placed on material other than an
aggregate base the top surface of the material receiving the paving
shall be coated with a tack coat of either cut-back asphalt or
emulsified asphalt and allowed to cure prior to the application of
the bituminous concrete.
The tack coat shall be applied on only as much pavement as can be
covered with bituminous concrete in the same day, the rate of
coverage for the application of tack coat material shaH be between
0.2 and 0.7 liter per square meter.
f. Bituminous Concrete Placement:
The surface and base course layers mixture shall be placed with an
asphalt paver or spreader to provide a nominal compacted
thickness, the minimum lift thickness shall be at least twice the
maximum particle size and the maximum lift thickness shall be that
which can be demonstrated to be laid in a single 11ftand be
compacted to the required uniform density and smoothness.
Placing of bituminous concrete mixture shall be a continuous
operation, If any irregularities occur, they shall be corrected before
final compaction of the mixture. The completed paving shall have
a density equal to or greater than 95 percent of the density of a
laboratory specimen made in the proportions of the job mix
formula. Bituminous concrete surface shall be compacted and
densified using smooth steel-wheeled, tandem power-driven
rollers with a min metal weight of 10 tons.
=== End ===
SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIALS AND WORK EXECUTION
B1- 28- 15008 Housing Project- Jubail
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Specification 0101 Summary of Work
0102 Quality Control
0103 Temporary Facilities
0104 Temporary Fences and Barricades
0105 Project Identification and Sign
0106 Clo5e-out requirements
0107 Additional Construction Requirements
DIVISION 2- SITEWORK
Specification 0200 Survey work
0201 Earthwork - including Excavation, Filling
and Grading
0202 Boundary Wall
0203 Pavement Sub-Base and Aggregate Base
0204 Underground Piping and Site Utility Pits
0205 Pre-construction Termite Control
0206 Interlock concrete paver block
0207 Curbs
0208 Landscape
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE (Plain and Reinforced)
Specification 0301 Concrete Reinforcement
0302 Concrete Work (Cast in Place & Pre-cast)
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Specification 0401 Masonry Units
0402 Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5- METALS
Specification 0501 Steel Rectangular Hollow Sections and
Small Sections Structural Steel
DIVISION 6- WOOD AND ALUMINIUM
Specification 0601 Carpentry and Millwork
0602 Cabinet Work
DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Specification 0701 Waterproofing and Damp Proofing,
Vapour Barrier for Slabs
0702 Building Insulation
0703 Membrane Roofing
0704 Flashing and Sheet Metal
0705 Joint Sealants
0706 Bituminous Film Coatings
0707 Concrete Water proofing
DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS
Specification 0801 Aluminum Doors and Frames
0802 Aluminum Windows
0803 Glazing and Mirrors
0804 Wood Doors
0805 Finish Hardware
0806 Steel Doors and Frames
0807 Garage Doors
DIVISION 9- FINISHES
Specification 0901 Solid Plaster Rendering Stucco Work
0902 Tiling
0903 Painting
0904 Gypsum Wallboard and Ceiling System
0905 Metal Stud and Ceiling Support Systems
0906 Marble and Granite Tiling
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
Specification 1001 Sanitary Fixtures
1002 Bathroom Accessories
DIVISION 11- APPLIANCES
Specification 1101 Schedule of Kitchen and Other

Appliances
DIVISION 12 to Not Applicable
DIVISION 14 -
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
Specification 1501 Plumbing System Plumbing System
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Specification 1601 Electrical Work
1602 Lighting Fixtures
1603 Fire Alarm system
1604 Telecommunication system
DIVISION 17- ABBREVIATIONS/ REFERENCES
DIVISION 1:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
0101 Summary of Work
0102 Quality Control
0103 Temporary Facilities
0104 Temporary Fences and Barricades
0105 Project Identification and Sign
0106 Close- out requirements
0107 Additional construction Requirements
0101 SUMMARY OF WORK:
1.0 GENERAL:
The intention of the documents is to include all matenals,
equipment construction techniques and transportation necessary
and readily available in the Kingdom for proper execution for the
work. Use of Saudi manufactured goods shall be used wherever
possible.
2.0 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS STANDARDS:
Where reference is made to construction or materials standards in
this Specification or on the Drawings, the latest edition of the
relevant standards shall apply, unless otherwise specified.
3.0 OWNER SUPPLIED ITEMS:
Where items stated are Owner supplied fix only items, refer to part
III execution in relevant division item for correct procedure.
4.0 INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS:
See relevant specifications on condition of contract.
5.0 APPLICATIONS:
These specifications in its entirety shall be applicable for the
following 4 different villa types B (90 units), C (279 units), D (122
units) and Imam & Muazzin (3 units).
6.0 APPLICABLE EDITION OF STANDARDS:
7.0 DEFINITIONS:
a. GENERAL:
A substantial amount of specification language constitutes
definitions for terms found in other contract documents,
including drawings which must be recognized as
diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of
requirements Indicated thereon Certain terms used in
contract documents are defined generally in this article
Definitions and explanations of this section are not
necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for
the work to extent not stated more explicitly in another
provision of contract documents.
b. TOLERANCES:
The allowable error in the value of the indicated quantity It
is the dimensional allowance made for the inability of men
and machines to fabricate a product of exact dimensions.
c. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT:
A. MEASUREMENT:
The Contractor shall use the metric system of
measurement for all designs, specifications, plans and
drawings, except as otherwise approved in writing by
the Company.
B. PAYMENT:
The Contract Price shall be paid to the Contractor in
accordance with the following payment provisions.
B. 1 The Contract Price shall be paid to the
Contractor on the basis of monthly assessment
and onsite measurement of completed Work as
the Work proceeds, Such assessments shall be
prepared by Contractor in the form and manner
requested by the Client Representative and shall
be submitted for the Client Representative's
approval on or about the end of each month
covering the amount and value (in terms of the
Contract Price) of work performed by Contractor
up to the date of such estimate The estimate may
be made by strict measurement or by estimate or
partly by one method and partly by the other,
Estimates shall be based on cumulative total
quantities of Work performed and shall not
Include matenals or equipment not incorporated
into the Permanent Works. except as otherwise
expressly provided herem or authorized by the
Client Representative during the course of
performance of the Work, The quantity of Work to
be paid for under any item set forth in the
Schedule of Prices shall be the amount or number
approved by the Client Representative of units of
Work completed in accordance with the Contract.
B. 2 Contractor shall make surveys necessary for
determining quantities of Work to be paid for
hereunder. Copies of field notes, computations,
and other records made by Contractor for the
purpose of determining quantities shall be
furnished to the Company upon request.
Contractor shall notify the Client Representative in
witiing prior to the time any survey is made, and
the Client Representative, at its discretion. May
arrange to have a representative present to
witness and verify such survey.
B. 3 Measurements and computations shall be
made by such methods as the Client
Representative may consider appropriate for the
class of Work measured.
B. 4 Monthly Statement:
On the dates agreed With the Client
Representative the Contractor shall prepare and
submit in triplicate a detailed statement to the
Client Representative, in the form and manner
agreed to by the Client setting out the total
amount of completed time the survey is to be
carried out in order that the client, at its discretion,
may arrange to witness and verity such survey.
Copies of the field Notes, computations and other
records made by contractor for the purpose of
determining the quantity of such Work shall be
furnished to the Client upon request.
B. 5 Client Overall payment process:
a. Review by the Client representative of
Contractor’s statement shall be
completed within 25 days of its receipt,
and a copy of the statement as maybe
modified or certified shall be returned to
Contractor attached to the client
payment certificate. Contractor shall
thereupon submit to the Client and
invoice prepared in the form and manner
designated by the Client, reflecting the
amount of the certified statement.
Contractor, from time to time, may be
required also to provide a forecast of the
amounts of its future invoices to be
submitted to the Client for the following
three (3) months.
b. Within (20) days of receipt of an
approved invoice the Client shall pay the
Contractor the approved invoice amount
less any amounts to be deducted there
from in accordance with the Terms and
Conditions 01the Contract.
B. 6 Payment Provisions:
Before payment of the first invoice can be
approved, the Contractor shall submit and have
approval from the Client Representative of the
following documents:
a. Detailed Procurement Plan and
Schedule.
b. Detailed Construction Schedule.
c. Construction Inspection Plan.
d. Security Plan.
e. Fire Prevention Plan.
f. Health and Safety Plan.
g. Materials and Inventory Plan.
h. Anticipated Overall Cash Flow based
upon a detailed Construction
Schedule.
C. ABBREVATIONS:
The language of specifications and other contract
documents is of the abbreviated type in certain
instances, and implies words and meanings which will
be appropriately interpreted. Actual word
abbreviations of a self-explanatory nature have been
included in texts; Specific abbreviations have been
established, principally for lengthy technical
terminology and primarily in conjunction With
coordination of specification requirements with
notations on drawings and In schedules These are
frequently defined in section at first instance of use.
Trade association names and titles of general
standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words
will be interpreted as singular where applicable and
where full context of the contract documents so
indicates.
D. APPROVAL:
Where used in conjunction with Client
Representative's response to submittals, requests,
applications, inquires, reports and claims by
contractor, the meaning of term "approved" will be
held to limitations of Client Representative's
responsibilities and duties as authorized by the Client.
In no case will "approval" by Client Representative be
interpreted as a release of contractor from
responsibilities to fulfill requirements of contract
documents.
E. SPECIFICATION AND DRAWINGS:
SPECIFICATION: None of these explanations will be
interpreted to modify substance of requirements
Portions of these specifications have been produced
by Client Representative's standard methods of
editing master specifications, and may contain minor
deviations from traditional writing formats. Such
deviations are a normal result of this production
technique, and no other meaning will be implied or
permitted.
SHOP DRAWINGS: The term "shop drawings" includes
the shop drawings and shop drawing Information
such as descriptive literature, product data.
Illustrations. Schedules, performance and test data,
and similar information furnished by the Contractor
to explain In detail specific portions of the Work as
required by the various sections of these
specifications.
SAMPLES: The term "samples" includes a
representative item, a representative part of an item,
or a mock-up, which is a representative assembly of
items as required by the various sections of these
specifications.
8.0 RELATION TO OTHER CONTRACTORS:
The owner (Client) may appoint other contractors for work not
covered or not included in this building contract, and the
contractor shall fully cooperate and coordinate his work with other
contractors so as to enable himself and other contractors to
complete their respective jobs on time.
The general contractor shall not commit or permit any act that will
interfere with the performance of work by any other contractor.
9.0 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS:
All materials found not satisfactory and not in accordance with the
contract, plans and these specifications, shall be removed at once
from the job site by the Contractor so that they are not be used by
mistake.
10.0 TEST OF MATERIALS:
When test of materials are necessary or required, the expenses
shall be borne by the Contractor.
11.0 SUPERINTENDENT:
The Contractor shall employ a full time Project Engineer and an
adequate number of Site Engineers/Foremen, who shall be
responsible for proper implementation of the work. He shall be at
the job site the full ten-hour workday, and must have an alternative
in case of inability to work during overtime hours.
12.0 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY ON PREMISES AND ADJOINING
PROPERTY:
A. The Contractor shall so conduct the work as will produce the
least disturbance and, if possible without inconvenience to
the adjoining structures existing buildings and offices and
neighborhood.
B. He shall be responsible for damage to all persons and
property on premises or site that may occur as a result of or
in connection with the execution of the work under this
contract.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any or all damage to
other contractors work already on site or adjoining property.
13.0 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY:
The Contractor shall at all times conduct its operations at all
locations where the Work is performed in such a manner as to
avoid any risk of bodily harm to persons or damage to property.
The Contractor shall promptly lake all precautions which are
reasonable or necessary to safeguard against such risks and shall
make regular safety inspection of the conditions where the Work is
performed, and any materials or equipment used in the
performance of the Work, The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the discovery. Determination and correction of any
unsafe conditions arising in connection with the performance of
the Work.
In addition, the Contractor shall comply with all applicable safety
laws, standards, codes and regulations, including any safety
program established by the Client and/or the Royal Commission,
The Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with other
contractors on safety matters and shall promptly comply with any
specific safety instructions or directions given to the Contractor by
the Royal Commission or Client. within thirty (30) days after the
commencement date specified in the Notice to Proceed, the
Contractor shall submit to the Client for approval, the Contractor's
safety program, provided, however, that the Client's approval of
any such program shall not relieve the Contractor of its other
obligations hereunder The Contractor shall inform its employees of
safety practices and the requirements of any of the Royal
Commission's, the Client's and the Contractor’s safety programs
The Contractor shall furnish suitable safety equipment and enforce
the use of such equipment by its employees.
Upon the failure of the Contractor to comply with any of the
requirements set forth herein, the Royal Commission and/or the
Client shall have the authority to stop any operations of the
Contractor affected by such failure until the condition is remedied.
No part of the time lost due to any such stop order shall be made
the subject of a claim for extension of time or for increased costs
or damages by the Contractor.
14.0 HEALTH & SAFETY PLAN:
A. All works undertaken in relation to this Specification are to
be completed in full accordance with the respective health
and safety requirements established by the following:
1. Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
a. Legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes.
2. Municipality / Royal Commission
Regulations:
a. Standards, Contractual Conditions, and Health and
Safety Systems.
3. Contractor:
a. Health and Safety Standards and Systems as
accepted by the Municipality / Royal Commission/
Client.
B. In the absence of any of the above, best accepted industry
practice shall be employed throughout.
C. The Contractor shall submit a Site Safety Plan within 30 days
of the Contract Award and at least 10 days prior to
mobilization 10 the site for approval by the Royal
Commission / Client. As a minimum, the plan shall detail the
procedures, designated persons, instructions, and reports to
be used to assure site safety for all Contractors, Sub-
contractors, Royal Commission / client personnel, the public,
and others on the site.
15.0 FIRST AID PLAN:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of
adequate first aid facilities at the Work Site for all personnel
employed or retained by the Contractor or any of its
subcontractors in the performance of the Work. However,
other first aid facilities may be present at or near the Work
Site which the Royal Commission may, at its option, make
available for the treatment of such personnel who may be
injured or become iii while engaged in the performance of
the Work.
2. In the event any of the Contractor’s personnel or the
personnel of a subcontractor requires the services of an
ambulance, hospital or physician, the Contractor or its
subcontractor will promptly pay all charges therefore
directly to the providers of such services.
3. The Contractor shall submit a First aid Plan within 30
calendar days after the effective date of Notice to Proceed,
submit a First Aid Plan for the Royal Commission's/ Client
acceptance.
16.0 SITE CLEANLINESS:
The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the Work Site areas used by
the Contractor in a neat, clean, and safe condition and shall dispose
all rubbish and other unwanted materials in specific areas to be
designated by the Client.
17.0 SITE RECORDS:
1. The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Client / Royal
Commission one record copy of:
a. Mark-up IFC Drawings.
b. Quality Control Inspection Report.
c. Shop Drawings.
d. Contract Specifications.
e. Final As-built Quantities and back-up
documentations.
f. Change Orders and other modifications to the
Contract.
g. Client / Royal Commission field orders and other
written instruction.
h. Approved Shop Drawings, product data, and
samples.
i. Field and laboratory test records.
j. Copy of all 3st party subcontracts.
k. Copy of all vendor representative Contracts /
reports.
l. QA/QC inspection and test reports.
m. Copy 01all safety test reports.
n. Copy of all permits/ licenses (e.g. environmental,
occupancy, encroachments, etc.).
o. Copy of all pay item/quantity report.
p. Other records required throughout construction by
the Client / Royal Commission.
2. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples:
a. The Contractor shall store documents and samples in
the Contractor's field office apart from documents
used for construction. Provide files and racks for
storage of documents, Provide locked cabinet or
secure storage space for samples.
b. The Contractor shall file documents and samples in
accordance with Drawing Index and Specification
Table of Contents.
c. The Contractor shall maintain documents in a clean,
dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use
record documents for construction purposes.
d. The Contractor shall make documents and samples
available at all times for inspection by A/E and the
Client / Royal Commission, Representative.
e. Record Prints will be reviewed monthly by the Client /
Royal Commission. And A/E. This will be a requirement
for issuance of a Certificate for Payment.
18.0 SITE ESTABLISHMENT:
See relevant specifications on condition of contract/scope of work.
19.0 CONTRACT IMPLIMENTATION:
20.0 PROGRAMME OF WORKS:
The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with their
submitted Tender Contract Schedule.
21.0 FACILITIES FOR THE CLIENT TEAM IF ANY:
Materials, equipment and furnishing must be new and adequate
for required purpose and must not violate applicable codes or
regulations.
22.0 THE CONTRACTOR FACILITIES SITE APPROVAL:
A. The Contractor shall obtain the Client approval for the
construction of temporary facilities and all such construction
shall be in accordance with applicable Royal Commission
regulations for construction and use of field offices,
worksites and lay down areas.
B. The Contractor’s request for temporary facilities shall
include a Site plan showing size, location and use of desired
area and location, size and construction details of temporary
buildings. Installations, facilities, utilities and access roads.
The request shall include the requested occupancy date,
period of occupancy and special requirements, if any.
C. No approval shall be granted by the Royal Commission to the
Contractor for the establishment of plants on client property
for manufacture of goods available from Saudi Arabian
manufacturers.
22.0 GUARANTEE:
See relevant Specifications.
23.0 QUALITY:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all his
manufactured and purchased items and the construction work. All
workmanship, materials shall be in compliance with the USC, UMC,
SASO, and NEC, Royal Commission Building Code (RCBG), and
applicable Saudi building codes (SBG).
24.0 CERTIFICATES AND SAMPLES:
The Contractor shall submit for all materials the proper and
appropriate certification of the producer or association attesting to
the product's compliance with requirements of the contract
documents for the approval of the Client Representative, all
documents should read Client Representative. Samples, catalogue
cuts and/or manufacturer brochures will be submitted as
requested by Client Representative. No materials will be
incorporated into structure without prior approval.
26.0 PROGRESS MEETINGS AND REPORTS:
A. Pre-Construction Meeting:
A pre-construction Meeting shall be held within 7 days of
Notice to Proceed.
B. General Progress Meetings:
Progress meetings shall be held at weekly intervals or as
required by the Client Representative. The Contractor shall
be required to provide all necessary information required to
evaluate actual progress to date and scheduled progress,
together with reports in relation to manpower, plant and
equipment, materials procurement, subcontractors etc., in
order to review everything of significance which could affect
progress of the work.
C. Monthly Progress Reports:
The Contractor shall prepare monthly progress reports
indicating the relationship between actual and programmed
progress of Work The report shall be in narrative form and
supplemented by drawings, tables and charts to further
describe the progress of the Work. The report shall describe
the activities of the Contractor including:
1. Work accomplished during the month, with updated
work schedule.
2. Project problems.
3. Anticipated progress during the next month.
4. Staff assignments.
5. Forecast of future expenditures per month.
6. Status of outstanding items, and any variations or
additional works instructed, and their proposed
programmed incorporation with in the works.
27.0 TESTING & COMMISSIONING:
1. The Contractor shall perform all necessary pre--
commissioning and commissioning checks, start-up,
initial operation and other tests on the facilities,
installations and equipment to demonstrate that the
requirements of the Contract have been met and that its
work has been performed properly and adequately.
2. Following testing, the Contractor shall operate the
complete facilities continuously for a certain period as
per manufacturer recommendation and in the manner
envisioned by the design and in accordance with the
agreed procedure.
3. The Contractor's nominated Commissioning Team shall
be present continuously during commissioning period
and Its equipment and materials shall be available at all
times.
4. The Contractor shall utilize a permanent power supply for
the pre—commissioning and commissioning tests.
However. If such arrangement is not available, the
Contractor shall be responsible for providing the
necessary temporary power supplies required to perform
the pre-commissioning and commissioning tests.
28.0 MOBIL.IZATION AND TEMPORARY WORKS:
a. The PC contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for any
necessary mobilization and relocation of such temporary
works during the construction period as may be required in
order to complete the permanent works Any proposed
change In location or relocation of any temporary works
must be preceded by the submission of a drawing , indicating
such change, to consultant/ owner for his approval.
b. All temporary works shall be construed to standard for
similar permanent facilities and shall comply with the
applicable rules, regulations and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
c. The mobilization should commence Within 14 days after the

NTP or letter of acceptance or date of signing the contract is
issued.
d. Within seven (7) calendar days of the date of
commencement of the mobilization period, the PC
contractor shall submit for the approval fully dimensioned
plans and detail showing the proposed location and layout
on the site of all necessary temporary buildings including
consuRant1owner office accommodations (located apart
from PC contractor’s offices), plant and materials stores,
testing laboratory, messing facilities etc. as such, plans shall
also include (but not limited to) the following:
1. Temporary access routes to, from, and upon the site.
2. Temporary fencing, gates, parking and other security
requirements.
3. Extent of covered or open areas designated for plant
and materials storage and/or for vehicle parking for PC
contractors. Owner’s and consultant's staff.
4. Refuse storage and collection points.
5. Means of providing fresh water supply, showing
location of drinking water storage tanks, tanker fill
points, and lines of distribution about the Site.
6. Means of providing temporary fire protection
facilities, showing location of the firefighting water
storage tanks, tanker fill points, pumping and fire hose
stations, and lines of distribution about the site.
7. Location and methods of sewage disposal and surface
water drainage.
8. Location and source of temporary power generation,
temporary switch boards etc. for all temporary
facilities, and as required providing lighting and power
for the execution of permanent works.
9. Telephone services.
10. Location of site name boards.
29.0 AS BUILT SUBMISSION:
1. Prior to transferring "As-Built" information from the record
set of prints to the originals of the approved drawings issued
for construction and, in the case of PC contracts, before the
client! Royal Commission will loan the originals for this
purpose, the Contractor shall submit a sample drawing,
prepared by each draftsman nominated to do the transfers,
to demonstrate its ability to comply with the specified
quality standards.
2. Following transfer of the "As-Built" information onto the
originals of drawings issued for construction. the Contractor
shall submit them, together with all other related
Contractor's and Manufacturer's, etc. drawings and all other
related documents, to the client for review Each drawing and
document shall be certified "As-Built" by the Contractor's
authorized signature in the space provided (see item 29.0 - 3
below). If, as a result of review, the client finds the drawings
or documents do not comply with this specification they will
be returned for Contractor's proper compliance and
resubmittal, Upon acceptance they will be signed as such by
the client's/ Royal Commission Project field Engineer, or his
delegate, in the space provided (see item 29.0 -3 below) and
the initial Acceptance, Partial Initial Acceptance of Beneficial
Occupancy (as applicable) process can proceed.
3. Each drawing and document shall be stamped, or otherwise
noted, as follows:
FINAL ACCPETANCE AS-BUILT

Project Field Engineer ------ Date -----------------------------
Contractor --------------------- Date -----------------------------
30.0 MOCK-UP SAMPLE:

The PC contractor shall prepare mock-up sample of each type of
Villas to show all permanent works/ dimensions, sizes and type of
finishing in order to be inspected by client/consultant for approval.
All comments given on such mockup has to be implemented on all
other units including the mockup unit. Mock up units will be the
reference for all other units.
31.0 PERMITS:
The PC contractor shall do all acts and things necessary, including
following-up on behalf of the Client with the concerned public,
authorities in order to obtain the required clearance certificates
and approvals from all the services providers as pre requisites.
The PC contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits
necessary to complete the works The PC contractor shall identify
an individual who with proper approval, introduction and
coordination by the owner, will interface with the Saudi Arabian
authorities. In addition, this Individual will coordinate the PC
contractor effort in identifying permit requirements, obtaining
applications, communicating the requirements, compiling the
required design documents, submitting the applications and
following through with the authorities. The individual shall be
subject to the owner's (Client) approval. Permit application,
processing and approvals take significant time and effort to
complete The PC contractor is responsible for planning and
allowing sufficient duration for such permits and approvals
10support the project master schedule.
0102 QUALITY CONTROL:
1.01 GENERAL:
A. In addition to the "General Obligations" as mentioned in the
Form of Agreement and Condition of Contract or these
documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for
establishing and executing a Quality Control Program.
B. A Quality Control Program is the procedure for the
continuous process of inspection; testing and
documentation of the work being performed in order 10
verify that the work has been accomplished in accordance
with the standards set down by the Drawings and
Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary staff
and facilities to implement and maintain the program.
C. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed the Contractor shall
submit a Quality Control Program to the Owner (Client) for
review and approval. The Program shall be complete and
contain all the elements indicated below. The Quality
Control Program, when approved, shall became an Integral
part of the Contract.
1. 2 POLlCY:
A. It is the responsibility Of the Contractor, under the
provisions of the Bid Documents, to furnish all
necessary quality control, inspection and testing
personnel, equipment, and facilities to support the
program. To be effective, the program must provide
for:
1. Adequate testing facilities.
2. Qualified personnel in adequate numbers and
separate from construction line reporting, to
monitor, test and evaluate work performed.
3. Clearly defined acceptability criteria for all
work performed.
4. Responsibility and authority of quality control
and inspection personnel to reject
unsatisfactory work and have in corrected.
5. Adequate numbers of workmen shall be
provided with necessary skills and well versed in
their applied craft, properly informed 01 the
methods and techniques required to execute
the work to high standards. In acceptance or
rejection of any work the Client will make no
allowance for lack of skill on the part of the
workmen used by the Contractor.
1. 3 QUALlTY STANDARDS:
A. Relevant catena setting forth the required standards
for materials and workmanship are given in the
Contract Documents. The Contractor's Quality Control
Program shall take lull account of the requirements of
such standards and criteria.
1. 4 WORKMANSHIP:
Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons
performing at site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods
and craftsmanship in completed work. Remove and replace
work which does not comply with workmanship standards as
specified and as recognized in the construction industry for
applications indicated. Remove and replace other work
damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its
replacements.
All work to be carried out in accordance to manufacture's
instruction, British standards or similar approval equal.
1. 5 ORGANIZATION:
A. A typical Quality Control Program would be divided
into two parts, On-site and Off-site. The Off- site
Program will consist of the Procurement of the
material of specified quality and standard and as they
arrive On-site for inspection, protection, storage,
handling and installation in the Permanent Work. The
On-site Program of the Quality Control is further
divided into:
1. Testing – to include all laboratory and field
materials testing services; and.
2. Inspection - to include all construction
inspection.
The Quality Control supervisor will maintain
records of all tests and inspection for Owner's
(Client) review.
B. Contractor shall designate one of his key personnel as
Quality Control Supervisor. It shall be the sole duty
and responsibility of the quality Control Supervisor
and his staff to organize, coordinate, conduct and
otherwise implement the Quality Control Plan as
submitted by the Contractor and approved by the
Owner (Client).
1. 6 SUBMITTALS:
A. Quality Control Program:
1. Completed procedures for each element of the
outline will be submitted for review and shall be
implemented before any new items or work
begin.
B. Certificates of Tests:
Daily records of On-site testing and inspection shall be
kept on forms of approved format. Test results shall
be certified by the appropriate person on the
Contractor’s quality control team. All test certincates
and inspection records shall be clearly identified with
the appropriate part of the Permanent works to which
they refer, and they shall be submitted to the Owner.
Certificates of test from suppliers or other of Off-site
testing agencies shall also be clearly identified with
the appropriate part of the works to which they refer
and shall be submitted to the Owner as soon as they
are available, and in any case not later than the date
at which the materials to which they refer are
delivered to the Work site.
C. Work Reports:
Once weekly, within 24 hours of the time of the last
inspection or test conducted, the Contractor shall
submit to the Owner, in an approved form. a report of
all quality control Inspection and test performed over
the previous seven days. The weekly reports shall
include all work performed by the Contractor, tests
performed with applicable sample numbers, and
inspection reports for both supplier's shops and the
Permanent Works All test data shall be summarized in
tabular and/or graphical form in a manner which best
illustrates the trends, specific results and specification
requirements Full explanation shall be provided to
show that action was taken (i.e., rejection of the work,
re-test, etc.) A separate report shall contain forecast
of work to be performed during the next 7 days. Hold
points shall be identified.
D. Inventory Records:
The Contractor shall keep detailed and up-to-date
records in an approved form of materials and
equipment on order, delivered, found faulty, lost
during the work or to be surplus to requirements. The
Owner shall have access to these records at all times,
Summary inventory records shall be submitted to the
Owner once a month.
E. Additional Quality Control Submittals:
Additional submittals shall be made as required in the
contract documents and the approved Quality Control
Programs.
F. Submittal Standards:
Contractor drawings and data submittals shall be in
accordance with other applicable sections of Bid
Documents. The Contractor’s submittals shall be
carefully organized so that the content can be read
easily. All drafting work shall be legible, accurate and
clear. On all Contractors’ drawings, the title block
must be complete before being submitted to the
Owner for review.
G. Material Schedule:
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the client
for material schedule and get approval before
commissioning work.
H. Materials - Inspection:
Unless otherwise expressly provided on the drawings
or in any of the other Contract Documents, only new
materials and equipment shall be incorporated In the
Works, All materials and equipment furnished by the
Contractor to be incorporated in the Work shall be
subject to inspection by Client Representative, and to
enable him to give approval. The Contractor shall
submit complete maternal or equipment
manufacturer information In a formal shop drawing
submittal. All inspections, certificates, records and
data for installed equipment shall be submitted or
performed in accordance with Royal Commission /
Client inspection Procedures.
I. Method of statement schedule:
Contractor to be provide method of statement
schedule for each activity covering all disciplines of
projects during execution for approval by Client.
J. Key Staff:
The Contractor shall submit to the client for key staff
detail and get approval before commissioning work.
K. Site Management Plan:
The Contractor shall submit to the client for Site
management plan detail and get approval before
commissioning work.
L. Site survey on taking possession:
Lines, Grades and Measurements:
a. The Contractor shall deploy the required site
supervision team as per the work requirements
and acceptance of the Client.
Contractor shall establish all lines, elevations,
reference marks, batter boards, etc. needed by
Contractor during the progress of the Work, and
from time to time to verify such marks by
instrument or other appropriate means.
Contractor shall deploy a qualified surveying team
capable enough to carry out Works related to all
surveying Works (specifically having thorough
know how of coordinates, as most of the Work is
done with coordinates).
b. Client Representative shall be permitted at all
times to check the lines, elevations. reference
marks, batter boards, etc., set by Contractor, who
shall correct any errors in lines, elevations,
reference marks, batter boards, etc., disclosed by
such check.
Such a check shall not be construed to be an
approval of Contractor's work and shall not relieve
or diminish in any way the responsibility of
Contractor for the accurate and satisfactory
construction and completion of the entire Work.
c. Contractor shall make all measurements and
check all dimensions necessary for the proper
construction of the Work called for by the Drawings
and Specifications. During the execution of the
Work, Contractor shall make all necessary
measurements to prevent errors in the Work.
d. Contractor shall provide at his own expense batter
boards, forms, materials, and labor as may be
required or directed. If Contractor for any reason
removes, or permits to remove, any reference
marks established, the replacement of such
reference marks shall be set at Contractor’s
expense.
e. Contractor shall furnish to Client Representative
such assistance as may be needed for setting or
checking lines and grades and making other
measurements In connection with the Work.
M. Inspection test Plan:
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Client
for approval within thirty (30) days of the Notice of
Award an Inspection and Testing Plan covering all of
the Contractor’s work activities both on and off the
Work Site, The plan shall be in two parts covering off
Work Site and on Work Site activities respectively. The
Contractor, with the Client's on or written approval,
may delay the submission of the portion of the plan
covering on-work, Site activities to a date thirty days
prior to commencement of such activities if Work Site
activities are not scheduled to commence for a
minimum of six months after the Notice of Award.
The Inspection and Testing Plan shall include. But not
be limited to, a full and complete description of each
item or part of the Work to be inspected or tested, the
nature and frequency of the inspection and testing.
The type and size of samples to be taken, If any, the
means of recording the inspection and testing data,
the name and specific responsibility of any proposed
testing or inspection agency and all other information
necessary or required to fully describe the inspection
and testing function to be performed for the Work,
The Contractor's Inspection and Testing Plan when
approved by the Client shall be used for the inspection
and testing of the Work and shall be revised and
resubmitted for the Client's approval whenever the
Contractor wishes to change the sequence, method or
nature of the Inspection and testing or the sequence,
method or nature of the inspection and testing differs
from the current approved Contract Schedule and
Scope of the Work. Neither the Client's approval of or
failure to approve the Contractor's Inspection and
Testing Plan shall detract from the Contractors'
responsibility for the Inspection, testing and
performance of the Work as provided for In the
Contract. Such Inspection and Testing program shall
be applicable for the Contractor manufactured items.
Vendor supplied items and on-Me construction.
N. As-Built Records:
A. Each document except drawings shall be labeled
"AS-BUILT' in 6 mm high printed letters and
drawings in 12 mm high printed letters, A rubber
stamp may be utilized for this purpose.
B. Information shall be recorded concurrently with
construction progress.
C. The Contractor shall not permanently conceal any
work until required information has been
recorded.
D. Drawing Issued for Construction: The Contractor
shall legibly mark and record actual construction
of the following:
1. Levels of various elements of foundations
relative to the Client Datum.
2. Horizontal and vertical locations of
underground and above ground utilities and
appurtenances in client Grid Coordinates and
relative to the client Datum.
3. Location of internal utilities, structural elements
and appurtenances concealed in the
construction, referenced to visible and
accessible features of the structure.
4. Final coordinates of building corners.
5. Field changes in power and telecommunication
single line diagrams, riser diagrams, etc.
6. Field changes of dimensions and details issued
and/or drawing clarification notices.
7. Revision authorized by contract change order
(CDD) if not already incorporated into an
updated revision of the drawing.
8. Delails not on original Contract Drawings.
9. Modifications or substitutions of details which
in each case. by reason of having no significant
impact on design, construction or Intended
operations and maintenance of the facility.
Have been given "Code I" review status by the
Royal Commission/client.
E. Specifications: The Contractor shall legibly mark
each Section to record the following:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number,
supplier of each product and item of
equipment actually installed.
2. Revisions authorized by Contract Change
Order (CCO), or equivalent products and
equipment or substitutions which in each
case have been given "Code I" review status
by the Royal Commission/client.
3. Other items not originally or not fully
specified, or which were originally given a
performance-type specification requiring
specialized technical implementation.
F. Contractor’s Drawings: The Contractor shall
prepare "As-Built" drawings to record the
following, as applicable to the Contract, but not
limited to:
1. Underground conditions found as a result of
site investigations and any changes made to
the original conditions.
2. Location, elevation, rake and orientation of
each substructure element of foundations.
3. Locations, elevations, sizes, material and
function of all buried utilities uncovered
during excavations and any adjustments,
changes or connections made to them.
4. Interfacing With previously existing utilities
and the coordination of utilities constructed,
where shown as separate systems in the
drawings issued for construction. These shall
include the following system components as
relevant: sewers, storm water drainage
(both surface and underground), subsoil
drainage, potable water, irrigation water
and control, power, telecommunication and
CATV ducts and cables, street lighting and
traffic Signal cables.
5. Coordination of surface features, where
shown separately in drawings issued for
construction, and interfacing with work
done or designed for adjacent contracts.
6. Shop drawings of precast concrete
components showing cast in attachment and
lifting devices, other fabrication details
(including date cast and identification
marks), erection details and the final
location of each component.
7. Pre-stressing details (including system used,
ducting, anchorages, grouting) with
recorded results of elongations, loads and
other pertinent information.
8. Systems diagrams, instrumentation
diagrams, locations, installation devices and
connections to other unities for HVAC, and
other items of mechanical equipment.
9. Schedules relating mechanical equipment
designations, manufacturer, brand, model,
capacity, serial and other identifying
numbers to installed locations.
10. Electrical equipment ratings and
device/equipment numbers, power
transformer impedances, C.T. ratios, where
not shown in drawings issued for
construction.
11. Schematics with electrical,
telecommunication and/or Instrumentation
Device/equipment numbers, wire and cable
numbers, terminal numbers and special
sequencing or logic descriptions, where not
shown in drawings issued for construction.
12. Above and below ground
telecommunication cable routing with box
and equipment numbers and locations.
Connections with trunk identification and
assignment. Cable pair loading coils.
G. The Contractor shall record changes in engineering
calculations resulting from changes in the work.
H. Items recorded as specified above shall be cross-
referred between one type of document to
another so that, for example, changes recorded in
drawings can be readily tracked to equivalent
changes in specifications or other documents and
vice -versa. Contractor's and manufacturer's
drawings shall be cross-referred to the marked-up
drawings issued for construction.
I. Reference documents:
Relevant references may be cited from the
pertinent individual Specification Sections.
J. RISK ASSESSMEN:T
Risk assessment consists of an objective evaluation
of all potential risks in which assumptions and
uncertainties are clearly considered and
presented.
1. 7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor shall supply all samples for testing, and
consumable materials used in testing procedures and all
testing equipment.
1. 8 MATERIAL TRANSPORT, HANDLING AND STORAGE
PROCEDURES:
Except as otherwise provided in the Contract the Contractor
shall deliver to the Work Site, receive, unload, store in a
secure place, and deliver from storage to the construction
area all materials and equipment required for the
performance of the Work. The Contract storage facilities and
methods of storing shall meet the Client's approval.
Materials and equipment subject to damage, degradation or
spoilage shall be stored in a suitable enclosure provided by
the Contractor, The Contractor shall keep complete and
accurate records, for the Client's inspection, of all materials
and equipment received at the Work site, stored, and issued
for use in the performance of the Work.
1. 9 EXECUTION:
A. The Quality Control Program approved by the
Client shall be followed throughout the
performance of the Contract unless specific
approvals of instructions to the contrary are
received from the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall at all times have one or more
persons On site charged with specific responsibility
for quality control and no other responsibility, Such
person or persons shall be vested with authority to
reject work already carried out when such work
does not meet the specified standards.
1. 10 INSPECTION:
Access shall be provided for inspection of the works by the
Owner at all times, but such inspections shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities in this connection.
1. 11 ELEMENTS OF OFF-SITE AND ON-SITE QUALITY CONTROL
PLANS:
The Following list provides guideline format for the types of
elements that must be Included in a Site Quality Control Plan
It is not intended to be all inclusive but rather to give the
Contractor a clear picture of the types of elements to be
covered. Contractor may use his own format and grouping as
long as the required elements are covered.
1. 12 GENERAL ITEMS:
A. Procurement and Manufacturing Control:
1. Control of:
a. Manufacturing.
b. Material and Equipment Supplies.
c. Sub –Contractors.
2. Receiving control.
3. Inventory control.
4. Storage and Maintenance during construction.
B. Survey Control.
C. Testing Laboratory Control.
D. Calibration of construction tools and equipment.
E. Documentation and record storage.
1. 13 DETAILED JTEMS:
A. Civil:
1. Earthwork:
a. General Excavation.
b. Backfill/compaction.
c. Trenching d. Materials Testing and Inspection.
2. Concrete:
a. Forms Material
b. Rebar Control &
c. Embedded Materials in place
d. Concrete Inspection
3. Structural and Miscellaneous Steel:
a. Receiving.
b. Pre-erection.
c. Erection complete d. Painting.
d. Painting.
4. Other Civil:
a. Pre-cast concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Manholes.
5. Architectural:
a. Floor & wall finishes, Roofing and Cladding.
b. Roofs.
c. Doors, Windows, Louvers, Vents, Kitchen & Bath
fittings, etc.
d. Rendering (Plastering).
B. Mechanical Piping (Exposed and Buried):
1. Pipes:
a. Materials.
b. Supports, Hangers.
c. Coatings.
d. Installation inspections.
e. Testing.
2. Valves.
3. Mechanical Equipment:
a. Storage and Maintenance.
b. Installation and Inspections.
c. Testing.
4. Welding.
5. Insulation.
C. Electrical:
1. Equipment:
a. Storage and Maintenance.
b. Installation and Inspection.
c. Testing.
2. Conduit.
3. Cable.
4. Connections.
5. Ducts.
1. 14 HOLD POINT INSPECTIONS:
A. "Hold Point" is defined as a part of the work that cannot
proceed until it has been inspected and certified by
signature of the proper authority. Hold points can be
either Contractor "Hold Points", requiring the Contractor
Q C. Manager's signature or Owner "Hold Points"
requiring a signature by a representative of the Owner.
The format of the "Hold Point" document shall include at
what stage of the work "Hold Point" is required,
description of the work to be inspected, appropriate pay
item reference and shall be approved by the Owner.
1. 15 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittals shall be made for all materials to be
incorporated into the permanent works as required by
various sections of this Specification.
B. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed the Contractor
shall submit a Material Submittal Program to the Owner
for review and approval. The Program shall be completed
and contain all the materials referred to above.
C. Wherever possible the Contractor shall submit a
minimum of three (3) alternative vendors for each
category of material.
D. The Contractor shall allow a period of ten days for review
of materials submittals by the Owner/Owner's
Representative.
E. Should the Contractor intend to propose the use of any
alternative materials to those specified in the Contract
Documents, then the Contractor must provide a detailed
list of all such materials together with all relevant product
data etc., and a justification for this proposed substitution
for the Owners approval.
F. All material submittals are to be supported technical
literature which should include as a minimum
manufacturer's instruction, Q.A. certificates, etc.
G. Contractor to allow for material sample library on site of
all submittals, including technical literature.
H. Site condition Execute periodic cleaning to keep building,
site, and adjacent properties free of accumulations of
waste materials, debris, rubbish, and windblown debris
resulting from construction operations, trucks not taking
dirt on the public roads, etc. and all to comply with local
environmental laws.
I. Section on the shop drawings and approval process
required.
===End of Section ===
0103 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1. 0 GENERAL:
2.0 1 Description:
A. This section specifies Contractor's temporary services and,
office and support facilities, including utilities, construction
and support facilities.
Provide facilities ready for use, maintain, expand and modify
as needed. Remove when no longer needed.
2.0 2 General Requirements:
A. Keep facilities clean and neat Operate in a safe and efficient
manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures.
Do not overload, or permit facilities to interfere with
progress.
Do not allow hazardous, uncertainty conditions to develop
or persist on site.
B. Inspection: Arrange for Client Representative to inspect and
test each temporary utility before use Obtain required
approval and permits.
C. Cost or use changes for Contractor's temporary facilities are
not chargeable to Client and will not be accepted as a basis
of claim for a change order.
2.0 3 Reference Standards:
A. IBC, International Building Code – 2003.
B. IPC, International Plumbing Code.
C. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association.
D. NEC, National Electric Code.
E. NEMA, National Electric Manufacturers Association.
F. NESC, National Electric Safety Code.
2.0 4 Submittals:
A. Submit reports of tests, inspections and similar procedures
performed on temporary utilities. Submit a schedule showing
implementation and termination of each temporary utility within
15 days of commencement of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.0 1 Sanitary Facilities:
A. Include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water
fixtures, Comply with the regulations and health codes of SASO /
Royal Commission / RC Sanitary Code for type, number, location,
operation and maintenance of fixtures. Provide toilet tissues, paper
towels, and disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered
waste containers for used materials.
2.0 2 Toilets:
A. Install self-contained toilet units, properly vented and fully
enclosed. Toilets shall be in accordance with the applicable
reference as listed in Section 103 "Reference Standards".
2.0 3 Drinking Water:

A. Provide drinking water units.
2.0 4 Project Sign:
A. Construct, install and maintain project signs as specified details
2.0 5 Contractor's Field Office & Accommodation Facilities:
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a temporary field office,
and support facilities in a location designated by Client for his own
use during the period of construction. The office shall be located
where it will not interfere with the progress of the work. In charge
of this office there shall be a competent superintendent of the
Contractor. The office and all facilities shall conform to the
applicable Codes listed in Section 1.03 "Reference Standards
2.0 6 Client's Field Offices:

A. Scope:
Contractor shall provide and maintain during the project duration,
on land provided by Client, office facilities including all required
support services and facilities for Client personnel and/or Client
designated personnel to a level of quality generally acceptable to
the construction industry as determined by the Client
Representative. The contractor should propose to the Client
Representative's approval specifications for constructing the site
offices. Temporary Site Facilities shall be provided prior to
commencement of construction until Project Completion and
Commissioning,
B. Temporary Site Facilities shall consist of:
1. Office facilities at site.
2. Shaded Parking Area.
3. Broadway vehicle.
4. New brand office.
Once the Contractor Provided Site Facilities are no longer

required under this Contract, and Client has so agreed in
writing. Contractor shall remove all such Contractor Provided
Site Facilities and restore the land to as-found condition, unless
Client and Contractor have otherwise mutually agreed in
writing.
C. Services:
Contractor shall provide the following services:

1. Contractor shall furnish all offices with marker board, waste paper
basket, in/out trays and other standard desktop equipment.
2. Contractor shall provide the kitchenette of Client offices and the
Client designated personnel with cold/hot bottled drinking water
facility, refrigerator, and kettle.
3. Contractor shall supply complete office stationery to the Client
offices. Stationery shall be supplied, throughout the Contract
duration, in sufficient amounts and quantities for the numbers of
person required.
This is to include, but not be limited to, paper for photocopiers
(with paper selection of A4/A3 and letter sizes), facsimile and
printers, writing pads, pens, pencils, in/out trays, staplers, tape,
rubber bands, erasers, 2 and 3 hole punchers, files and folders and
other accessories and supplies for the listed office equipment.
4. Contractor shall be responsible for the complete kitchenette
furnishing and to provide two (2) office boys.
5. Contractor shall be responsible to supply complete sanitary
requirements for the toilet facilities and to be kept clean and
provided with all necessary toilet paper, towels, cleaning and
detergents agents, refreshing at all time.
6. Contractor shall provide first aid facilities within the offices, for the
first line treatment of Client designated personnel.
D. Site Facilities Plan:
As part of the Project Execution Plan, Contractor shall prepare for
Client review and approval, a comprehensive site facilities plan
which details all Contractor provided site facilities and the
procedures to be used to maintain and administer them. This plan
shall address, at a minimum, the following:
 Plot plans and building layouts.
 Specific descriptions of furniture and equipment.
 Proposed typical menus.
 Water supply and handling.
 Fire protection.
 Security.
 Medical care and evacuation plan.
 Sanitation.
 Refuse handling.
 Solid waste land fill and construction debris site. (Prior
approval is required by Client).
Contractor will present this plan to Client within fourteen
(14) days from effective date of the Contract to allow for
Client review and for Contractor to respond to any
comments or recommendations that may be made by Client
E. Standard:
1. Contractor Provided Site Facilities shall be built and operated
consistent with all Labor and Workmen's Laws in the Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia and applicable Royal Commission RC standards.
2. Air conditioning with individual controls to maintain
temperature between 70° and 75° F.
F. Contractor shall provide electrical power, 400/230V, 3 phase, 60 Hz
as needed, continuous communications facilities (phone, fax, and
internet).
G. The contractor shall provide in an approval and as a self-contained
compound, a company consultants project office with 160 m2 of
good quality air conditioned office, complete with toilets, kitchen
facility, telephone, tax, computer with printers A3, Wi-Fi internet,
office supplies, copy machine (A3) and complete furniture's.
1. Project manager offices with small meeting room with
complete facilities, computer, furniture, cabinet.... Etc.
2. Senior Civil Engineer (2) with complete facilities.
3. Meeting room for 10 persons with complete facilities.
4. Toilets (2).
5. Secretary section with complete facilities and attached with
small room for documentation store.
6. Guest sitting area.
7. Engineers hall for 10 persons with complete facilities.
8. Sample room for sample material (36m2).
9. Tea room.
10. The Contractor is to provide 1 no four-wheel drive Toyota
Prada or equivalent to SAUDI ARAMCO for site
transportation for the project duration
2.0 7 Fire and Safety Standards:
A. Fire-fighting equipment shall be in accordance with NFPA.
Provide pressurized 2-1/2 U.S. gallon water extinguishers for
ordinary combustibles. A fixed fire protection shall be provided
for kitchen hood.
B. Fire Detection: Provide fire alarm system according to IBC
907.2.10.3.
2.0 8 Health and Sanitation Standards:
A. Provide / Refer to the Contract Schedules for requirements
pertaining to housing facilities, dining and food handling
facilities, and waste management.
2.0 9 Medical Facilities:
A. Provide / Refer to the Contract Schedules
2.0 10 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Communications:
A. The Contractor shall provide, supply, install and maintain

service required for power, lighting and communications.
B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when

natural light is not adequate for work and for areas accessible
to the public.
C. Lighting and power of the Contractor Camp, accommodation

and client offices shall conform to the applicable Standards
listed in Section 1.03 "Reference Standards" and all Royal
Commission /RC Standards under "P" index.
2.0 11 Non-Electric Utilities:
All non-electric utilities supply, installation, testing, flushing and

disinfection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall
be in accordance with the applicable references listed in Section
1.03 "Reference Standards".
2.0 12 Equipments:
A. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent
HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-
gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic
control.
1. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of
permanent HVAC system for temporary use during
construction, provide filter with Minimum Efficiency
Ratina Value (MERV) of 8 at each return air grille in
system and remove at end of construction.
PART 3 – EXECUTION:
1.0 1 Operation:
A. Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit
availability to intended use to minimize abuse. Maintain
facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.0 2 Termination and Remova!

A. Coordinate with Client to remove each temporary facility when
the need has ended Temporary facilities are the property of the
Contractor.
1.0 3 Project Identification and Temporary Signs:
A. Prepare project identification signs as specified standard detail

and install where indicated. Prepare signs to provide directional
information to construction personnel and visitors The signs
shall be erected in locations as directed by Client
Representative,
1.0 4 Environmental Protection:
A. Operate temporary facilities and conduct construction by

methods that comply with environmental regulations to
minimize the possibility that air and subsoil might be
contaminated or polluted.
1.0 5 Installation / General:

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and
result in minimum interference with performance of the Work.
Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
=== End of section ===

0104 TEMPORARY FENCING AND BARRICADES
Part 1 – General:
1.0 1 Temporary Fences and Barricades:

A. Erect temporary fencing to prevent unauthorized personnel
from entering construction sites and Temporary Construction
Facilities. Maintain the Fencing for the duration of construction
operations.
B. Erect fencing around the site perimeters.
C. Temporary fencing shall be as per the relevant authorities
requirements and as approved by the Client Representative.
Part 2 & 3 - Products & Execution:

As per SBC/RC Standards & Client Representative at site instruction.
- End of section -
1.0 5 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 1 Requirements:
A. Furnish, install and maintain project identification sign.
B. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements
of construction facilities.
C. Remove signs upon completion of construction.
D. Allow no other signs to be displayed.
1.0 2 Related Requirements:
A. Section 0103 - Temporary Construction Facilities
1.0 3 Project Identification Sign:

A. Contractor shall provide at each separate approved work location a sign
indicating the presence of the individual Contractor, Only one sign will be
allowed Company name, address, logo, and Client project and contract
number. The sign shall be in Arabic and English. The Contractor shall
submit the design and location for approval prior to installation.
Contractor shall maintain the sign in good repair and condition, and upon
completion of the Work shall remove and dispose of the sign. Except for
warnings and other signs required by law and ordinance, Contractor shall
place no other signs or advertisements on the premises without the
written consent of the Client Representative.
B. Graphic Design Style of Lettering, and Colors: As designated by Client
Representative.
C. Erect on the site at a lighted location of high public visibility, adjacent to
main entrance to site, as approved by Client Representative.
1.0 4 Informational Signs:
A. Painted signs with painted lettering:

1. Size of signs and lettering as required by regulatory agencies, or as
appropriate to usage.
2. Colors as required by regulatory agencies, otherwise of uniform
colors throughout Project.
B. Erect at appropriate locations to provide required information.
1.0 5 Quality Assurance:

A. Sign Painter: Professional Experience in type of work required.
B. Finishes Painting Adequate to resist weathering and fading for scheduled
construction period.
0105 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.0 1 Sign Materials
A. Structure and Framing: May be new or used, wood or metal, in sound
condition structurally adequate to work, and suitable for specified
finish.
B. Sign Surfaces. Exterior softwood plywood with medium density
overlay, standard large sizes to minimize joints.
Thickness: As required by standards to span framing members, to
provide even, smooth surface without waves or buckles.
C. Rough hardware: Galvanized.
D. Paint Exterior quality.
1. Use Bulletin colors for graphics.
2. Colors for structure, framing, sign surfaces and graphics:
Representative As selected by Client Representative.
0105 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.0 1 Project Identification Sign:

A. Paint exposed surfaces of supports, framing and surface
material; one coat of primer and one coat of exterior paint.
B. Paint graphics in styles, sizes, and colors selected
3.0 2 Information Signs:
A. Paint Exposed Surfaces: One coat of primer and one coat of
exterior paint.
B. Paint graphics in styles, sizes, and colors selected.
C. Install at a height for optimum visibility, on ground mounted
poles or attached to temporary structural surfaces
3.0 3 Maintenance:
A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair

damages to structure, framing or sign.
B. Relocate informational signs as required by progress of the

work.
3.0 4 Removal:
A. Remove temporary signs, framing, supports, and foundations at
completion of project
=== End of Section ===
0106 CLOSE-OUT REQUIREMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
01 Requirements Included:
A. Close-out requirements include those general requirements in
preparation for Initial Acceptance, final payment and normal
termination of the contract. Specific requirements for individual
units of work are specified in the technical sections of these
specifications.
1.0 2 Record Document Submittals:

A. Immediately prior to the time of Initial Acceptance, complete
the record documents in accordance with the requirements of
"Record Documents", and submit to Client for acceptance.
B. The record documents are as follows:
1. Record Drawings
2. As-Built Drawings
3. Record Specifications
4. Record Shop Drawing Information
5. Record Miscellaneous Submittals
6. Record Samples
C. The documents shall be organized in a logical order, bound or
filed, ready for continued use and reference.
D. Immediately prior to the time of Initial Acceptance, Client will
meet with the Contractor at the site, and will determine which
of the record samples maintained by the Contractor during the
progress of the work are to be submitted. Any samples not
required by Client shall be properly disposed of by the
Contractor.
1.0 3 Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

A. Arrange for each installer of work requiring continuing
maintenance or operation to meet with the operating personnel at
the project site to provide basic instructions needed for proper
operation and maintenance of the entire work.
B. Include instructions by manufacturer's representatives where
installers are not expert in the required procedures.
C. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare
parts and materials, lubricants, fuels, identification system, control
sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities
D. Review maintenance and operations in relation with applicable
guarantees, warranties, agreements to maintain, bonds, and
similar continuing commitments,
1.0 4 Final Cleaning:
A. Special cleaning for specific units of work shall be as specified in the

various technical specifications.
B. Provide final cleaning of the work at the time indicated, consisting of
cleaning each surface or unit of work to the normal "clean" condition
expected for a first-class building cleaning and maintenance program
comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations As a
minimum, the following are examples of the cleaning levels required.
1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels
2. Clear exposed hard-surfaced finishes, including metals,

concrete, painted surfaces, special coatings, and similar
surfaces, to a dirt free condition, free of dust, stains, films and
similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise
indicated, avoid the disturbances of natural weathering of
exterior surfaces Restore reflective surfaces to original
condition.
3. Remove debris and surfaces dust from limited-access spaces

including trenches, equipment vaults and similar spaces.
4. Clean project site including landscape development areas of

litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-
clean condition; remove stains, petro chemical spills and other
foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are neither planted nor
paved to a smooth, even textured surface.
C. Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Client, remove

temporary protective devices and facilities which were installed during
the course of the work to protect previously completed work during
the remainder of the construction period.
D. Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning

operations. Do not burn waste materials at the site, nor bury debris or
excess materials on the property, nor discharge volatile or other
harmful or dangerous materials into drainage system. Remove waste
materials from the site and dispose of.
E. Green Housekeeping: Provide documentation that all cleaning

products and janitorial paper products meet requirements of relevant
authorities in KSA.
1.0 5 Continuing Inspection:
A. Where required by special guarantee, warranties, agreements to

maintain, workmanship bonds and similar continuing
commitments, comply with requests to participate in inspections
at the end of each time period of such continuing commitments.
1.0 6 Delivery Turnover Inventory Requirements

A. Upon product delivery the Contractor shall:
1. Conduct tests and operational checks to ensure serviceability of
property to be transferred.
2. Verify cleanliness and overall condition as acceptable.
3. Prepare the inventory list on form furnished by Client.
4. Coordinate with Client to obtain forms, and to ensure
completeness and accuracy of t TRANSFER/CUSTODY
document.
5. Designate a contractor representative authorized to sign the
TRANSFER/CUSTOI document upon completion of the turnover
inventory.
Note: Property considered to be unclean, unserviceable and/or
unfit for use will be rejected by Client.
Part 2 – Products:
2.01 Green Housekeeping:
A. Utilize cleaning products that meet the requirements of Saudi or

International Standards.
Part 3 - General (Not Used).

0107 ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
1.0 General:
This section summarizes some of the major Contractor responsibilities in
constructability, construction planning and work permitting activities.
The Contractor is to provide constructability procedures and methods for
construction planning in accordance with the Contract Documents Main
items affecting constructability and construction planning are indicated
in Table 1 below.
Table 1 Constructability and Construction Planning Items

Sequence of Installation
Construction Schedule
Material Site Required Dates
Work Breakdown Structure
Construction Execution Strategy
Drawing construction strategy
Health, Safety & Environmental Plan
Work Permitting and site access plan
2.0 Constructability:
Constructability Requirements contractor shall implement and conduct

constructability reviews during the project. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to assess and confirm all construction constructability aspects
3.0 Not Used.
4.0 Not Used.

DIVISION 2
SITEWORK
0200 Survey work.
0201 Earthwork - including Excavation, Filling and Grading.
0202 Boundary Wall.
0203 Pavement Sub-Base and Aggregate Base.
0204 Underground Piping and Site Utility Pits.
0205 Pre-construction Termite Control.
0206 Interlocking block paving/ mosaic tile.
0207 Curbs.
0208 Landscape.
0200 SURVEY WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 1 Description:
A. Work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing survey crew,
setting LL reference points and bench marks, vertical and horizontal
setting out of all building foundations, fences, grading, trench work, utility
installations, roadways, asphalt paving walkways and other works
forming part of the Contract.
B. Work is to be performed in accordance with the conditions as per
standards.
1.0 2 Related Work:

A. Section 0201 – Earthwork.
B. Section 0203 - Pavement Sub-Base and Aggregate Base.
C. Section 0301 - Concrete Reinforcement.
D. Section 0302 - Concrete Work.
1.0 3 Contractor Responsibility:
A. Contractor responsibility includes, but is not limited to:
1. Performing all surveys for the duration of the Contract to ensure that levels
an locations conform to the design Drawings, and shop/working drawings
approved by clien Representative.
2. Making formal requests to Client for data on survey control points related
to the project prie to construction.
3. Verifying the figures on all Client furnished data and documents before
laying out the Work contractor shall be responsible for any errors or
inaccuracies resulting from his failure to do so.
4. Informing Client Representative if the validity of any survey monument is
threatened, ar takes the necessary steps as outlined in this Specification.
5. Obtaining approval of Client Representative if any survey control points will
be disturbed destroyed by construction activities.
6. Maintaining all Client established reference points and bench marks at all
times duri construction. Under the direction of Client Representative,
replace any survey monumen damaged or disturbed by construction
activity.
7. Preparing accurate as-built survey and submission of drawings.
8. Contractor shall submit a survey report after each completed (compacted)
layer to Client representative for verifying the correct elevation. No work
shall proceed for the next phase prior to approval of the completed work.
9. Contractor shall contact Client Survey Group through PMT to verify the exact
punch mark prior to start of any backfilling.
1.0 4 Accuracy and Quality Assurance:

A. Contractor is to establish all horizontal and vertical reference points, and
monuments accurately within a maximum tolerance of 5 mm vertically and
10 mm horizontally. Subsequent checking or lack of checking by Client does
not relieve Contractor from his responsibility for the correctness of the
construction.
B. Contractor will be provided with survey controls (refer to benchmark data
shown on the drawings). These control points shall be tied from any of Client
survey controls and closed to another Client survey control All survey field
notes must be kept in field at all times for inspection by Client
Representative.
1.0 5 Submittals:
A. Submit to Client Representative all data and grade sheets at least 48
hours prior to construction. Show on the grade sheets the vertical and
horizontal relationships between the stakes and the design reference
points shown on the Drawings
PART 2 – PRODUCTS:
2.0 1 Stakes
A. Construction Stakes: Construction stakes shall be 14 mm steel rebar.

Wood or PVC stakes may be used as directed by Client Representative.
B. Machine Control Stakes: Machine control stakes shall conform to

manufacturer's specifications.
3.0 1 Surveying Work:
A. Contractor Survey Controls: From Client provided survey controls (refer
to bench mark data shown on the Drawings), Contractor shall establish
additional survey controls with an accuracy as stipulated in this
Specification.
B. Survey Monuments: If the validity of any survey monument is threatened,
place at least three (3) reference or witness markers for each point likely
to be disturbed. Submit survey notes listing the relative positions of the
reference markers to each other, and to the points they are referencing
at least 48 hours prior to disturbing or threatening the validity of the
monument.
C. Road Works:
1. General. Prior to the start of grading, and during the progress of the
Work, set and maintain sufficient stakes to show conformance with
the Drawings. Locate all stakes in such a way that they will not be
disturbed by construction operations.
2. Stake Placement: Construction stakes shall be placed at the left and
right of center lines, at shoulders, edge of paving, grade breaks,
beginning and ending of curves, angle points and intersections of flow
lines.
3. Stake Spacings :
Item Curve Straight Grade Vertical

Subgrade 30 m 10 m
Base 20m 10 m
Asphalt Paving, auto equipment controlled 10 m 5m
by string-line
D. Utility Work:
1. General: Prior to beginning trenching operations, and during the
progress of the Work, set and maintain sufficient stakes to show
conformance with the Drawings. Locate all stakes in such a way
that they will not be disturbed by construction operations.
2. Stake placement Construction stakes are to be place at, but not
limited to, the following locations;
a. Utility Pipes: Stakes shall be placed at each wye or tee
connection, cleanout and manholes and at every 10 meter
station.
E. Park Work: Prior to beginning of grading, and during the progress of the
Work, set and maintain sufficient stakes to show conformance with the
Drawings. Locate all stakes in such a way that they will not be damaged
or disturbed by construction operations.
F. Contractor shall protect the stakes in areas where they are likely to be
disturbed or displaced.

0201 EARTHWORK
PART 1 – GENERAL:
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Sand- Cone Method.
ASTM D 1557 - Tests Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort.
ASTM D 4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.
ASTM D 4254 - Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and weight
of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to
work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of earthwork is indicated on drawings.
Preparation of sub-grade for isolated footings, grade beams, building slabs,

walls, and pavements is included as part of this work.
Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of this work.
1.03 EXCAVATION FOR MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL WORK:
Excavation and backfill required in conjunction with underground

mechanical and electrical utilities, and buried mechanical and electrical
appurtenances is included as work of this section
1.04 DEFINITION:
"Excavation" consists of removal of material encountered to sub-grade

elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed.
"Backfilling" consists of Refilling of spaces from excavation is referred to as

Backfilling.
"Fill material consists of an approved soil material being placed upon the
surface of an existing ground.
"Formation" consists of the geological features of the earth.
"Barrow material" consists of Material obtained from sources other than

from site excavation. This is a reference to the source of supply and not to
the characteristics of the material.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with

applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
 FIELD LABORATORY:
Contractor shall provide field laboratory with a skilled technician,

including as a minimum the following equipment:
- Modified Proctor Density Test Apparatus (ASTM D 1557).
- Sand-Cone Method Apparatus (ASTM D 1556).
- Set of ASTM Sieves, Balances and Stoves.
- Relative Density (ASTM D 4253/4).
- Equipment to execute the CBR (California Bearing Ratio) for roads on

filling.
- Certificates of materials coming from external borrows.
1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES:
Employ, at Contractor's expense, testing laboratory to perform soil testing

and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork
operations
The following minimum testing shall be performed:

 One standard sieve analysis and one Modified Proctor Test with
corresponding Proctor curve shall be performed on every 1000 cubic
meters. If there is a large variation in analysis, more frequent tests shall
be made.
 In Place Density AND Moisture content Testing.
The following in place density tests on compacted fill shall be performed:
1. Structural fill - one every 75 cubic meters. (maximum involved

structural fill: 10000m).
2. Backfill and sub-base- every 150 cubic meters. (maximum involved

backfill and general fill: 20000m3).
3. Road base and sub-base-one every 75 cubic meters.
At least one set of these density tests must be performed on every

lift of fill and further placement shall not be allowed until the
required density is achieved.
The number of tests shall be increased, if a visual inspection

determines that the moisture content is not uniform or if the
compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to
obtain the specified density,
1.07 SUBMITTALS:
Test Reports - Excavation: Submit following reports directly to The Client

Representative from the testing services:
a. Methods statement for the works.
b. Excavation permits as per requirements.
c. Test reports on borrow material.
d. Verification of foundation sub-grade
e. Field density test reports.
f. One optimum moisture-maximum density Curve for each type of soil

encountered.
g. Report of actual unconfined compression strength and/or results of
bearing test of each strata tested.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS:
Site Information.
The contractor shall carry out, at his own expense, appropriate tests i.e plate
bearing test or other exploratory operations to determine the ground
condition bearing the works capacity, water table depth etc. prior to
commencing the works.
1.09 Existing Utilities: Verify location of existing underground utilities in
areas of work. Where utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate
means of support and protection during earthwork operations.
1.010 Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be
encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for
directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping
respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to
satisfaction of utility owner.
1.011 Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used
by Owner or others, during occupied hours, except when permitted in
writing by The Client Representative and then only after acceptable
temporary services have been provided.
A. Provide minimum of 48 hours notice to the Client Representative, and
receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.
1.012 Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted.
1.013 Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations
occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.
1.014 Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.015 Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities
from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,
washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
0201 EARTHWORK
PART II – PRODUCTS:
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS:
Definitions.
Satisfactory backfill materials below structural members are those
classified as A-1-a materials as per ASTM D-3282.
2.02 Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with
ASTM, D2487 soil Classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH
and PT.
2.03 Sub-base Material Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or
crushed gravel, Crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand.
2.04 Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock
or gravel larger than 100mm in any dimension, debris, waste materials,
vegetable and other deleterious matter.
TABLE 2.04A: SIEVE GRADATION LIMITS FOR SAND BACKFILL:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing
(ASTM E11) (by Weight)
9.5 mm (% in.) 100
4 75 mm (No. 4) 95-100
2.36 mm (No 8) 80-100
1.18 mm (No. 16) 50-85
0.60 mm (No. 30) 25-60
0.30 mm (No. 50) 10-30
0.15 mm (No 100) 2-10
TABLE 2.04A: SIEVE GRADATION LIMITS FOR GRANULAR SUBBASE:

75 mm 100
50 mm 90-100
4.75 mm 35-70
0.0075.mm 0-15
TABLE 2.04C: SIEVE GRADATION LIMITS FOR GRANULAR COURSE MATERIAL:
37.5mm 100
25mm 60-100
19mm 55-85
7.75mm 35-60
2.00mm 25-52
0.425 mm 15-30
0.075mm 8-15
2.05 Termite protection- All surfaces of the ground under structures to be

treated with a suitable approved termite protection treatment.
0201 EARTHWORK
PART III - EXECUTION
Methods:
a. The Contractor shall receive prior approval from the RC/Client and utilizes
methods for placement and compaction of fill that have been based on
the Contractor's proposal.
b. Whether or not specifically indicated in the Contractors description of the
approved methods, the Contractor shall place and compact fill in an
orderly manner using equipment maintained in first class operating
condition Prior to compacting, ruts in the surface of any layer shall be
filled and leveled.
c. Each layer of backfill material shall be so placed as to maintain adequate
drainage and to prevent accumulation of water.
d. Structure backfill shall be placed in uniform layers and shall be brought
up uniformly on all sides of the structure being backfilled. Within 1.5 m of
the sides of a structure, backfill shall be placed in layers not to exceed 150
mm in un-compacted thickness.
e. Each layer shall be spread uniformly, wetted or dried as required, and
rolled with an approved tamping or power roller Compacting equipment
or methods that transmit excessive pressure to the structure shall not be
used.
f. At all times while compacting. vibratory rollers shall be operated within
the manufacturer recommended frequency range for the type of material
being compacted and at the optimum operating frequency.
g. Compaction of unclassified structure backfill by ponding or jetting is not
permitted unless recommended by its Contractor and specifically
approved in advance by the Royal Commission
3.0 1 EXCAVATION:
Excavation is Unclassified, and includes excavation to sub-grade elevations
indicated regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
3.0 2 Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated
sub-grade elevations of dimensions without specific direction of the Client
Representative. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by
the Client Representative, shall be at Contractor's expense.
3.0 3 Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized
excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to
excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill
may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to the
Client Representative.
3.0 4 Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for
authorized excavations of same classification unless otherwise directed by The
Client Representative.
3.0 5 Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required sub-grade
elevations, notify The Client Representative who will make an inspection of
conditions.
3.0 6 If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required sub-grade
elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated materials as
directed by The Client Representative.
3.0 7 Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes
and ordinances having jurisdiction, Shore and brace where sloping is not
possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.
3.0 8 Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion
of backfilling.
3.0 9 Shoning and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet
piling, up rights, stringers and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition.
3.0 10 Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local
codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.0 11 Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period
excavations will be open. Carry down sharing and bracing as excavation
progresses.
3.0 12 Dewatering: Prevent surface water and sub-surface or ground water from
flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
3.0 13 Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent
softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes
detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain
pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering
system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
3.0 14 Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed,
until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper
drainage
3.0 15 Locate and retain soil materials and waste materials as herein specified.
3.0 16 Dispose of excess soil materials and waste materials as herein specified.
3.0 17 Excavation for Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown
within a tolerance of plus or minus 20mm and extending a sufficient distance
from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete
formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.
3.0 18 in excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom
of excavation Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete
reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave
solid base to receive other work.
3.0 19 Excavation for Pavements' Cut Surface under pavements to comply with
cross-sections, elevations and grades as shown.
3.0 20 Excavation for Trenches Dig trenches to the uniform width required for
particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room.
Provide 150mm to 225mm clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
3.0 21 Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches
for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building
perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade.
3.0 22 For pipes or conduit 125mm or less in nominal size and for flat-bottomed
multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths, Hand
excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on
undisturbed soil.
3.0 23 For pipes or conduit 150mm or larger in nominal size and other
mechanical/electrical work Indicated to receive sub-base, excavate to sub-base
depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, to 150mm below the bottom of
work to be supported .
3.0 24 Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water bearing piping
(water and drainage) so top of piping is not less than 0.6m below finished grade.
3.0 25 Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to
provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe.
3.0 26 Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within
450mm of columns or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such
footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of
adjacent footing.
3.0 27 Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and
backfilling authorized by The Client Representative. Use care in backfilling or
avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.
3.0 28 For piping or conduit less that 750mm below surface of roadways, provide
100mm thick concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of piping
or conduit, provide minimum 100mm thick encasement (sides and top) of
concrete prior to backfilling or placement of roadway sub-base.
3.0 29 COMPACTION:
General Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum
percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.
3.0 30 Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less
than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a
well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soils) determined in
accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less than the following percentages of
relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which
will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (Cohesionless soils).
A. Structures, raft foundation, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements:
Compact top 300mm of sub-grade and each layer of backfill or fill material
at 90% maximum density for cohesive material or 95% relative density for
cohesion less material
B. Lawn agricultural or unpaved Areas:
at 85% maximum density for cohesive soils and 90% relative density for
cohesion less soils.
C. Walkways:
at 90% maximum density for cohesive material or 95% relative density for
cohesion less material.
3.0 31 Moisture Control: Where sub-grade or layer of soil material must be
moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of
sub-grade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface
during or subsequent to compaction operations.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit
compaction to specified density.
3.0 32 BACKFILL AND FILL:
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required sub-grade
elevations, for each area classification listed below.
A. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
B. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
C. Under walks and pavements, use sub-base material, or satisfactory

excavated or borrow material, or combination of both.
D. Under building slabs and steps, use sub-base material.
E. Under piping and conduit, use sub-base material where sub-base is

indicated under piping or conduit; shape to fit bottom of cylinder.
3.0 33 Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion
of the following:
A. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where
applicable, damp- proofing, water-proofing, and perimeter insulation.
B. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground
utilities.
C. Removal of concrete formwork.
D. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory
materials.Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of
structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure
or utilities, or leave in place if required.
E. Removal of trash and debris.
F. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally
supported walls.
3.0 34 Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil
materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to
placement of fills. When existing ground surface has a density less than that
specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground
surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and
compact to require depth and percentage of maximum density
3.0 35 Placement and Compaction Place backfill and fill materials in layers not
more than 200mm in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction
equipment, and not more that 100mm in loose depth for material compacted
by hand-operated tampers
3.0 36 Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide
optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of
maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not
place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy.
3.0 37 Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping or
conduit to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill
against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material
uniformly around structure, piping or conduit to approximately same elevation
in each lift.
3.0 38 GRADING:
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section,
including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified
tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where
elevations are indicated, or between such points and existing grades.
3.0 39 Grading outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to
drain away from structures and to prevent ponding.
3.0 40 Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:
A. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive top soil to within not more
that 25mm above or below required sub-grade elevations.
B. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-
section, with finish surface not more that 25mm above or below required
sub-grade elevation.
C. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and

cross section, with finish surface not more that 10mm above or below
required sub-grade elevation.
3.0 41 Grading Surface of Fill under building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of
voids, compacted as specified, and to require elevation. Provide final grades
within a tolerance of 10mm when tested with a 3m straight edge.
3.0 42 Compaction: After grading, compact sub-grade surfaces to the depth and
indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for area classification.
3.0 43 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE COURSE:
General: Sub-base course consists of placing sub-base material, in layers of
specified thickness, over sub-grade surface to support a pavement base course
3.0 44 Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including
crown and cross-slope of sub-base course.
3.0 45 Shoulders' Place shoulders along edges of sub-base course to prevent lateral
movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such
quantity to compact to thickness of each sub-base course layer. Compact and
roll at least a 300mm) width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and
rolling of each layer of sub-base course.
3.0 46 Placing: Place sub-base course material on prepared sub-grade in layers of
uniform thickness, conforming to indicate cross-section and thickness. Maintain
optimum moisture content for compacting sub-base material during placement
operations.
3.0 47 When compacted sub-base course is shown to be 150mm thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When shown to be more that 150mm thick, place
material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 150mm or less than
75mm in thickness when compacted.
3.0 48 BUILDING SLAB SUB-BASE COURSE:
General: Sub-base course consists of placement of sub-base material in layers

of indicated thickness, over sub-grade surface to support concrete building
slabs.
3.0 49 Placing: Place sub-base material on prepared sub-grade in layers of uniform
thickness conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain
optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement
operations.
3.0 50 When a compacted sub-base course is shown to be 150mm thick or less
place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 150mm thick,
place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 150mm or less
than 75mm in thickness when compacted.
3.0 51 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Quality Control Testing during Construction: Allow testing services to inspect

and approve sub-grades and fill layers before further construction work is
performed.
3.0 52 Perform Field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone
method) or ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), as applicable.
A. Footing Sub-grade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed,
conduct at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities.
Subsequent verfication and approval of each footing sub-grade may be
based on a visual comparison of each sub-grade with related tested strata,
when acceptable to The Client Representative.
B. Paved Areas and Building Slab sub-grade: Make at least one field density test
of subgrade for each 2008q.m of paved area or building slab, but in no case
less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for
every 2008q.m of over-laying building slab or paved area, but in no case less
than 3 tests.
C. Foundation Wall Backfilt: "Take at least 2 field density tests, at locations and
elevations as directed.
If in opinion of The Client Representative, based on testing service reports
and inspection, sub-grade or fills which have been placed are below specified
density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense
3.0 53 MAINTENANCE:
Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and
corrosion Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and re-establish grades in
settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
3.0 54 Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are
disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify
surface, re-shape and compact to required density prior to further construction.
3.0 55 Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas
during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or
other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match
adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent
possible.
3.0 56 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS:
Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris and waste materials and
dispose of it off Owner's as approved by the Client representative.
0202 BOUNDARY WALL
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
"This Section covers the material and construction requirements for
concrete masonry boundary walls to the heights and locations shown on the
Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORKS IN OTHER SECTION:
1. See Section 0302 - Cast in place concrete.
2. See Section 0402 - Concrete unit masonry.
3. See Section 0501 - Steel rectangular hollow sections and small

sections structural steel.
4. See Section 0701 - Waterproofing and damp proofing vapour

barrier for slabs.
5. See Section 0707 - Concrete Waterproofing.
6. See Section 0901 - Solid plaster rendering stucco.
=== END OF SECTION ===

0203 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE AND AGGREGATE BASE
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
This Section covers the furnishing spreading and compacting of sub-base
and road base for making good to existing road pavement construction
where indicated on the Contrac Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
Section 0102 Quality Control.
Section 0202 Earthworks, Compaction and Testing of Earthwork.
1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:
The codes and standards which are generally appli cable to the Work of the
Section are listed hereinafter.
A. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials.
T-193 The California Bearing ratio (as modified by ASTM D 1983).
B. ASTM American Society For Testing & Materials
C. 131 Resistance to Abrasion of Small size Coarse Aggregate by Use of the
Los Angeles Machine. Test for,
C-136 Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
D-422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
0-423 Liquid Limit of Soils, Test for,
D-424 Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils, Test for,
D-1140 Amount of Material in Soils finer than the No. 200 (75 micron)
Sieve, Test for,
D-1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using 10 lb. (4.5kg) Rammer
and 18 inch (457 mm) Drop. Test for
D-1883 Bearing Ratio of Laboratory-Compacted Soils, Test for,
D-2217 Wet Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle-Size Analysis and
Determination of Soil constants.
D-2844 Resistance R-Value and Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils,
Test for,
D-2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Site Radiology
(Shallow Depth) Tests for.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all work and material
to be used in the Work and shall propose a prograrn for inspection and
testing, such as to achieve the specified quality, in accordance with
Section 0102, "QUALITY CONTROL".
The Contractor shall have all necessary tests performed and submit its
findings in a report form to the Client Representative for review and
approval prior to the transportation of materials to the site.
B. The Contractor shall perform all specified testing on the existing subgrade
and on the subbase and roadbase materials placed under this Contract.
The test results for each type of material and the Contractors
recommendations shall be submitted in a report form to the Client
Representative for review.
Approval by the Client Representative of each report will be required
prior to proceeding with the construction of a subsequent material.
0203 RAVEMENT SUB- BASE AND AGGREGATE BASE
PART II - MATERIALS:
A. General:
All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be procured,
when available from an in-Kingdom manufacturer. Procurement of all goods
and products manufactured out-of-Kingdom must be approved by the Client
Representative.
B. Gradation Requirements:
Subbase material shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 422 and D-
2217 and grading shall be within the limits as shown in Table 2.01B.
The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with this Subsection before
the material to site.
TABLE 2.01B - SUBBASE GRADING LIMITATIONS:
Sieve size % Passing, By Weight
75mm 100
50mm 90-10
4.75mm 35-75
75 micron 0-15
C. Classification and Performance Requirements:

Shall be in accordance with Table 2.010. Soaked CBR testing is an alternative
for use only with Client Representative's written approval.
TABLE 2.01C FURTHER REQUIREMENTS:
Parameter ASTM Ref. Frequency of

Limit Testing
D-4318 Daily
Liquid Limit 25 Max
D-4318 Daily
Plasticity Index 6 Max
Soaked CBR (@ D-1883 As Approved
25 min
95% relative
compaction
and20 lbs.
surcharge)
Abrasion Loss C131 As Approved

50 Max
R-Value (@ 300 Weekly

D-2844 40 Min
psi exudation
pressure)
The Contractor shall test more frequently as necessary to properly control quality
and as required by the Client Representative.
2.02 ROADBASE:
A. Roadbase shall be a mixture of crushed gravel and sand with natural sand
and filler suitable binding quality blended such that it can be readily
compacted at optimum moistu conditions to form a firm and stable
pavement course.
B. Gradation Requirements:
Road base material when tested in accordance with ASTM D-2217 and
ASTM C-136, she be within the limits shown in Table 2.02B.
Additionally, not less than 10% shall be retained between each pair of
successive sie sizes as specified in Table2.02C, excluding the largest pair.
The Contractor is permitted reduce the percentage larger than 37.5mm
to zero if level control or segregation problematic and as approved by the
Client Representative. The Contractor sh demonstrate compliance with
this subsection before delivery of the material to site.
TABLE 2.02B - ROADBASE GRADING LIMITATIONS:
%Passing by Weight
Selve Size
Mix Design Plant Mix Tolerance
63 mm 100 Nil
37.5 mm 90-100 +6%
19mm 50-80 +8%
9.5mm 40-70 +8%
4.75mm 30-60 +7%
600micron 10-25 +5%
75micron 3-10 +3%
C. Classification and Performance Requirements shall be in accordance with

Table 2.03C.Soaked CBR testing is an alternative for use only with Client
Representative written approval.
TABLE 2.03 C FURTHER REQUIREMENTS:
Parameter ASTM Ref. Frequency of

Limit Testing
D-4318 25 Max Daily
Liquid Limit
D-4318 Daily
Plasticity Index 4 Max
Soaked CBR (@ D-1883 As Approved

50 min
95% relative
compaction
and20 lbs.
surcharge)
Abrasion Loss C131 Weekly

45 Max
R-Value (@ 300 Weekly

D-2844 60 Min
psi exudation
pressure)
The Contractor shall test more frequently as necessary to properly control quality
and as required by the Client Representative.
D. Mix Design, Shall be demonstrated as meeting all requirements of this
specification and shall be approved by the Client Representative based on
the Contractors report and recommendation before roadbase is laid in
the permanent work. Plant mix tolerance shall then apply Roadbase
mixtures outside any of the plant mix tolerances shall be deemed to meet
this specification when encompassed by the approved mix design that
meets the specified requirements for grading, plasticity, abrasion loss and
R. Value (Soaked CBR).
0203 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE AND AGGREGATE BASE
PART III - EXECUTION:

3.0 1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION:
Subgrade preparation shall be carried out as specified in the Section 0201
EARTHWORKS. The Contractor shall check and ensure that the subgrade
conforms with the specified requirements in respect to stability and
elevations before placing subbase material thereon.
3.0 2 PRODUCTION OF SUBBASE AND ROADBASE MATERIAL:

A. Subbase and Roadbase material shall be blended to meet the
requirements specified in Part Il of this section. The subbase and roadbase
material shall be watered such that the material is in an optimum
moisture condition at the time of compaction. Individual sizes of material
shall be blended by a mixing plant comprising feed hoppers, conveyors
and pug mill as necessary to meet grading requirements. Stabilization
media may be used as recommended by the Contractor and approved by
the Client Representative.
3.0 3 SUBBASE AND ROADBASE CONSTRUCTION:

A. The Contractor shall deliver both the subbase and roadbase material as
uniform mixtures at the optimum moisture condition for laying. spreading
and compaction. Material shall be tested for gradation at least twice daily.
All material shall be placed and spread evenly with moisture content
checks being conducted every two hours. Spreading shall be undertaken
concurrently with delivery or without delay Roadbase material shall be
spread using an electronically controlled mechanical spreader.
B. In all cases the material shall be compacted in layers not exceeding
150mm compacted thickness. This limit may be exceeded only when the
Contractor's compaction operation is demonstrated to be adequate and
acceptable to the Client Representative.
C. All segregated or otherwise defective areas shall be removed to the full
thickness of the layer and relaid with new material.
3.0 4 COMPACTION, TESTING AND GRADE TOLERANCE:
A. Compaction The subbase and roadbase shall be compacted within one
percent of the optimum moisture condition to a relative compaction of at
least 95% of the maximum laboratory ASTM D-1557, method D, density. One
result from twenty consecutive field density determinations may fall below
this relative compaction value.
B. Frequency of Testing. One laboratory density test shall be conducted for
every ten field density determinations or more frequently as required by
apparent change or a change in source or process. Field density
determinations shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D-1556; or
ASTM D-2922 as calibrated against the former method. Each 5000m of
subbase and of roadbase shall be represented by 10 field density
determinations evenly distributed over the whole area. Every field density
result shall indicate the depth of layer at each test location.
C. Grade Tolerance: All subbase material shall be laid within 30mm below and
never above the elevations as shown and interpolated from the Contract
Drawings. All roadbase material shall be laid within 20mm below and never
above the elevations as shown and interpolated from the Contract Drawings.
Compliance with these tolerances shall be recorded by the Contractor's
survey to the satisfaction of the Client Representative before proceeding
with the next layer.
D. Subbase or roadbase which does not comply with the requirements of this
subsection shall be re-shaped, or re-worked and thoroughly re-compacted
to conform to this Specification
0204 UNDERGROUND PIPING AND SITE UTILITY PITS
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.01 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Work under this Section includes but is not necessarily limited to all pipe
work, manholes, valve boxes, clean outs, trenches for utilities and all
required work for the connection to the City system to bring every system
into satisfactory operational condition,
1.02 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. All pipe products, valves conduits fittings and accessories shall be
delivered in manufacturer's original, protective packaging. Full
consideration shall be given to protection of all flange and valve faces and
pipe ends before and during installation,
1. Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily
basis including corrective actions taken by the Contractor, if necessary.
2. Reports and records shall be made available for assessment to the
client/RC not later than 3 days after testing and checking.
3. Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner
to ensure traceability.
4. Arrangements shall be made in the Contractor's work schedule and
time allowed for checking and testing as indicated.
2.01 MATERIALS:
General:
A. All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be
procured from an in Kingdom manufacturer when available
(manufacturer: NEPRO or approval equal).
B. All pipes shall be of pressure class and diameters as shown on the
drawings and all cables and conduits shall be of size shown on the
drawings
2.02 Water Pipe and Fittings:
PPR Type 3, Sch. 80, Din 8062 & ISO 161/1 Class 5.
2.03 Sanitary Sewer plpe and Fittings:
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) SASO-14 & 15, Sch. 40, Din 8062 & ISO 161/1,
with elastomeric ring joints.
2.04 Gate valves shall conform to ANSI / AWWA C500, solid wedge disc,
non-rising stem, for underground service, pressure rated to 14kgim. end
connection shall be compatible with the pipe joints selected.
2.05 Valve boxes shall be precast or cat in-situ concrete with cast iron cover
and frame.
2.06 Manhole covers shall be Gray Iron confirming to ASTM A48M, Class
25B.
2.07 Underground Electrical Conduits:
A. These conduits should be uPVC schedule 40 and sizes as shown in the

electrical drawings. On the path of cable markers are to be places for
identification.
B. All Saudi Electricity Company - Eastern operating area (SEC-EOA) direct

interface work, shall be done with SEC - EOA prior approval and in
strict accordance with SEC-EOA standards.
C. Low voltage power cables shall be installed in underground conduits
as specified in the drawings.
D. The minimum burial depths to the top of electrical conduits shall be as

specified in articles 300 and 310 of NEC.
E. Upon completion of installation and prior to final acceptance, each

component of every system shall be tested to the satisfaction of the
customer and/ or his representative.
F. The contractor shall provide all test instruments, equipment and

accessories necessary for demonstration and putting the equipment
into operation before commissioning. All testing equipment shall be
calibrated by approved authorities.
G. Special care shall be taken during field testing including the safety of
personnel and test apparatus, wiresi cables and their accessories from
injuries and damages.
PART III – EXECUTION:
3.01 Water Pipe Installation:
A. Water pipe shall be installed to the design lines and grades and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Water lines shall not cross below sanitary sewer lines. Vertical
clearances shall be minimum 600mm. All water line joints shall be at
least 1.0m away from the Sewer line and water pipe shall be cut as
necessary to provide this clearance. Water lines shall not parallel
sanitary sewers with less than 3m horizontal spacing. All pipe ends
shall be capped and protected until ready for final connections The
pipe separation to be follow as per Royal commission plumbing code
standards or approval equal.
C. PPR Type 3 water pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM

D2774 and applicable portions of ASTM D2321.
D. Concrete thrust blocks shall be placed at all changes of alignment and
shall be as per detail drawing.
E. The water system shall include isolating and air relief valves as
required.
3.02 Sanitary Sewer Pipe Installation:

A. PVC sewer pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D2321.
B. Drain pipe slope shall not be less than 2%.
C. Sanitary sewer piping shall be encased in minimum of 150mm of
concrete when laid under the building foundation slabs or roads.
D. Cleanouts, manhole, chambers, gullies and marker shall be provided
as shown on drawings.
3.03 Pipe Separation:

A. Vertical Separation:
1. Forced Sewer Mains:
a. Waterlines shall always cross above forced sewer mains and shall
be installed at least 600 mm above the sewer. The sewer line shall
have no joint within 1 m of the waterline unless it is encased in
concrete for a distance of at least 3 m each side of the crossing.
2. Gravity sewers:
a. Where waterlines cross under or above gravity-flow sewer lines,
the sewer pipe shall be fully encased in concrete for a distance of
at least 3 m each side of the crossing or shall be made of pressure
pipe with no joint located within 1 m horizontally from the
waterline.
b. A minimum vertical distance of 500 mm shall always be kept
between the outside diameter of the water main and the outside
of the sewer regardless of the location of the water main, whether
above or below the sewer.
B. Horizontal Separation:
1. A minimum horizontal separation of 3 m shall be maintained between
potable water supply lines and sewer lines, except when bottom of
water pipe is at least 500 mm above the top of the sewer pipe, in
which case a 2 m minimum horizontal spacing will be permitted.
2. Water lines under the building shall be at least 300 mm (12 in.) above
the top of the drainage or waste water line or appurtenance and be
placed on a solid shelf excavated at one side of the trench.
3.04 Encasement of underground pipes:
Underground pipes shall be designed to provide a minimum of 1.2 m earth

cover over the pipes where this cover cannot be achieved; pipes shall be
encased in concrete.
3.05 Testing:
A. Water Pipe:
All piping systems shall be field tested hydrostatically at 10 Bars pressure for
leakage in the presence of the authorizing inspector before backfilling is
done all to the client approval.
B. Sewage Pipe: The Sewer pipe shall be tested in sections as approved. Pipe
below ground water level shall be tested by measuring infiltration. Pipe
above ground water level shall be tested by measuring leakage The
section to be tested shall be filled with water up to the maximum head
available as controlled by manhole or cleanout, but not less than 3
meters. Leakage shall be measured by the amount of water required to
keep the test section full under the specified head for twenty four hours,
after a presoak period of 4 hours.
3.06 DISINFECTION:
When the entire water system, including valves, fittings and allied work has
been installed and tested, it shall be disinfected by the procedures of AWWA
C651. After final flushing and before the system is placed in service, water
samples shall be collected from the system at approved sources and tested
for bacteriological quality in accordance with Section 9 of AWWA C651. If the
initial samples fail to meet the requirements, disinfection of the system shall
be repeated until satisfactory samples are obtained.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION:
All manholes, valve boxes, pits etc, shall have approved identification
markings.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION TAPES:
For all underground utilities approved plastic identification tapes should be

laid at a depth of 300mm below finished grade elevation during backfilling.
0205 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TERMITE CONTOROL
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DOCUMENTS INCLUDES:

A. Pre-construction subterranean Termite Control & Treatment System.
B. Horizontal & Vertical barriers to footings, trenches, floor slabs, carports,
etc.
1.0 2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Documents 0201 - Earthwork
B. Documents 0204 - Underground Piping and Site Utility Pits
C. Documents 0302 - Cast-in-Place & Pre-cast Concrete
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit for review and approval to Client the following items before
procurement:
1. All manufacturer's test reports as well as certificate of compliance to
the specification, reference codes and standards.
2. Sample of materials.
3. Complete catalog data for all Termiticides and equipment required.
4. Shop drawings as required for effective placement of treatment on all
horizontal & vertical areas.
0205 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TERMITE CONTROL
2.01 TERMITICIDE MATERIAL:

A. Commercial Termiticide, Permethrin Dragnet FT or any other equivalent
Termiticide with Pyrethroid active ingredient, to meet U.S. Urban
Department and Property Standards.
2.02 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. State special packing and shipping requirements.
B. State special measures needed to prevent damage prior to installation.
C. Materials shall be properly protected and packaged during shipment.
D. Materials shall be properly stored at site and marked Hazardous area,
which shall be an established adequate protected storage area. Proper
and adequate control and caution should be taken for any environmental
risks and all water lines isolated and protected.
0205 PRE-CONSTRUCTION TERMITE CONTROL
3.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE TREATMENT:
The use of the product prevents and controls termite infestations in and
around structures and constructions.
To meet the criteria, procedure and execution has been given for permethrin
Dragent FT. for any other termiticide, proper execution procedure per
manufacturer's recommendations should be got approved before execution.
Effective pre-construction subterranean termite control is achieved by the

establishment of vertical and/or horizontal insecticidal barriers using 0 5%,
1.0% emulsion of Dragnet FT. to meet lermite proofing requirements follow
the procedures in the latest edition of the Housing and Urban Development
Minimum Property Standards (refer to U.S.D.A home and Garden Bulletin No
64).
Horizontal Barriers: create a horizontal barrier wherever treated soil will be

covered, such as footing trenches, slab floors, carports, and the soil beneath
stairs and crawlspaces.
To produce a horizontal insecticide barrier, apply the emulsion at the rate of

1 gallon per 10 square feet to fill soil. If fill is washed gravel or other coarse
material, apply at 1.5 gallons of emulsion per 10 square feet, so that the
emulsion will reach the soil beneath the fill.
Applications shall be made by a low pressure spray (less than 50p.s.i.) using
a coarse spray nozzle. If slab will not be poured the same day as treatment,
cover treated soil with a water-proof barrier such as polyethylene sheeting.
This is not necessary if foundation walls have been installed around the
treated soil.
Vertical Barriers: vertical barriers should be established in areas such as

around the base of foundations, plumbing, utility entrances, back filled soil
against foundation walls and other critical areas.
To produce a vertical barrier in soil, apply the emulsion at a rate of 4 gallons

of emulsion per 10 linear feet per foot of depth. Distribute the treatment as
evenly as possible
a. When rodding or trenching. It is important that emulsion reaches the
top of the footing, Rod Holes should be spaced to provide a continuous
insecticidal barrier.
b. Care should be taken to avoid soil wash-out around the footing.
c. Trenches need not be wider than 6 inches. Emulsion should be mixed
with the soil as it is being replaced in the trench.
d. For a monolithic slab, an inside vertical barrier may not be required
Hollow block voids may be treated at a rate of 2 gallons of emulsion
per 10 linear feet, so that the emulsion will reach the top of the
footing.
3.02 CLEANING AFTER INSTALLATION:
Apply manufacturer's required cleaning methods, as specified and approved

under Section 1.03, submittals.
3.03 TESTING:
Required tests shall be done as specified and approved under Section 1.03,
submittals.
0206 INTERLOCK CONCRETE PAVER BLOCK
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. The work includes ground preparation which require cutting or filling and
compaction to the lines and grades shown on the drawings and approval
by the Client Representative. Placing of pavers shall be on mortar setting
bed over reinforced concrete slab on compacted ground.
1.0 2 RELATED SECTIONSL:

a. Section 0201 Backfilling.
b. Section 0301 Concrete Reinforcement.
c. Section 0302 Cast-in Place Concrete.
1.0 3 REFERENCES:
A. SASO SSA 224 Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete.
B. SASO SSA 2 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions specified in the Client Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings Indicate layout of interlock concrete paver block,
dimensions of paved areas, elevations, and effected adjacent
construction.
C. Product Data: Provide characteristics of paver unit, dimensions, and
special shapes.
D. Samples Submit two samples of each paver size, illustrating style, size,
color range and Surface texture of units being provided for Client
approval prior to ordering product.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions :Indicate substrate requirements
and .installation methods.
2.01 PAVER MATERIALS:
A. Interlock Concrete Paver block. Pavers with shape and color subject to the
approval of Client representative.
B. Recycled Content of Products: Provide products with an average recycled
content so postconsumer recycled content plus on-half of preconsumer
recycled content in not less than 30 percent.
C. Regional Materials: Provide materials that are extracted, processed and
manufactured within 500 miles/800km from the project site.
2.02 BEDDING:
A. Mortar setting bed type specified in section 0400.
B. Reinforced concrete cast-in-place type as specified in section 0301.
3.01 EXAMINATION:
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 0201-Earthwork.
B. Verify that substrate is level, smooth, capable of supporting pavers and
mortar and concrete bedding imposed loads, and ready to receive work
of this Section.
C. Verify gradients and final elevations including substrate base are correct
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. The sub grade or select fill shall be shaped to lines, grades and sections
and compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density as per
ASTM D-1557.
B. After the sugared or select fill preparation had been completed, with all
the curbs and forms already set to the lines and elevations as shown on
the drawings and has been approved by the Client Representative, the
area is now ready to receive the cast-in-place reinforced concrete slab
bedding.
C. Interlock /Mosaic tile pavers shall be laid on a 2.0 cm thick (minimum)
mortar setting bed above reinforced concrete slab. The pavers finish
surface levels shall be as specified on the drawings
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Contractor shall prepare shop/layout drawings for all the pavers & submit
to Client for approval prior to any installation/ordering materials.
B. Contractor shall prepare moke-up of all types & shapes of pavers on site.
No work shall proceed on site without getting Client approval of moke-up
& samples.
C. The surface will be tested with a four meter straight edge at any selected
locations The variation of the surface shall at no point exceed four (4)
millimeters between two contacts of straight edge with the paver's
surface.
D. All humps and depressions exceeding the tolerance shall be Corrected to
the satisfaction of the Client Representative.
3.04 APPEARANCE:
A. Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Client
Representative and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. All
humps and depressions exceeding the tolerance shall be removed and
replaced.
0207 CURBS
PART 1 GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. This Section covers the furnishing and installation of curbs at the locations
and to the lines, grades, details and dimensions as shown on the Contract
Drawings and approval by Client Representative.
B. The Contractor shall provide all material, labor, tools, equipment and
other incidentals as required to complete the work in accordance with
the Contract Requirements.
1.0 2 REFERENCES:
A. The referred codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable
level of quality for materials, products and workmanship. In case of
conflict between these standards and the text of this Specification, the
Specification text shall govern.
B. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used
wherever applicable. In case of conflict, the Contractor shall propose
equipment, materials and processes conforming to one group of codes
and standards.
C. The codes and standards generally applicable to the work.
D. MOT - Ministry of Transportation, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit under provisions specified in the Client Contract Documents.
B. Shop Drawings Indicate dimensions of curbs, elevations, and effected
adjacent construction.
C. Product Data: Provide characteristics of curbs unit, dimensions, and
special shapes.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of each curb size, illustrating style, size, And
color range, for Client approval prior to ordering product.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. Indicate substrate requirements
and installation methods
1.0 4 QUALITY CONTROL:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and shall
develop and propose programs and methods of construction and testing
such as to achieve the specified quality to the approval of the client in
accordance with standards.
B. Quality control shall conform to the referenced Sections for concrete
work and joint filers.
C. Quality control procedures shall comply with the local governing
regulations regarding precast curbs, if they are more stringent than
specified herein.
A. Curbs with shape and color subject to the approval of Client
representative:
Curb outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth of the curb.
The inside form of curb shall have batter and shall be securely fastened
to and supported by the outside form.
Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders or thin
plank forms may be used for curb returns with radius specified on plans,
where grade changes occur in the return, or where the central angle is
such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees cannot be used.
Back forms for curb returns may be made of 38 mm (1% inch) benders,
for the full height of the curb, cleated together.
B. Curb Granular Base:
The Granular Base shall be the same material as the aggregate base
course of the asphalt road pavement extended 100 mm at the concrete
base of the curb as shown on details.
3.05 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION:
A. Verity base conditions under provisions of the Client Contract
Documents.
B. Verity base had been completed, inspected, tested and accepted.
C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct as per approved
drawings.
D. Notify Client Representative, a minimum of 24 hours prior to commence
concreting operation.
3.02 CURB CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING:
A. Formed Curb:
Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift.
Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators.
B. Concrete Finishing:
Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float
until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces
shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes The
top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging tool to a radius of 13 mm
(V2 inch) Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the
curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water
until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. The
front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner
as the curb top.
C. Joint Finishing:
Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.
D. Surface and Thickness Tolerances:
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 6.4 mm from the testing edge
of a 3.05 m straight edge.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
The Contractor shall perform the inspection and tests described and meet
specified the requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing.
3.04 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS:

A. Thickness Deficiency:
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is
deficient in thickness by more than 6 mm (4 inch) the deficient section
shall be removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.
B. High Areas:
In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements,
high areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete
with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36
hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface
grinding machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area
corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened concrete shall not
exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab, and the depth of
grinding shall not exceed 6 mm (inch). All pavement areas requiring grade
or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above
shall be removed and replaced.
C. Appearance:
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Client
Representative and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified.
Areas which exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or
which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the
work shall be removed and replaced
0208 LANDSCAPE:
NOTE: Work in this Section includes, but is not limited to the preparation of
landscaped areas with 100mm thick imported fill material and 250mm thick
Agricultural soil (sweet sail) or approval equal, as per drawing details with
approval by Client Representative.
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Contractor shall submit details of the preparation of landscaped
areas with furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to
complete and maintain the work as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Work to be performed and supervised at all times by qualified personnel.
1.0 2 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE:

A. Before delivery of the planting soil mix, the Contractor shall furnish
written statements giving the location from which constituents of the soil
mix are to be obtained, together with a laboratory analysis of each
constituent.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit all certificates of inspection required by
Government Authorities. He shall submit manufacturers or suppliers
certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials together
with other data substantiating that materials comply with the specified
requirernents.
B. The Contractor shall furnish for approval, planting medium and soils
suitability analyses from an approved independent testing laboratory in a
format approved by and at intervals as set forth herein. Soils analyses
shall include testing laboratory recommendations for soil amendments
on receipt of which the soil mix shall if necessary be revised accordingly.
C. The Contractor shall submit, not less than fourteen (14) days prior to
installation, samples of materials for approval For standard products the
manufacturer's analyses will be acceptable. For all other materials,
analyses shall be by a recognized laboratory. The following shall be
submitted for approval
1. Samples of sand, vermiculite, sphagnum peat moss, and fertilizers.
2. Samples of soil mixes.
2.0 1 SOIL MATERIALS:
A. Sand for soil mixes shall be obtained from approved borrow sources.
It shall conform to the following physical and chemical characteristics.
1. Physical Characteristic:
Material passing a No. 10 sieve : 100%
Material passing a No. 35 sieve : 90 - 100%
Material passing a No. 140 sieve: 0-10%
Material passing a No. 270 sieve: 0-3%
2. Chemical Characteristics:
Salinity (ECe x 10) : less than 2
SAR (Sodium Absorption Ration) : less than 1
Boron (saturation extract):less than 0.5 ppm
Рн: less than 8.5
B. Soil organic amendment shall be sphagnum moss with the following
chemical and physical characteristics:
1. Physical Characteristics:
Bulk Density : 60-80 g/L (dry)

Moisture content : 40 - 50%
Moisture holding capacity: 40-55% by volume
2. Chemical Characteristics:
Organic Matter :95 - 98% weight
pH :35 - 4.5
Total Nitrogen :0.9 -2.0% weight (dry)
Ash :1-3% by weight
Exchange capacity : 100 - 150 mval/100g
organic matter (dry)
C. The Contractor shall provide fertilizers as indicated below for soil
mixes:
1. Soil Mixes:
A. For outside use.
1. Single superphosphate, Ca(H2PO2)-HO with guaranteed
analysis of 20% P205 (0-20-0) granular form.
2. Potassium nitrite, KNO with guaranteed analysis of 13%
Nitrogen and 44% K20. (13-0 44), powder form.
3. Soil sulphur, S, 99% sulphur content with 100% passing a 16
mesh screen and 50% passing a 100 mesh screen.
4. Dolomite, CaCO3MgCO3, with 100% calcium carbonate
equivalency Kasiser AG-65 or approved equal
B. For indoor use.
1. 25% sand, 25% peat moss, 25% potting sail 25% vermiculite.
2. Tree and Shrub Pits.
Slow release fertilizer tablets weighing 21 grams each, shall
be provided. tightly compressed, long lasting (two years
continuous), and with guaranteed analysis of (20-10-5) plus
Fe, Mn, Zn in chelated form.
3. The Contractor shall furnish a certificate of compliance
stating that materials delivered meet the Specification.
C. Soil Amendments.
1. Expanded horticultural vermiculite shall be grade No. 3 and
shali meet the following requirements:
a. Color-Brown
i. Water retention % by weight-530 00.
ii. Bulk density - 80.1 to 1442 kg/m3.
iii. Particle size range - 0.1 to 2.4mm air porosity % -24 to
44.
iv. Caution exchange capacity (me/100g)-approx 75.
b. Extractable concentrations of Nutrients from vermiculite
in (ppm).
P Soluble Salts Mmhos/cm NO3 NH4 P K Ca Mg Fe 6 0.03
0 0 0.10 3.99 0.65 0.71 0.27
2. Provide other amendments as required by the soil test
analysis.
D. Depth of Soil.
The depth of soil will be as follows: Lawn & Ground cover =30
cm.
Shrubs & Succulent =80cm.
Trees = 120-150cm.
Date Palm = 200-250cm.
2.0 2 INSPECTION:
A. The Client representative has the right to reject unsatisfactory or
defective material at any time during the progress of the work.
2.0 3 PREPARATION OF SOIL MIXES:
A. The soil mixes shall be in the quantities or proportions as indicated
below according to the procedures outlined and amended as
necessary by any required soil analysis
1. Soil Mix-A (Date palmi Trees/Shrubs/Ground Cover! succulent
Vines) Ingredients:
Sand - 80% by volume
Sphagnum Moss - 10% by volume
Vermiculite - 10% by volume
Single super phosphate - 1 kg/m3
Soil sulphur - 1 kg/m3
2. Soil Mix-B (Pots/Planters) Ingredients:
Sand - 25% by volume
Sphagnum Moss - 50% by volume
Vermiculite - 25% by volume
Single super phosphate - 05 kg/m3
Potassium Nitrate - 0.3 kg/m3
Dolomite - 03 Kgim3
3. Soil-Mix-C(Date Palm Trees/Shrubs/Ground Cover/ Succulent
Vines/Planters)
Red Dune Sand (Khurais) -69% by volume.
Imported Organic Soil -35% by volume
Wadis Soil -5% by volume.
Single superphosphate - 1 kg kg/m3
Soil sulphur - 1 kg/m3.
B. In the event that the soil mixes are above a pH of 7.5 the sand portion
of the mix shall be amended with suitable additives (soil, sulphur,
sulphuric acid, etc.) to bring the resultant soil mixes into the specified
range of 6.5 to 7.5. Such additives shall be added to the sand prior to
addition of the organic amendment or fertilizer. After adding such
additives the sand shall be kept moist for a minimum of 30 days and
then leached with landscape irrigation water to bring the salinity, SAR,
PH and Boron of the resultant mix within the ranges indicated above.
C. Three trial lots of 1m' each for both mixes shall be prepared by the
Contractor prior to the start of full soil mixing operations. Samples of
these trials shall be submitted for analysis as described. The analysis
shall include specific recommendations for changes in the soil mix
formulations. The Contractor shall submit such analysis and
recommendations and shall make adjustments to the Soil mix as
directed by the Client representative after approval the Contractor
may begin the full soilt mixing operations.
3.01 PREPARATION OF PLANTED AREAS:

A. Excavations shall all be as specified in this Section.
B. Where no rock or high water table occurs, only planting soil will be
used to backfill planting pits/bed areas.
C. Areas to be planted with ground cover shall be brought to even
running grades after which they shall be cultivated to a depth of
200mm All weeds, rocks, and other debris shall be removed and be
disposed of as descnbed elsewhere in the Contract.
D. Nitrogen and super phosphate fertilizer (as approved) shall be applied
to all ground cover areas, shrub, vine and tree pits.
3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTERS:

A. Place not less than 100mm layer of drainage material in the bottom of
planters, install permeable membrane fabric and fill with soil Mix-B (as
specified). Place soil mix in lightly compacted layers to an elevation 50
mm below top of planter allowing for natural settlement.
B. Provide dupont typar filter Fabric in the courtyard planters, in order to
separate the planting medium from the drainage stone.
3.03 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION:

A. During landscape the Contractor shall keep pavements, roads and
hardcape clean and the work areas in an orderly condition
DIVISION 3:
CONCRETE:
0301 Concrete Reinforcement.
0302 Concrete Work (Cast In Place & Pre-cast).
0301 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
This section, governs for furnishing, fabrication and placing of all reinforcing
steel bars, welded wire fabrics, including chairs, ties, splicing devices, and
other reinforcing accessories required to complete all types of concrete work
for the projects.
1.0 2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Section 0302 - Concrete Work
1.0 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

a. A 36/ A 36M-04 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A 82-02 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
c. A184/ A 184M-01 Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel
Bar Mats for Concrete.
d. A 185-02 Standard specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Plain, for Concrete.
e. A 2421 A 242M-04 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel.
f. A 307-04 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
g. A 497 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Deformed, for Concrete.
h. A 815M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet- Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
i. A 722/ A 722M- 98(2003) Standard Specification for Uncoated High-
Strength Steel Bars for Prestressing Concrete.
j. A 7671 A 767M-006 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
k. A 7751 A 775M-04a Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel
Reinforcing Bars.
l. A 8841 A 884M-04 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel
Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement.
m. A 9341 A 934M-04 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated
Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
n. A 9927 A 992M-04 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
o. A 996/ A 996M-04 Standard Specification for Rail Steel and Axle-Steel
Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall submit samples and manufacturer's certificates of the

compliance, for Owner/Consultant approval.
Note: Prior to start of work, the contractor shall prepare and submit bar bending
schedule, all in accordance with the relevant cod for approval of the
Consultant.
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Reinforcing steel shall be manufactured by Saudi Iron & steel Company
(Hadeed or approved equal).
B. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A-706 grade
60 with a yield stress 420 N/mm?
C. Welded steel wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A-497 / A-884 with a
minimum yield stress 500 N/mm2.
D. Low relaxation strands for hollow core shall conform to ASTM A-416-80
grade 270.
E. Dowel bars details as shown on the drawing.
F. Bar supports and accessories shall be of galvanised or plastic coated wire
and shall be specifically made for the intended use by proprietary
manufacturers.
1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations.
Use plastic spacers or pre-cast concrete blocks as detailed in below.
2. The supports shall be used in such a manner that thay will not be
exposed or contribute to the discoloration or deterioration of the
concrete.
3. For slabs on grade, use supports with plates at bottom or horizontal
runners where base material will not support chair legs.
4. Over waterproof membranes, use pre-cast concrete chairs to prevent
penetration of the members.
G. Only new materials shall be used and shall be free of loose rust, mill scale,
or coating with reduces bond. They are to be in accordance with the
following codes:
a. A 496-02 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for
Concrete Reinforcement .
b. A 4971 A 497M-02 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete.
c. A 500-03a Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
d. A 500-01 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Searless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
e. A 5721 A 572M-04 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
ColumbiumVanadium Structural Steel.
f. A 588/ A 558M-04 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point to 4-in.
(100-mm) Thick.
g. A 8151 A 615M-04 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plair
Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
h. A 7061 A 706M-04 Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
i. A 7221 A 722M-98(2003) Standard Specification for Uncoated High-
Strength Steel Bars for Prestressing Concrete.
j. A 767/A767M-00b Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
k. A 775/ A 775M-04a Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel
Reinforcing Bars.
l. A 884/A 884M-04 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel
Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement.
m. A 934/ A 934M-04 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated
Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars.
n. A 9921 A 992M-04 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
o. A 9961 A 996M-04 Standard Specification for Rail Steel and Axle-Steel
Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
PART ILL-EXECUTION:
3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:

A. Fabrication:
1. General:
Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and
dimension, with fabrication tolerances complying with CRSI
"Manual of Standard Practice". In case of fabricating errors, do not
rebend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or
weaken the material. In these cases, only new material to be use.
2. Unacceptable Materials:
A. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication
tolerances.
B. Bend or links not indicated on drawings of final shop drawings.
C. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting mill
scale, coating which reduces bond, or other cause.
3. Bending:
Reinforcing steel shall be accurately bent or formed to the
appropriate dimensions.
4. Splices:
A. Lap splices may be provided as necessary except as otherwise
detailed on drawings.
B. Minimum laps unless detailed otherwise to be:
High tensile deformed grade 414 N/mm: Larger of 40 times bar
diameter or 300 mm, whichever is larger.
Welded steel wire fabric, length of overlap between outermost
cross wires of each fabric sheet shall be not less than: Larger of
1 cross-wire spacing + 50 mm or 300 mm.
B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1. Delivery: Deliver reinforcing to the job site free from dirt, loose
scale and rust, paint, oil, or other foreign materials.
2. Storage: Store reinforcing above the surface of the ground on
platforms, skids or other supports, and protect from mechanical
injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to the
weather.
3. Handling. Handle so that reinforcing is not damaged by
crimping, bending, or warping before and during placement.
C. Installation:
Place reinforcing steel in positions indicated on the drawings.
1. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale,
earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond
with concrete.
2. The dimensions shown are to centers of bars, unless
otherwise noted.
3. Hold bars securely in place with tie wires and other means
during placing of concret.
4. Do not tack weld reinforcement.
5. Space steel required distance from forms by approved
galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated
tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or pre-cast
concrete blocks as approved.
a. Pre-cast concrete block shall be a maximum of 50 mm
square by the thickness required for proper
reinforcement clearance from forms. Blocks shall be cast
from the same concrete to be used in the structure but it
may use smaller maximum size aggregate.
6. Use chairs to support all reinforcing steel, except as
otherwise approved.
7. Use heavy bolster to support bottom layer of reinforcing in
all beams.
8. Clean all mortar, mud, dirt etc from reinforcement before
placing concrete.
9. Cover to main reinforcing bars shall be as listed below unless
specifically shown otherwise on the drawings (either for pre-
cast or cast-in-situ):
Foundations : 75 mm exposed to weather nor earth.
Beam & Columns: 50 mm exposed to weather nor earth.

40 mm not exposed to weather.
Slabs (to all reint.) 40 mm exposed to weather nor earth.

: 20 mm not exposed to weather.
Walls (to all reinf.) 40 mm exposed to weather nor earth

20 mm not exposed to weather nor
earth.
Pre-cast Concrete:
Wall Panels: 20 mm exposed to weather nor earth. 20 mm not exposed to

weather nor earth.
Other: 40 mm exposed to weather nor earth. 40 mm not exposed to

weather nor earth.
D. Future Extension:
Exposed reinforcement and inserts which are intended for
bonding with future extensions shall be protected from
corrosion by embedding it into grouted cells of concrete
masonry or into lean concrete (20 N/mm') as shown on the
drawings where applicable.
0302 CONCRETE WORK
PARTI – GENERAL
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. General:
This section covers furnish and install of concrete work (cast-in-situ and
pre-cast) where applicable:
B. Related Works Specified Elsewhere:
1. Section 0102 - Quality Control.
2. Section 0301 - Concrete Reinforcement.
3. Section 0701 - Waterproofing and Damp Proofing, Vapour Barrier for
Slabs.
1. Codes and Standards:
Comply with the provision of following codes, specifications and
standards except as otherwise specified.
a. ACI 117 "Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete
Construction and Material.
b. ASTM C172" Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
C).
c. ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
d. ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures.
e. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
f. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork”.
g. ACI 305 "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting".
h. PCI (Pre-cast & Pre-stressed Concrete) Institute, 4th Edition – 92.
i. PCI Journal & PCI Committee Reports.
j. ASTM C173M" Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the volumetric Method.
2. Workmanship:
a. The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which
does not conform to the specified requirements including strength,
tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as per Consultant
approved repair procedures.
b. Maintain procedures and conditions for quality control which are
equivalent to plant production for precast panels.
3. Tolerances:
1. Erection tolerances/variations:
a. Variations from plumb: 6 mm in any 6096 mm run or storey height:
13 mm total in any 12192 mm or longer run.
b. Variations from level or elevation 6 mm in any 6096 mm run, 13
mm in any 12192 mm run.
c. Variations from theoretical position in plan: plus or minus 6 mm
maximum at any locations.
d. Offsets in alignment of adjacent members at any joint: 1.5 mm in
any 3048 mm run, 6 mm maximum.
2. Allowable Casting Tolerance as per PCI Design Handbook:
LOCATOIN TOLERANCE PRECAST ELMENT KEY
Length + 12 mm 6.7.8.9.03
+ 19mm 3.5 1=Double Tee
+ 25 mm 1.2.4.11.12 2=Sing Tee
Width + 6 mm 1.2.3.5.6.8.9.12 3=Bldg.beam rect&
Ledger
+ 9mm 4 4=l-beam
+ 9mm 11.13 5= Box Beam
Depth + 6mm-3 mm 10 6= Column
+ 6mm 1.2.3.5.6.7.8.9.12 7=Hollow Core Slab
+ 12mm-6 mm 4 =8 Ribbed wall
panel
+ 9mm 11 9= insulated wall
panel
+ 12mm 13 10=Archit wall
panel
Flange of + 6mm-3 mm 1.2.8.10.12 11=Pile
thickness
+ 6mm 3.4.13 12= Joist
Web + 3mm 1.8.10.12 13= step unit
thickness
+ 6mm 2.3
+ 9 mm-6 4
Mm
+ 9 mm 5
Position of + 6mm 1.2.3.4.5.6.8.9.11.12
tendons
+ 3 mm 10
Camber, + 6mm per3 m 1.2.12
variation
from design
+ 19 mm max
+ 3mmper3m
+ 25 mm max 4
+ 19 mm max 3
+ 12 m max 5
Camber,Diff + 6 mm per 3m 1.2.5
erntial
+ 19 mm max 1.2.3.12
+ 16 mm 4
Beaning +3 1.2.3.4.12
plates,
Tipping,
Flushness
4. Concrete Testing Services:

a. Contractor shall employ at his own expense independent testing
laboratory for mix design and testing requirements and the timely
submission of results to the Consultant for review.
b. Materials and installed work may require testing and re-testing, as
directed by the Consultant, at any time during the progress of the
work. Tests to be done at the Contractor's expense, including re-
testing of rejected materials and installed work.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
1. Product Data:
Submit a copy of manufacturer's/suppliers specifications with
application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and
items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures,
patching compounds, Mix design Data, water stops if required, joint
systems, methods statement and any others requested by the
Consultant
2. Laboratory Test Reports:
Submit one copy of laboratory test reports for cast in-situ & pre-cast
concrete materials and mix design test as specified.
3. Method statement and site testing procedures:
The Contractor shall submit to the client the method statement and
site
Testing procedures anf get approval before commencing work.
0302 CONCRETE WORK

2.01 FORM MATERIALS:

A. Forms for exposed finish concrete. Unless otherwise indicated construct
all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-
framed plywood-faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, to
provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest
practical sizes to minimize number of joints.
Provide for material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of
newly-placed concrete without bow or deflections.
B. Forms for unexposed finish concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will
be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other
acceptable material.
C. Form coatings: provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds
that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces and
will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces requiring
bond adhesive.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIAL:

A. Reinforcing Bars ASTM A-615M grade 60 with a yeild stress 414
N/mm2.
B. Steel Wire ASTM A82. plain, cold-drawn, steel.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497/A818, welded steel wire fabric.
D. Low Relaxation Strands: ASTM A-416-80 grade 270.
E. Supports for Reinforcement:
Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs,
concrete spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting and
fastening bars and welded wire fabric in place. Contractor to obtain
Owner/Consultant prior approval on all supporting & tying materials.
1. For slab-on-grade, use supports with sandplates or horizontal
runners where welded base materials will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are
in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot-dip
galvanised, plastic protected, or pre-cast concrete spacers.
3. For pre-cast concrete, use spacers/chairs as per manufacturer’s
recommendations, subject to approval of the Consultant.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS:

A. Grey Cement: ASTM C150, type 1, for all framed slabs above grade and
cast-in/pre-cast concrete elements, from approved local manufactorer or
equal approved.
B. Grey Cement: ASTM C150, type V, for all concrete to be in contact with
earth. Or equal approved.
Use only one brand of cement throughout the project.
C. White Cement ASTM C150, type 1, at all external surfaces of external cast-
in/pre-cast elements, decorative window surrounds elements and
parapet walls.
D. Aggregates: ASTM C33, and as herein specified:
Provide aggregates from a single approved source:
1. All aggregates to comply with ASTM C33 and Royal Commission
international guideline specs.
2. Fine Aggregate: clean, shap, natural sand-free from loam, clay, lumps
or other deleterious substances.
E. Coarse Aggregate clean, un-coated, processed aggregate containing no
clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows:
1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed.
3. Maximum aggregate size: not larger than 1/4 of the narrowest
dimension between sides of forms, 1/3 of the depth of slabs, nor 3/4
of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars.
However 20 mm to be the maximum size in concrete & 10 mm in
grout.
F. Water: clean, fresh, drinkable, to comply with ASTM C-94.
G. Air-entering admixtures to comply with ASTM AC260.
H. Set control admixtures to comply with ASTM C494M as follows:
1. Type A, water reducing.
2. Type B, Water-reducing & retarding.
3. Type C, Accelerating.
4. Type D, Water-reducing and retarding.
5. Type For G, high range water reducers (super plasticizer)
Admixtures containing calcium chloride are not permitted.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:

A. Vapour Barner for slabs-on-grade, and elsewhere as indicated on the
drawings, shall be polyethylene membrane not less than 200 microns.
(Refer to Section 0701).
Membrane - forming curing compound: ASTM C309, type 1, unless other
type acceptable to the Consultant.
B. Expansion Joint Fillers:
Closed cell neoprene joint filler (CN-GF): provide expanded neoprene
complying with ASTM D1056, class SC (oil resistant and medium swell), of
13 kpa to 34 kpa compression deflection (grade SCE 41), except provide
90 kpa to 117 kpa compression deflection (grade SCE 44) wherever filler
is applied under sealant exposed to traffic.
A preformed non-extruding resilient filler saturated with high quality
bituminous materials having preserving characteristics.
C. Joint Sealing Compound (refer to Section 0705).
D. Soil chemical poisoning for termite control (Permethrin Dragnot FT or any
other equivalent termiticide with pyrethroid active ingredient to meet
U.S. Urban Department and Property Standards) to be sprayed under the
entire area building by an approved applicator.
E. Hollow core slab (HCS) shall be pre-cast concrete blocks of approved
design for inclusion in composite concrete slabs as shown on the
drawings.
F. Water Stops: provide flat, dumbbell type or centre bulb type water stops
at construction joints sized to suit joints.
2.05 SLUMP LIMITS:
Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of

placement as follows:
1. Ramps and sloping surfaces: 100 mm (+/-25mm).
2. Reinforced foundation systems: 100mm (+/-25mm).
3. All other concrete including pre-cast concrete: Not less than 25 mm
and not more than 102 mm.
2.06 CONCRETE MIXING:

A. Job site mixing shall not be permitted except when approved by the
concemed authority and Consultant.
B. Ready mix concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94, and as
herein specified.
1. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the
batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the
batch will not be permitted.
2. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting
of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C94 may be
required.
3. When the air temperature is between 29 to 32°C, reduce the mixing
and delivery time from 1% hours to 75 minutes and when air
temperature is over 32°C, reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
Note Contractor to comply with the provisions as stated in ACI 305 for
the hot weather / high wind i and low humidity condition as and when
Required.
2.07 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS (PRE-CAST):

A. Steel plates Structural quality, hot-rolled carbon steel, ASTM A283, grade
C.
B. Steel shapes: ASTM A36.
C. Anchor bolts: ASTM A307, low-carbon steel balts, regular hexagon nuts
and carbon steelwashers.
D. Finish of steel units exposed units galvanized per ASTM A153, others
painted with primer.
E. Accessories: Provide all connector, sockets, anchorage system and other
accessories required for production and installation of precast units and
for support of subsequent construction or finishes. Manufactured by
DEHA, PFIEFER HALFEN or Consultant approved equivalent.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS (PRE-CAST):
A. Built in anchorage: Accurately position built in anchorage devices and
secure to the formwork Locate anchorage devices where they do not
affect the position of main reinforcement or the placing of concrete.
Do not relocate bearing plates in units unless accepted by the pre-cast
concrete supplier.
B. Quality Control: Pre-cast unit manufacturer shall institute quality
control procedures for the manufacture, inspection and testing of pre-
cast units Furnish the Consultant and Contractor with copies of test
reports and/or certification for materials and quality control testing of
pre-cast units.
0302 CONCRETE WORK

3.01 CONCRETE PROPERTIES:
A. Mix design shall be by proportioning in laboratory trial batches obtaining
the required concrete strength in accordance with the requirements of
UBC.
B. Mix design propotions shall be submitted for approval by Consultant
before any order for concrete is made.
C. Machine concrete mixing on site shall be allowed for grouting and
screeding use only and after prior approval from Consultant has been
obtained.
D. Aggregates shall be generally 20 mm maximum size except for grout to
pre-cast joints and reinforced masonry with maximum size of 10 mm.
E. Concrete shall possess the following minimum strenghths:
Note: Cylinder compressive strength to be follow as per in the general not
drawing details.
CONCRETE 28days Minimum Maximum Slump

LOCATION compressive cement free water/
strength content cement ratio
(n/mm2) (kg/m3)
Foundations 30 400 0.40 100mm
Grade slabs,
grade beams,
topping & all
other insitu
concrete not
otherwise
nominated.
Slabs, beams, 30 400 0.400 100mm

wall & all other
insitu concrete
not otherwise
nominated.
Lean concrete 20 300 0.40 125 mm

All pre-cast 35 450 0.40 100mm
concrete
Elements (grey
& white
cement)
Grout to 20 300 4.45 125mm
reinforced
masonry
F. Where the slump is deemed in appropriate for acceptable workability, the

Contractor can recommend dosing with super plasterizer, measured by
truck mounted dispenser, in accordance with the manufacture's
recommendations and subject to the Consultant approval.
3.02 FORMS:
Note: Contractor shall obtain approval of the methods and material proposed for
form works for various type of forms: a) Temporary, b) Permanent, c) Rough and d)
fine form works.
A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical
and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported
by the concrete structure.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or
damage to cast-in place concrete surface and adjacent member.
C. Chamfer exposed corners and edges using wood, metal, PVC or rubber
chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge
joints.
D. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other
sections (plumbing, mechanical and electrical work) using sleeve pipes
etc.
3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT:

A. Clean reinforcement of lose rust and mill scale, earth and other materials
which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
B. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against
displacement by formwork,construction, or concrete placement
operations. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners,
bolsters, spacers, and hangers as required.
C. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for
concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar
supports to hold reinforcement in position during concreting.
D. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable lap adjoining
pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in
adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
3.04 JOINTS:
A. Construction Joints Locate and install construction joints as required, so
as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure.
1. Provide key ways at least 38 mm depth in all construction joints in
walls, slabs and between walls and footings.
2. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement
except as indicated otherwise, continue all reinforcement across
construction joints.
Water Stops: If required, provide water stops in construction joints
as shown on drawings.
Install water stops to form a continuous diaphram in each joint.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:
Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items
required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place,
or pre-cast concrete, use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and
directions provided by supplier of the items to be attached thereto.
3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:

A. Pre-placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete
the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded
or cast-in, thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing
concrete.
B. Co-ordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with
placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no
concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to
cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
D. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final locations to avoid
segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
E. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by handspading, ridding or tamping. Do not use vibrators
to transport concrete inside the forms, insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniform spaced locations not farther than the visible
effectiveness of the machine.
F. Hot Weather Placing:
1. When hot weather condition exists that would seriously impair the
quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with
AC1305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at
time of placement below 32°C. Mixing water may be chilled, or
chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too
hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air
temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
4. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
5. Do not use retarding admixture unless otherwise accepted in mix
design.
3.07 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES:
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are
to receive concrete floor tapping or mortar setting beds for tile and
other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material.
After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 6 mm
in 610 mm. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff
brushes, brooms or rakes.
B. Float Finish: Apply float tinish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to
receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified and
slab surfaces which are to covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are
to be exposed-to view, unless otherwise indicated, and slab surfaces
that are to be covered with thin set ceramic tile, paint or other thin
film finish coating system.
D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior
concrete platforms, steps and ramps and elsewhere indicated.
Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface
by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic
route.
3.08 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:

A. General:
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold
or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant
temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and
proper hardening.
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from
concrete surface after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist
for not less than 72 hours.
2. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and
before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days and
in accordance with AC1301 procedures.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing by moisture,
retaining cover curing, by membrane curing, or by combination thereof,
as therein specified.
C. Provide moisture curing by following methods.
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Continuous water - fog spray.
3. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly
saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet.
4. Using curing compound as approved by Consultant.
3.09 REMOVAL OF FORMS:

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams,
walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after
cumulatively curing for 48 hours after placing concrete, provided
concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal.
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete such as beam soffits, may not
be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design
minimum compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-
cured specimens representative of concrete location or members and
subject to Consultant approval However, for beams & arches of span 6 to
9 metres the form stripping period will be 21 days.
3.010 DEFECTIVE WORK:
Any defective work discovered after form removal to be repaired and

replaced immediately at Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall at all times incorporate methods that will minimise the
cause of requiring future concrete repairs due to construction.
Main causes are surface air voids, sand streaking, peeling and blistering.
Prepackaged cementations repair shall be mixed and used as per
manufacturer's recommendations. Fins shall be neatly removed from
exposed surface.
3.011 PRE-CAST PANELS / MEMBERS:

A. Dimensional Tolerances:
1. Units having dimension smaller or greater than required, and outside
the specified tolerance limits, shall be considered deficient in strength
and subject to additional testing.
2. Pre-cast units having any dimension greater than required will be
rejected if the appearance or function of the structure is adversely
affected. Repair, removal and replacement to be made or rejected
units as required to meet the construction requirements and
conditions.
3. Shall conform to PCI Design Handbook.
B. Installation:
1. Pre-cast units to be installed only after the units achieve design
ultimate compressive strength.
2. While installing pre-cast concrete members plumb, level, and
alignments within the specified limits of erection. Provide temporary
supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and
alignment. Horizontal and vertical joint alignment and also uniform
joint to be maintained as erection progresses.
C. Accessories:
Install clips, hangers and other accessories required for erection of pre-
cast units to supporting members and back up materials.
D. Anchor Units:
In final position by bolting, welding, grouting or as otherwise shown on
drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges and spacers as soon as
possible after anchoring is completed. All metal anchoring, angles, inserts
to be anti-rust/corrosion material.
E. Grouting Connections & Joints:
After pre-cast concrete units have been placed and secured, grout open
space at connection and joints as follows:
a. All exposed joints shall be sealed with approval sealant with ultra violet
resistance characteristics.
b. All Joints shall be treated properly to acceptable finish.
c. Cement (grey) if used to finish may consist of 1 part Portland cement, 2
parts of sand and only enough water properly mixed for hydration.
d. All structural joints shall be hooked together with proper stoel bars.
e. Insert Gaskets:
Insert gaskets or backing rods into joints between units as they are
installed and secured. Make adjustments as required to maintain
accurate face joint dimension.
As welded connections, apply rust-inhibitive coating on damaged areas,
same as shopapplied materials, use galvanizing repair coating an
galvanised surfaces.
F. CONCRETE SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEM:
A. Protective treatment shall be applied to the concrete surface and
repairs in accordance with the following requirements:
1. The concrete surface shall be clean, dry and sound substrate at
moderate temperature and humidity conditions, and in well
ventilated space.
2. All concrete repairs shall be completed and cured prior to
application of surface coating.
3. Surface preparation shall be carried out in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
4. All dust and debris resulting from surface preparation shall be
removed pnor to applying the surface treatment.
5. Mixing and method of application of coating shall be in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendation.
6. Concrete surface protection material:
Concrete surface protection material shall prevent the entry of
water, chloride ions and vapors which are detrimental to concrete
and steel reinforcement. These materials shall:
a. Be compatible with concrete substrate and curing
membrane.
b. Withstand all operating and exposure conditions.
c. Be stable under cyclic wetting and drying conditions.
d. Gain good adhesion to old and refurbished concrete surface.
e. Be strong and flexible to withstand mechanical stresses due
to impact and fatigue.
f. Be resistant to chemical and alkali attack.
3.012 On-Site Concrete Material Testing and Inspection:
a. Verify that the Contractor is following appropriate concreting
practices consistent with any extreme environmental conditions at
the point of placement in the structure as defined below.
b. Inspect concrete upon arrival to verify that the proper concrete mix
number, type of concrete, and concrete strength is being placed at
the proper location.
c. Inspect plastic concrete upon arrival at the jobsite to verify proper
batching. Observe mix consistency and adding of water as required to
achieve targot slumps in mix designs. Record the amount of water
added and note if it exceeds that allowed in the mix design. The
responsibility for adding water to trucks at the job site shall rest only
with the Contractor's designated representative. The Contractor is
responsible that all concrete placed in the field is in conformance to
the Contract Documents.
d. Obtain concrete test cylinders.
e. Perform tests to determine slump, concrete temperature, unit
weight, and air entrainment. The slump tests shall be made on
concrete taken from the same ocation from which the concrete for
the test cylinders is obtained.
f. Record information for concrete test reports.
g. Verify that concrete being placed meets job Specifications. Report
concrete not meeting the specified requirements and immediately
notify the Contractor, Batch Plant Inspector, Architect, Client
Representative, and The Client.
h. Pick up and transport to Laboratory, cylinders cast the previous day.
DIVISION 4:
MASONRY:
0401 Masonry Units.
0402 Concrete Unit Masonry.
0401 MASONRY UNITS
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section pertains to the provision of all concrete masonry wall units
for all internal and external unit masonry (where applicable).
B. Related works specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0303 Portland Cement Concrete
2. Section 0302 Concrete Work
3. Section 0901 Solid Plaster Rendering Stucco Work
4. Section 0102 Quality Control
Refer to "Concrete Unit Masonry" Section 0402.

1.0 3 DEFINITION:
Hollow masonry unit: Masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area (solid
area) in any plane parallel to the surface containing cores, cells or deep frogs
is less than 75% of its gross cross-sectional area measured in the same plane.
Solid masonry unit: Masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in any plane
parallel to the surface containing the cores or cells is at least 75% of the gross
cross-sectional area measured in the same plane.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
Three samples of each type and size of concrete masonry unit shall be
submitted to the Owner/Consultant for approval.
0401 MASONRY UNITS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Basic Materials.
Use in accordance with "Portland Cement Concrete" Section 0303.
1. Portland Cement.
2. Aggregates.
3. Water.
4. Admixture.
B. Hollow and Solid Concrete Masonry Units:
1. All masonry units shall be new, properly shaped and fully formed, and
free from cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper
placing of the units or impair the strength or permanence of
construction.
2. In addition to the requirements contained herein, concrete masonry
units shall comply with strength, absorption and dimensional
requirements of ASTM C90 hollow core and solid block load bearing
concrete masonry units, grade N1 and be tested in accordance with
ASTM C140 or SASO 87.
All hollow and solid CMU wall attain a minimum ultimate compressive
strength of 20Mpa as determined by ASTM C140 yielding prism
strength (fm) of 14Mpa as determined by ASTM E447.
C. Sizes and Shapes:
As shown and specified in the drawings.
Outer wall masonry units shall consist of 40 mm outside concrete, 75 mm
polystyrene extruded thermal insulation and 85 mm inside concrete.
Shapes of units shall include stretcher, corner, double corner or pier,
partition, open ended bond-Deam, control joint, or other standard
modular shapes as required for complete installation of unit masonry as
shown on the drawings.
0401 MASONRY UNITS
(See section 0402 "conctete unit Masonry”)

0402 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
1. Installation of all internal and external unit masonry and accessory
work (where applicable).
2. Fumishing and installation of masonry-reinforcement, ties, anchors
flashings lintels etc.
3. Installation of all inserts, anchors, door and window frames, louvers,
reglets and other similar items furnished by other trades.
4. Tool and point all joints and clean all finish surfaces.
B. Related work described elsewhere:
1. Section 0302 Concrete Work.
2. Section 0401 Masonry Units.
3. Section 0901 Solid Plaster rendering Stucco Work.
4. Section 0102 Quality Control.
5. Section 0202 Boundary Walls.
6. Section 0301 Concrete Reinforcement.
1.0 2 REFERENCES:
A. SBC - Saudi Building Code.
B. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
C. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
SASO 87. Method of Test for Concrete (Cement) Building Bricks and
Blocks.
SASO 145 - Concrete (Cement) Hollow Blocks for Building.
D. ACI - American Concrete Institute.
ACI 530.1 Specification for Concrete Masonry Construction.
E. ASTM - American Society for Testing & Materials.
ASTM A82 Specification for Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete
Reinforcement.
A153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
ASTM C90 Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry
Units.
ASTM C145 Specification for Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit.
ASTM C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
ASTM C476 Specification for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry.
ASTM C140 Specification for method of Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units.
a. The requirements for quality assurance, for carrying the work, shall
be in accordance with the following:
1. Comply with the applicable code requirements for the types of
concrete masonry construction shown.
2. Wherever a fire resistance classification is shown or scheduled for
concrete masonry unit construction, comply with applicable
requirements for materials and installation, tested and listed for
the construction shown.
3. Obtain units from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of
uniform texture and color, for each type required for each
continuous and visually related area.
4. Establish reports and records in a manner to ensure traceability
between records, test results and locations of placed concrete
masonry units.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
Sample Panel:
1. Before the installation of any masonry materials, erect at the job site
one sample panel of concrete block 1 meter square minimum. Panel
shall show texture of finished wall, bond, mortar joints and
workmanship of masonry materials.
2. Upon acceptance of the sample-panel, complete all required concrete
unit masonry in strict accordance with accepted standard.
1.0 5 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Construction Loads:
1. Do not apply construction loads that exceed the safe superimposed
load- carrying capacity of the masonry.
B. Masonry Protection:
1. When work is not in progress, protect partially completed masonry
against weather by covering the top of walls with strong. waterproof,
non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 600 mm down on
both sides of the walls 10 and hold securely in place.
2. When the mean daily temperature exceeds 38°C, or exceeds 32°C with
a wind velocity greater than 13 km/h, fog spray all newly constructed
masonry until damp, at least 3 times a day until the masonry is 3 days
old.
C. Hot Weather Construction:

1. Preparation before masonry work starts):
a. When the ambient temperature exceeds 38°C, or exceeds 32°C
with a wind velocity greater than 13 km/h:
1. Maintain sand piles in a damp. loose condition.
2. Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce
mortar having a temperature below 49°C.
b. When the ambient temperature exceeds 46°C, or exceeds 41°C
with a wind velocity greater than 13 km/h, implement
requirements of par. 1.05 C.1.a and shade materials and mixing
equipment from direct sunlight.
2. Construction (while masonry work is in progress):
a. When the ambient temperature exceeds 38°C, or exceeds 32*C
with a wind velocity greater than 13 km/h:
1. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 49°C.
2. Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards
with cool water before they come into contact with mortar
ingredients or mortar.
3. Maintain mortar consistency by re-tempering with cool water.
4. Use mortar within 1% hr of initial mixing.
b. When the ambient temperature exceeds 46°C, or exceeds 41°C
with a wind velocity greater than 13 km/h, implement
requirements of par. 1.05 C.1.a and use cool mixing water for
mortar and grout. Ice is permitted in the mixing water prior to use,
but is not permitted in the mixing water when added to the other
mortar or grout materials.
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Hollow and Solid Concrete Masonry Units:
As per Specification "Masonry Units" Section 0401.
a. Load-Bearing Units:
1. Load-bearing units shall conform to ASTM C90.
2. Classifications. Normal Weight, Medium Weight and
Lightweight.
Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
Normal Weight concrete masonry units shall be used.
3. Permissible Variations in Dimensions.
a. For standard units, no overall dimension (width, height, and
length) shall differ by more than 32 mm from the specified
dimensions.
b. Non-Load-Bearing Units:
1. Non-load-bearing units shall conform to ASTM C129.
2. Classifications Normal Weight, Medium Weight and
Lightweight.
a. Unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings,
Normal Weight concrete masonry units shall be used.
3. Permissible Variations in Dimensions:
a. Minimum face shell thickness shall not be less than 13
mm.
b. No overall dimension (width, height, and length) shall
differ by more than +3.2 mm from the specified
dimensions.
B. Portland Cement:
Cement shall be conforming to the requirements of ASTM C150, Type I.
non-staining without air-entrainment and of natural color or white, to
produce the required color of mortar.
C. Hydrated Lime:
Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C207, Type S,
and special finishing hydrated lime, non-air-entrained.
D. Sand:
Sand shall be conforming to the requirements of ASTM C144, except for
joints 6 mm or less where the Contractor shall use aggregate graded with
100% passing the 1.18 mm (No. 16) sieve. Clean, natural, light-coloured
sand meeting grade specification.
E. Water:
Clean, potable and free of any deleterious materials.
Conforming to the requirements of ACI 301.
F. Mortar for unit masonry:
1. Mortar conforming to the proportion specifications shall consist of a
mixture of cementitious material, aggregate, and water, all complying
with the requirements of ASTM C270 & ASTM C246. The average
compressive strength at 28 days are as follows:
a. Type M: 172 MPa.
b. Type S: 12.4 MPa.
2. Mortar mix and proportion shall be controlled and accurately
maintained. Measure aggregate materials in a damp, loose condition.
Limit materials as specified herein and limit cement'lime ratio (by
volume) as follows:
a. Type M:
1. Type M shall be used for structural reinforced masonry walls and
floors and with proportion of not more than 4 part lime per part of
portland cement and sand equal to and not less than 2% to 3 times
the sum of the volumes of cement and lime materials.
b. Types S:
1. Type S shall be used for exterior masonry mortar construction and
with proportion of not more than 4 part lime per part of portland
cement and sand equal to not less than 24 to 3 times the sum of
the volumes of cement and lime materials.
All mortar should comply to the appropriate code ASTM C270 &
ASTM C246.
Note: Mortar to be tested with one sample /25 m2.
G. Cement-Parging:
Shall be 1 part Portland Cement and 3-1/2 parts clean sand.
H. Horizontal Reinforcement:
Deformed bars with yield stress of 414 N/mm Reinforcement" Section
0301. as per specification, "Concrete
I. Vertical Reinforcement:
Deformed bars with yield stress of 414 N/mm2 as per specification,
"Concrete Reinforcement" Section 0301.
J. Adjustable wall ties shall be rectangular type or as indicated on drawings
fabricated from 5 mm cold-drawn corrosion resistant steel wire of the
length required for proper embedment in masonry, 4 ties per m2 plus
extra around openings.
K. Flashing Material:
As per specification, "Metal Flashing and Trim" Section 0704
L. Lintels:
Provide and install as an integral part of masonry work where shown on
drawings. Portion of walls bearing reinforced concrete lintels shall have
cells filled solid with grout.
M. Grout for unit Masonry:
A. MATERIAL:
a. Grout:
Grout shall conform to ASTM C476 with a minimum compressive
strength of 21 MPa at 28 days.
b. Portland Cement:
Cement shall be conforming to the requirements of ASTM C150,
Type I, non- staining, without air-entrainment, and of natural color
or white, to produce the required color of grout.
c. Hydrated lime:
Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C207,
Type S, and special finishing hydrated lime, non-air-entrained.
d. Fine Aggregate:
Fine aggregate shall be sand and conforming to the requirements
of ASTM C33 or C404, 100% of fine aggregate shall pass the 9.5 mm
sieve for Size No. 1.
e. Coarse Aggregate:
Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C404,
100% of coarse aggregate shall pass the 12.5 mm sieve for Size No.
8 or 89.
f. Water:
Water shall be clean and free of amounts of oils, acids, alkalies,
salts, organic materials, or other substances that are deleterious to
grout or any metal in the wall, and shall comply with the
requirements of ACI 301.
g. Additive:
Additive shall be metallic aggregate, prepared and graded to
counteract shrinkage and reduce permeability of portland cement
grout.
B. Proportion and mix:
Grout proportions and mixes shall conform to ASTM C476. Grout type
proportioned by volume are as follows:
1. Fine Grout:
a. Proportion by Volume.
1. Portland Cement:1part.
2. Hydrated Lime. O to 1/10 part.
3. Fine Aggregates: 2% to 3 times the sum of volume of cement
and lime materials.
2. Coarse Grout:
a. Proportion by Volume
1. Portland Cement: 1 part.
2. Hydrated Lime 0 to 1/10 part.
3. Fine Aggregates: 214 to 3 times the sum of volume of cement
and lime materials.
4. Coarse Aggregates: 1 to 2 times the sum of volume of
cement and lime materials.
3. The sum of volumes of fine and coarse aggregates shall not exceed
4. times the sum of volumes of cement and lime materials.
4. Cement Setting Bed:
a. Combine 1 part of portland cement with 2 parts of damp setting
bed sand. Use water to dampen sand (if required), but water
shall not be added to the mix.
5. Grout for Masonry Bond Beams and Lintels
a. Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and
water are proportioned to provide a 28-day compressive
strength of 14 MPa, and in conformance with ASTM C109.
6. Air-entraining agents or other admixtures shall not be added
to grout materials, except when approved by to the Royal
Commission.
7. Calcium chloride is not permitted in grout mix.
Note: Grout: Include ancillary itens Damp proof, wall ties, joint filers, fire resistance
requirement, sealant and anchors, etc.
4.0 1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:

A. Storing and Handling Materials:
1. Prevent foreign matter or materials in work.
2. Prevent damage from weather or ground.
3. Deliver and store manufactured materials, such as lime and cement,
in original packages, plainly marked with brand and manufacturer's
name.
4. Materials in broken containers, or in packages showing watermarks
or other evidence of damage, shall not be used.
B. Mortar Mixture:
1. Measure materials accurately by volume and mix thoroughly.
2. Do not add water to mortar that has stiffened due to delay in placing.
3. Discard mortar too stiff to place.
4. White cement to be used for mortar in sand-lime block walls.
C. Masonry Construction:
1. Construct walls plumb and true, with courses level, running bond, and
having uniform thickness of joints.
2. Bond and anchor intersecting walls (where applicable).
3. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry with wire brush and wet lightly
before placing fresh masonry thereto.
4. Remove loose units and mortar.
5. Construct walls in dry weather, and provide waterproof covering if
work is suspended.
6. Dampen masonry just prior to laying.
7. Place dry blocks only, in wall.
8. Provide nominal 10 mm mortar bedding to all horizontal and vertical
joints.
9. Provide smooth concave exterior joints made with suitable tool after
mortar has stiffened.
10. Fill cells solid with grout on either side of openings as shown on
drawings and where vertical wall reinforcement, horizontal wall
reinforcement, anchors, metal door frames, balts, fies and other
inserts occur.
11. Remove projecting mortar and other surface irregularities and wash
with water.
12. Walls shall be constructed using the Low Lift Grouting Method,
grouting in increment between horizontal construction joints. The
limitation for the daily lifts to be not exceeding 1 50m.
C 1: Construction tolerances:
The Contractor shall erect masonry within the following tolerances from
the specified dimensions:
1. Dimension of Elements:
a. Variation from Plumb.
b. True to a Line.
c. Alignment of Columns and walls(bottom versus top.
2. Location of Elements:
a. Indicated in Plan.
b. Indicated in Elevation.
a. In cross section or elevation: - 6 mm, + 13 mm.
3. Elements:
a. Variation from Level.
1. Bed joints: 16 mm in 3 m, + 13 mm max.
2. Top Surface of Bearing walls: + 6 mm in 3 m, +13 mm max.
+ 6 mm in 3 m; + 9 mm in 6 m;
+13 mm max
+6 mm in 3 m: 9 mm in 6 m;
+ 13 mm max
+13 mm for bearing walls
+19 mm for non-bearing walls
+ 13 mm in 6 m; 119 mm max.
+ 6mm in storey height; 19 mm max
D. Masonry Reinforcement:
1. Horizontal and vertical reinforcement in walls shall be placed as
indicated on drawings.
2. All cells at corners, edges or at intersecting walls, and all cells adjacent
openings shall contain reinforcing.
3. Reinforcement shall be continuous except at thermal control joints.
Laps to be provided as necessary. See Section 0301 "Concrete
Reinforcement" Clause 3.01A2. All reinforcement shall be in place
prior to grouting.
4. The minimum cover over reinforcement of mortar, masonry and
grout, treated as a homogeneous material shall be as required by
Section 0301 "Concrete Reinforcement" Clause 3.01C8.
E. Grouting Masonry Walls:

1. Grout shall be placed by pumping or by an approved alternative
method and shall be placed before any initial set occurs.
2. Do not add water to grout that has stiffened due to delay in placing.
Discard grout too stiff to place.
3. All cells containing reinforcing, adjacent openings and/or as indicated
on drawings shall be filled solidly with grout.
4. Walls shall be grouted in accordance with the Low Lift Construction
Method. Grout shall be compacted by rodding or usina pencil
vibrators.
5. Horizontal construction joints in grout shall be formed 10-20 mm
below the top of the uppermost masonry unit in any lift. The surface
of the hardened grout shall be cleaned and all laitance and loose
foreign matter removed prior to laying units for the next lift.
Note: External joinery or metal works bedded against block works / concrete are
to be painted with approved silicon sealant or as appropriate local
specification.
4.0 2 INCIDENTAL WORK:

A. Fallow details on drawings as to actual dimensions required for
clearances, alignment etc. Install all reinforcement, anchors, bolts,
hangers, nailing strips etc shown or detailed on drawings.
B. Install all wall reinforcement, bolts, anchors, metal flashings, reglets,
inserts and other built-in items as masonry work progresses. Grout solid
all spaces around built-in or embedded items.
C. Install all lintels (minimum bearing), gate, door & window frames and all
other incidentals as shown or called for.
D. Clean-up and remove masonry work debris generated during
construction and clean up area completely and thoroughly after
completion of work.
E. Scaffolding: No support to be allowed to pass through the walling unless
agreed by the Client Representative.
DIVISION 5:
METALS:
0501 Steel Rectangular Hollow Sections and Small Sections Structural Steel.
0601 STEEL RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS AND SMALL SECTION
STRUCTURAL
STEEL:
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
Work Included:
Supply and Install all ornamental stair and balcony rails, supports etc. as
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

A. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and shapes.
ASTM A312M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
C. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen
who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this section.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Samples and workshop drawings showing elevation and details of fixing.
Junctions etc for approval by the owner.
1.0 4 PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this
Section before, during and after installation and to protect the work and
materials of all other trades.
B. Replacements: in the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and
replacements necessary to the approval of the Client and at no additional
cost to the Client.
C. Storage: If the manufactured steel items are stored prior to erection,
store in straight and horizontal position, avoiding any contact with the
ground. Protect carefully from weather and from excessive exposure.

STRUCTURAL
STEEL:
2.01 STEEL FABRICATION:
A. Ali steel used in manufacture shall be free from blemish and heavy rust
prior to fabrication and painting.
B. Where shown or indicated all steel assemblies shall be galvanized by hot
dip process after all fabrication and welding has been completed. Take
care to avoid distortion and accurately straighten members where
necessary before delivery to job-site. All bolts and other fastenings shall
be galvanized by hot dipping and threads shall be specially cut to avoid
binding.
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS:
All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
prope installation of the work of this Section, shall be selected by the
Contractor subject to and in accordance with accepted engineering practice
and the approval of the Architect.
2.03 HAND RAIL AND BALUSTRADE:

A. Wrought iron grille works for staircase balustrades and handrails, as
2.04 METAL RAIL (For window):
A. 500mm high Mild steel rail with paint finish including 25mm x 25mm
square tube top. bottom & vertical rail and rectangular steel tubing with
approval color to the designs shown on the drawings or approval equal.
STRUCTURAL
STEEL:
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this
Section will be installed. Incorrect conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
B. Erection:
1. Erect and install the work of this Section in accordance with the
Drawings and all pertinent codes and regulations.
2. Do not permit temporary construction loads which cause members
stresses beyond design limits.
DIVISION 6:
WOOD AND ALUMINIUM:
0601 Carpentry and Millwork.
0602 Cabinet Work.
0601 CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
This Section covers the furnishing and installation of all carpentry and mill
works in wood trim, wood frames and miscellaneous.
B. Related Work - Specified Elsewhere:
Section 0602 - Cabinet Work
Section 0903 - Painting
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit samples and shop drawings of carpentry and millwork materials
used for the proposed work.
B. Submit for approval full schedule of all wood specified intended for
inclusion in the proposed work including grades and wood preservative
and treatment, their location and finish.
2.01 Wood shall be of select quality of finest species available from around
the world. The client reserves the right to select the wood species to be used
throughout.
2.02 Joinery work, doors, wooden hand rail, etc. shall be manufactured by
an approved Specialist and shall be of highest standard of construction and
finish commercially available the contractor shall obtain the written approval
of the Client for all details of design, materials, finishes and all items of
hardware and fittings. To obtain this approval the Contractor shall submit all
required details of design in form of drawings and specification and where
requested a sample unit. Items not measuring up to the approved
specification shall be resubmitted with the required modifications in order
that Client approved standards are met.
2.03 Hardwood for paneled doors, door frames, architraves, etc. shall be
selected quality Mahogany finished to accept polish or clear natural finish.
2.04 Wood veneer for flush doors and flat panels shall be plywood with
selected mahogany face veneers, as 2.01 above, or quality grade to accept
polish or clear natural finish.
2.05 Adhesives shall be water proof, phenolic type, or other approved.
2.06 Wood for external door frames, architraves and other trim shown as
clear finish shall be of same species and grades as doors in the specified
room.
2.07 Cant strips to junctions of roof finishes shall be oil tempered
fiberboard.
2.08 External soffit board shall be "Master board" as manufactured by Cape
Boards Limited or other equal and approved.

3.01 The Contractor shall verity dimensions from site prior to fabrication of
the work.
3.02 Materials, products and accessories furnished by the Contractor shall
be installed and all work shall be performed in a first class workman-like
manner in conformity with the best trade practices. It is specially to be noted
that any finishing work not reaching the highest standards of workmanship
shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Client
0602 CABINET WORK
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
This section covers the furnishing and installation of all counters, vanity
units etc and their accessories all as specified on the drawings.
B. Related Work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0601 - Carpentry and Millwork.
2. Section 0705 - Joint Sealant.
3. Section 0804 - Finish Hardware.
4. Section 0904 - Painting.
5. Section 1001 - Sanitary Fixtures.
Obtain warranty from the manufacturer for a period of one year for free
replacement of defective components
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit samples of materials, fittings, hardware and
shop drawings indicating elevations, details, construction, finishes and
hardware.
B. Product data: submit manufacturer's installation instructions for
hardware and other materials used in the fabrication of casework.
C. Shop drawings submit shop drawings for casework, showing location of
each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, anchors
and other components. Indicate compliance with specified requirements
for materials and workmanship.
D. Samples: submit fully finished samples of the following items required in
the casework. Samples will be reviewed for appearance and finish.
1. Submit samples of each element that will be incorported in the cabinet
work.
2. A mock-up sample for kitchen cabinet and vanity laundry/cabinet.
1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A. Protect casework during delivery, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration.
B. Deliver casework to the site when adequate facilities for storage are
available or when casework can be installed in finish locations.
C. Store items in enclosed spaces with temperature and humidity
conditions similar to those required in the finished construction.
D. Do not install casework until finish work has been completed including
sanitary and electrical work, painting, floor finishes requiring setting
beds, acoustical work and related finishes which could damage, soil,
or deteriorate the casework.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS:
Casework shall remain materially stable within constructed environments
without showing or developing deterioration including delamination of finish
surfaces, warp of board members etc.
0602 CABINET WORK
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The cabinet work for kitchen, etc., shall be of highest standard of
construction and finish commercially available. The Contractor shall
obtain the written approval of the Client for ail details of design,
materials, finishes (both inside and outside the cabinet work, and all items
of hardware, fittings, fixings and gliders, etc.. To obtain this approval the
Contractor shall submit all required details of design of cabinet work in
form of drawings and specification and where requested a sample unit.
Items not measuring up to the approved specification shall be
resubmitted with the required modifications in order that Client approve
standards are met.
B. Wood shall be as specified on drawings of select quality finish as for
Section 0601. For the various parts and framing of the works shown on
drawings, wood shall be dried and treated with, preservatives against
vermin and rot.
C. Plywood shall be of exterior quality water-resistant grade of species to be
approved by Client, good both sides and suitable for receiving stain or
clear natural finish.
D. Block board shall have plywood outer sheets with bonded core consisting
of solid wood blocks between 7 & 25mm wide.
E. Adhesives shall be waterproof, melamine fortified urea or phenolic type,
colour and design to be selected by Owner.
F. Kitchen counter tops and 100mm high back splash shall be KAFCO Brand
with built-in stainless steel single or double bowl sinks and sinks mixer &
accessories. Sanitary fixtures shall be accommodated and sealed to units
according to the written recommendations of the sanitary fixture details
from manufacturer.
G. Base Cupboard units: shall be fabricated 850mm high, 600mm deep, in
width-modules of width as shown on drawings with special infill units.
Arrangement of cupboards, drawers and fixed panels shall be as shown
on drawings. Units are to be in 18mm thick MDF panels with approved
plastic laminate finish and post formed pvc edges in approved shade.
Cabinet doors shall be flush overlay hung on spring loaded 180 degree
opening concealed hinges and all doors and drawers shall be fitted with
approved finger grips Cabinets shall be fitted with integral back panels
and one adjustable shelf 500mm wide All interior surfaces including
backs, shelves and drawers shall have approved bonded white PVC finish.
H. Wall Cupboard units shall be fabricated 300mm deep in width modules of
width as shown on drawings with special infill units to match bottom
cabinets. Units shall be 725mm high and have provision for future light
fittings by the owner and include a spur. Arrangement of cupboards and
fixed panels shall be as shown on drawings. Units are to be in 18mm thick
MDF panels with approved plastic laminate finish and post formed pvc
edges in approved shade. Cabinet doors shall be flush overlay hung on
spring- loaded 180 degree concealed hinges and fitted with approval
finger grips Cabinets shall be fitted with integral back panels and three
adjustable shelves 12mm thick exterior quality plywood. All interior
surfaces, including backs and shelves shall have bonded white epoxy
finish.
0602 CABINET WORK
PART III-EXECUTION:
3.01 PREPARATION:
A. Before proceeding with installation of casework, obtain field
measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details as
required for accurate fit.
B. Co-ordinate work with other trades affecting the installation of
casework.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight without distortion
Screws as required. Install to a tolerance of 3 mm x 2400 mm for plumb
and level including countertops and with 2 mm maximum offset in
flush adjoining surfaces, 3 mm maximum offsets is revealed adjoining
surfaces.
B. Discard and replace units which are improperly finished, and which
are defective in manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes and
patterns.
C. Anchorage: provide screws and other anchoring devices of the proper
type, size, material and finish for application indicated to provide
secure attachments. Fastenings shall be concealed wherever possible
and shall not be apparent on exposed faces.
Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure
adjoining cabinet units.
Install casework hardware in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation and ensure correct operation. Lubricate operating
hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
Ensure that doors and drawers operate smoothly and within
acceptable tolerances on nylon side runners.
3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
A. Cover Casework with 0.1 mm polyethylene film, for protection against
soiling and deterioration during remainder of construction period.
B. Prior to final acceptance, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces
of casework.
DIVISION 7:
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION:
0701 Waterproofing and Damp Proofing, Vapour Barrier for Slabs.
0702 Building Insulation.
0703 Membrane Roofing.
0704 Flashing and Sheet Metal.
0705 Joint Sealants.
0706 Bituminous Film Coatings.
0707 Concrete Waterproofing.
0701 WATER PROOFING & DAMP PROOFING VAPOUR BARRIER FOR SLAB
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
General:
This section covers the furnishing and application of bituminous damp
proofing for all concrete surfaces and film sheeting damp proofing and floor
water proofing in wet areas, as specified herein and as shown on the
drawings The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, tools and
equipment required to complete the work.

The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable
level of quality for materials and products:
ASTM D41 Primer, for use with asphalt in damp proofing and waterproofing.
D 449 Asphalt for damp proofing and waterproofing.
E 154 Testing materials for use as vapour barrier under concrete slabs and as
ground cover in crawl spaces.
Sheet type vapour barrier will have dart impact, tear resistance, tensile
strength and elongation as per ASTM D-1709, D-1004 and D-882
respectively.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall submit to the owner consultant the following items for
review before commencing work:
1. Manufacturer's literature indicating the manufacturer's
recommended installation instructions.
2. Manufacturer's certification of compliance with specified
requirements.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all material proposed
to be used in the work and shall maintain a qualified representative on site
during bituminous damp proofing operations.
0701 WATER PROOFING AND DAMP PROOFING VAPOUR BARRIER FOR

SLAB
PART II – PRODUCT:
2.01 GENERAL:
1. Procurement of all goods and products covered by these specifications
must be approved by the Owner/Consultant.
2. The cold application of bituminous coating to be used for general damp
proofing and protective purposes to the vertical surfaces of perimeter
foundations.
3. Damp proofing shall be scheduled so that curing will be accomplished
prior to backfilling and so that backfilling will be accomplished as soon as
possible after curing.
4. Primary coat and bitumen materials shall be applied when the ambient
temperature is above 5°C.
2.02 MATERIAL PRODUCT:
1. Bituminous Coating: Non-flammable, non-toxic asphalt emulsion,
Chemically treated for maximum adhesion and shall be water and salt
resistant type. One of the following product/manufacturer or
equivalent shall be acceptable.
A. BLACK "PU" CMCI products or equivalent approved for wet
areas such as toilet & bathrooms, kitchen, wash areas,
laundry, pantry, etc.
B. SK-60, Fosam products or approved equivalent for
foundation and structures in contact to ground.
The mineral Filled asphalt emulsion shall be applied by
brush, spray or dipping or mopping and diluted with proper
clean potable water as per manufacturer's recommendation.
2. Film Sheet Damp Proofing Shall be polyethylene sheeting "Moistop"
or approved equal and be not less than 250 micron high impact
strength rating.
3. Floor Waterproofing in Wet Areas: The cold applied one component
liquid waterproofing shall be applied for wet areas such as bathrooms,
toilet, kitchen, wash areas, laundry. main and family entrance porch,
etc.
0701 WATER PROOFING AND DAMP PROOFING VAPOUR BARRIER FOR SLAB
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES:
Concrete surfaces to receive damp proofing shall be cleaned of foreign

matter and loose particles and shall be surface dry at the time damp
proofing is applied. Surfaces to receive asphalt or fibrous asphalt damp
proofing shall be given a priming coat of asphalt primer. Priming coat shall
be applied when the ambient temperature is above 5°C and at the rate of
approximately 0.4 liter per m2, fully covering the entire surface to be damp
proofed.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
Cold Application Method: Surfaces to be damp proofed shall be given zero
coat with primer and first coat with 2 coats black P.U. waterproof. Each coat
shall be applied uniformly using not less than 0.5 litres of asphalt per m2 for
each coat. The first coat shall be applied by brush to provide full bond with
the primed surface, and the second coat may be brushed or sprayed over a
thoroughly dry first coat The finished surface shall be uniform thickness and
impervious to moisture. Porous spots shall be recoated.
The above procedure shall be followed unless manufacturer
recommendation specified
Apply bituminous material to the all wall perimeter up to the height of floor
finish
3.03 FILM SHEETING:
Film sheeting damp proofing shall be laid out in accordance with the
installation instruction of the manufacturer. Lap joints minimum 300 mm
and seal. Care shall be taken not to disturb or damage the membrane while
concrete reinforcing.
Overlap the sheet edges with minimum of 300 mm to be taped with
reinforced tape as specified
Ensure no projections exist above ground which may damage the
membrane.
Ensure continuity of covering at junction of horizontal/inclined and vertical
membranes, by bonding with an approved bonding compound or sealing
tape, in particular at the corners of footings the primary polyethylene sheet
shall be cut to follow the excavated profile. Continuity of membrane may be
ensured by covering with smaller pieces of polyethylene sheeting and
bonding with sealing tape.
Form collars around pipes and projections and seal with sealing tape.
Lay sheets loose on base, lap edge 150 mm and seal with adhesive tape.
Turn up sheets at edges of slab and seal against foundation or slab edge using
sealing tape as indicated on the drawings, ensure surfaces are dry and dust-
free at time of applying sealing tape.
Protect sheets and prevent puncturing before or during laying of subsequent
covering.
Repair any damage to the membrane with adhesive tape. Ensure a
completely puncture free membrane just prior to concreting.
Ensure that permanent covering is laid as soon as possible after laying sheets.
3.04 WET AREA WATER PROOFING:
Remove all dirt, dust, laitance, oil, grease and loose materials prior to
application. Voids and cracks must also be filled with latex cement mortar
The polyurethane membrane shall be applied by brush, squeeze or airless
spray to a minimum thickness of 1 mm and allowed to dry overnight.
Testing Recommendations: Upon completion of waterproofing application
the insulated area shall be tested by pooling water at least of 50 mm depth
kept for 48 hours. Owner/Consultant will inspect the ceiling under slab
surface for any leakage and further work can proceed only after clearance
from Owner/Consultant.
==== End of Section =====
0702 BUILDING INSULATION
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
The section covers the furnishing and installation of building insulation
for walls and roofs as shown on drawings.
B. Related Work Specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0302 - Cast-in-place Concrete
2. Section 0402 - Concrete Unit Masonry
3. Section 0601 - Carpentry and Millwork
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The contractor shall submit for the Client's approval samples of each
insulation and accessories proposed for use .
B. Manufacturer's Certificates of compliance with the requirements.
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All goods and products shall be, where available, from an in Kingdom
manufacturer or supplier.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Roof insulation to lightweight screed (laid to fall) & waterproofing
membrane shall be 50 mm thick extruded polystyrene ngid foam with
ship lap jaints or equal approval (refer also to section 0703).
2.03 U-Value Calculation:
A. Roof Deck:
S. Layers Thichne R-value (Ft2

No ss(m) f/BTU-hr)
1 Inside surface resistance 0 61
2 120 mm Concrete Slab 120 17
3 Light weight concrete screed 75 1.125
4 Double layer of Dermabit wate 5 0.153

proofing membrane
5 50 mm thick rigid insulation 50 10

(Expanded polysterene)
6 25 mm Mosaic tiles (Asphalt 25 0.05

Lincolin, Venyle or rubber
7 Outside surface resistance 0.25
13.88(Ft2-
F/BTU-hr
U- 0 072 (BTU/
value= Hr/ Ft2-F)
B. External Wall:
S. No Layers Thichne R-value (Ft2

ss(m) f/BTU-hr)
1 Inside resistance 0.68
2 200 mm thick CMU wall 200 1.11
3 Expanded Polysterene 50 0.10

(Extruded)
2.47
(Ft2-F/BTU-
hr)
U- 0.405
Value (BTU/Hr/Ft2-
= F)
C. 200 mm partition Wall:
S. No Layers Thichne R-value (Ft2

ss(m) f/BTU-hr)
1 Inside resistance 0.68
2 200 mm thick CMU wall 200 1.11
12.D4
(Ft2-F/BTU-
hr)
U- 0 083
Value (BTU/Hr/Ft2-
= F)
D.
a. Structural glazing for common lobbies of ground and first floor.
b. Double glazed thermally broken clear glass fixed on point fittings.
Shading coefficient - 0.40
U-value - 0.58(BTU/H/Ft-F)

3.01 Check and clean wall and roof surfaces to receive insulation to ensure
freedom from debris, grease, oil or other items detrimental to insulation.
3.02 Roof. Roof insulation shall be laid in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's Instructions (refer also to section 0703).
3.03 Wall Wall insulation shall be laid in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's Instructions.
3.04 Protect insulation from damage in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
0703 MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
Extent of membrane waterproofing and drainage is shown on
drawings and is hereby defined to include all materials applied with
sealed joints and flashings as needed to for concealed waterproofing
system.
B. Related Work Specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0302 - Cast In Place & Pre-cast Concrete
2. Section 0702 - Building Insulation
3. Section 1501 - Sanitary System
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit samples of membrane & accessories, data to substantiate
compliance with requirements, installation instructions and general
recommendations from the manufacturer for Owner/Consultant
approval.
B. Obtain required waterproofing materials from a single manufacturer.
C. Submit shop drawings showing installation details and waterproofing
around roof accessories.
1.03 WARRANTIES:
Membrane roofing is expected to have a serviceable life of 15 years,
provided it is designed, used, installed and maintained in accordance with
the manufacturer's Technical Literature. The Contractor shall provide in
writing) the Owner Consultant with a minimum 10 years warranty of all
materials and labour provided for the membrane roofing system and agree
to replace repair defective materials and workmanship.
1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE:
Deliver materials to the site in their original sealed containers and packages
bearing the manufacturer's name, brand and other data to identify the
materials Protect materials from damage during shipment, handling and
storage.
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The design has been based on the use of a Dermabit waterproof
membrane or approval equal.
The main membrane shall be Dermabit 4170 and will be double layered.
Two coats of Dermaprimer will be applied prior to installation of the
membrane. Skirting will be 4 mm thick Dermabit 4170 slated APP
bituminous membrane fully bonded and shall be installed prior to
installation of flashings.
B. The separation layer is to be Typar 3301 or Alyaf 140 gm/sqm.
C. Sealant for flashings shall be Fosroc Nitoseal HP 40 Polyurethane sealant.
D. Flashings shall be aluminium flashing as manufactured by East & West
Factory 1.1 mm thick.
E. Roof screed laid to falls shall be lightweight concrete as "MAS Foamcrete"
(Manufactured by Mustafa Al Atrash Est.) having a density of 500 kg/mn
laid in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Cant strips 50 x
50 mm shall be done during the roof screed.
F. The roof deck will be finished with concrete paver tiles (400 x 400 x
50mm) supplied and approved by an approved vendor fixing on 50 mm
thick fine concreting (refer to section 0902) and as detailed on the
drawings.
G. The roof will be finished with gravel ballast in accordance with ASTM
D1863 and shall be hard, durable, opaque and free of clay, loam, sand and
other foreign substances. Gravel ballast shall be sized in accordance with
ASTM D448, size 2 to½ in diameter and not less than 15 lbs-sq/ft, or as
specified.
H. Roof drain system shall be roof dome type cast iron drain and painted cast
iron body with splash pad with satisfactory draining system and fixation
system or approved equal and as detailed on the drawings.
Note: Protection of exposed membrane from ultraviolet (UV) radiation.
1. Protective layer shall be capable of protecting the waterproofing of buildings
durably against damaging influences of static, dynamic and thermal nature.
The type of protective layer to be adopted shall be selected as a function of
the anticipated stresses and of local conditions and factors, Movements and
deformations of the protective layer shall not be capable of damnaging the
waterproofing. Where joints in the structure exist, joints shall be provided at
the same locations in solid protective layer.
2. Protective measures shall be provided as temporary protection to
waterproofing membrane during the progress of construction work.

3.01 Surfaces to received membrane shall be uniform, plane, dry and clean.
They must also be free from dirt, grease, oil, projections and any other
particles likely to be detrimental to the finished membrane system Do not
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the installer.
3.02 Prepare surface of screed and apply Derma primer in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 Install membrane to main roof area in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions using the fully bonded method.
3.04 At all upstands a layer of slated finish membrane shall be connected
to the parapet in accordance with details and finished with an aluminium
flashing fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.05 All applications and installations shall be those recommended by the
manufacturer or supplier of the products.
3.06 Institute all required procedures for protection of completed portion
of waterproofing system during installation of work over the layers and
throughout the remainder of construction period. Do not allow traffic of
any kind on unprotected surfaces.
3.07 Ensure that the membrane has been applied satisfactorily to
upstands, around pipes, drains, outspouts, elevated pads etc.
3.08 Co-ordinate installation of waterproofing materials and associated
work to provide complete system and to match with requirements of
other trade.
3.09 Install pre-cast scupper permanently to the substrate, by methods
which are adequate for the sizes and locations of units, as shown on the
drawings.
PART IV – TESTING:
4.0 1 TESTING:
A. Testing of completed roofing finish shall be by water flooding to a depth
of 100 mm, no leakage of which shall be visible within the structure after
a 72 hour test period. This test shall be applied to each and every
completed roof.
B. In the event of roof membrane test failure that roof shall be repaired and
re-tested until found acceptable, all to the satisfaction of the
Owner/Consultant. Flood test shall be repeated until no leakage is
observed.
C. The Contractor should conduct his own 24 hours test and satisfy himself
that the work is satisfactory prior to submission to Owner/Consultant for
inspection.
0704 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the furnishing and installation of flashing and sheet
metal extending into or through the walls at the locations indicated on
the drawings.
1. Section 0705 - Joint Sealants
2. Section 0703 - Membrane Roofing
3. Section 0901 - Solid Plaster rendering Stucco Work
1.0 2 SUBMITTALS:
Submit samples of flashing and sheet metal materials and accessories used
for the proposed works for approval by the Owner.
2.01 Flashing shall be fabricated of 20 gauge aluminium.
2.02 Cement Plaster shall be as indicated on drawings and shall conform with
Section 0901.
2.03 Sealant shall conform with Section 0705.
PART II – EXECUTION:
3.01 The Contractor shall examine the conditions of the location where
flashing will be installed.
3.02 Flashing shall be built to conform to shape, lines and dimension of the
structure as shown on the drawings.
3.03 Materials shall be installed and all work shall be performed in a fist
class workman-like manner in conformity with the best trade practices.
3.04 All joints and seams shall be fully bedded thoroughly filled and sealed
with a rubber based contact Adhesive type cement.
3.05 Where joints and seams occur provide 75mm overlap to properly
interlock and match uniformly and continuously at each end.
3.06 Provide flashing to give a complete water seal at all openings and roof
penetrations for pipes and conduits etc.
=== End of Section ====
0706 JOINT SEALANTS
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 General:
A. Work included:
This section covers the extent of sealant and caulking work as indicated
on the drawings and where required.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 0302 - Concrete Work
2. Section 0602 - Cabinet Work
3. Section 0703 - Membrane Roofing
4. Section 0801 - Aluminium Doors and Frames
5. Section 0802 - Aluminium Windows
6. Section 0902 - Tiling
7. Section 0903 - Painting
8. Section 1001 - Sanitary Fixtures

Obtain materials only from manufacturers who will advise the installer on
proper procedures and precautions for the use of materials
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of materials proposed
for use in the work.
B. Copies of the manufacturer's published recommendations to support the
selection of the compatibility of the various related materials with respect
to the types of joint for which each material is intended.
0705 JOINT SEALANTS
2.01 GENERAL:
A. Colour: Provide manufacturer's standard colour range which has the best
suitability for the application shown.
B. Compatibility: Before purchase of each specified sealant, investigate its
compatibility with the joint surfaces, joint fillers and other materials in
the system. Provide only materials (variation of the specified materials),
which are known to be fully compatible with the actual installation
conditions as shown by manufacturer's published data and certification.
2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS:
A. One-part Silicone Rubber Sealant for Exterior Use: Silicone rubber based,
one component elastomeric sealant compound.
B. One-Component Polyurethane Sealant for sealing external joints of pre-
cast.
Material:
1. One component polyurethane sealant, single component, gun
grade, non-sag and moisture cure sealant. Track free between 2
and 4 hours at normal conditions and full cure between 24 to 48
hours. Product to conform with ASTM 0-412 for tensile strength
and elogation. Requirement for ASTM C-794 for adhesion will be
observed for the chosen product. Recommended brand is
Permaseal DU 25 or Owner/Consultant approved equivalent.
2. Sealant backer rod: Polyurethane or polyethylene non-gassing
foamed rod, compressible rod closed cell designed as backer for
sealant to control joint depth.
3. Polyethylene tape or other to be applied for limitation of sealant
(masking tape).
4. Joint cleaner when necessary.
C. Interior Silicone Rubber Sealant (I-SR-S): Silicone rubber-based, one-part,
non-sag. elastomeric sealant, resistant to mildew recommended by
manufacturer for interior applications, including seal around bath tubs,
other sanitary installations, and similar applications. Provide type
recommended by manufacturer for the porosity of the joint surfaces
(non-acid for the porous surfaces, acid for non-porous).
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Provide the type of miscellaneous materials as recommended by the
sealant or caulking compound manufacturer for the joint surfaces as
required such as Joint cleaner joint sealing tape, bonding adhesives, joint
sealing compounds (silicone sealant and polysulphide sealant), primers,
compressible fillers, binders and coating compounds.
B. All cauking compound for interior use shall be, furnished in standard
colours to be approved by Owner/Consultant.
0705 JOINT SEALANTS

3.01 GENERAL:
Caulking or sealant shall be provided in joints as indicated or specified.
Materials shall conform to the respective specifications and other
requirements specified. The work specified herein shall be performed by
workmen skilled in such work.
3.02 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION:
The joint design, shape and spacing shall be as indicated. The surfaces of
joints to be sealed shall be clean and dry. Oil, tar, grease, dirt, caulk, particles
of mortar, dust, loose rust, loose mill scale and other foreign substances shall
be removed from all joint surfaces to be sealed which would interfere with
bond of sealant or caulking compound Oil or grease shall be removed with
solvent and surfaces shall be wiped with clean cloths.
A. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces. Where surfaces have been treated
with curing compounds, oil, or other such materials, they shall be
removed by sand blasting or wire brushing. Laitance, efflorescence
and loose mortar shall be removed from the joint cavity.
B. Steel surfaces to be in contact with sealant shall be sandblasted or, if
sandblasting would not be practical or would damage adjacent finish
work, the metal shall be scraped and wire brushed to remove loose
mill scale. Protective coatings on steel surfaces shall be removed by
sandblasting or by a solvent that leaves no residue.
C. Aluminium surfaces of windows and door frames in contact with
sealants shall be cleaned of temporary protective coatings. When
masking tape is used for a protective cover, the tape and any residual
adhesive shall be removed just prior to applying the sealant Solvents
used to remove protective coatings shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer of the aluminium work and shall be non-staining.
D. Pre-cast Concrete Panel Joints Surface Preparation; Şurface must be
clean, dry and free of foreign matter, oil or grease. Clean joint surface
immediately before installation of sealant. Remove dirt, sand,
laitance, debris, moisture and all other substances that will interfere
with bond of sealant The surface should be free from any unsound or
contaminated material. Repair procedure will follow when needed.
Etch concrete joint surface to remove excess of alkalinity when
manufacturer's instruction required using 5% solution of muriatic acid.
Neutralised with dilute ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water
and allow drying before sealant installation.
E. Roughen joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar non-porous
materials, wherever sealant manufacturer's data indicates lower bond
strength than for porous surfaces. Rub with fine abrasive cloth or wool
to produce a dull sheen
3.03 APPLICATION:
A. After all cleaning operations on the exterior of the building are
completed, rake out all joints between the frames and the masonry walls
to remove all loose mortar materials and thoroughly brush clean to
remove all dust and dirt Where no backstop occurs to receive the caulking
or sealant compound, fill joints with filler material as recommended by
the caulking or sealant manufacturer.
B. Apply caulking or sealant, and primer, in strict accordance with the
printed instructions of the caulking or sealant manufacturer. Apply primer
when and where recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Employ only proven installation techniques which will ensure that
sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or
air pockets with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surface sequally on
opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a
slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where
horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface,
fil joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.
D. Paper masking tape shall be placed on the finish surface on one or both
sides of a joint cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from or
compound smears. Masking tape shall be removed within 10 minutes
after joint has been filled and tooled.
E. Bond-preventive materials shall be installed on the bottom of the joint
cavity and other surfaces indicated to prevent the sealant from adhering
to the surfaces covered by the bond preventive materials. The materials
shall be carefully applied to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or
breaking bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond-
preventive materials. At the option of the Contractor, backstop material
with bondbreaking characteristics may be installed in lieu of bond-
preventive materials specified.
F. Backstops: The back of bottom of joints constructed deeper than
indicated shall be packed tightly with backstop material to provide a joint
of the depth indicated.
G. Spillage. Do not allow sealants or caulking compounds to overflow or spill
onto adjoining surfaces.
H. Provide size and shape backer rod that will control joint depth for sealant
placing. Provide highly compressible backer to minimize possibility of
sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. Place the backer rod, which
will support sealant during application according to the above ratio Do
not puncture the closed cell structure of rod as bubbles could form and
migrate to the surface of sealant. Place the bond breaking tape at the
base of the slot to allow movement to be accommodated over the full
width of the sealant. Extrude the sealant firmly into the joint using gun to
ensure complete contact with the joint sides. The sealant will be
deposited in uniform and continuous ribbons without any gaps or air
pocket. Fill sealant rabbet to slightly concave surface, slightly below
adjoining surfaces. Fill joint to form slight cover, so joint will not trap
moisture and dirt. Do not allow sealant to overflow or spill onto adjoining
surfaces Excess sealant will be dry-wiped from all surfaces while still
uncured Remove tape immediately after filling joint with sealant.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING:
Clean and free from stains surfaces of all materials adjoining caulked or
sealed joints. Remove excess of caulking or sealant without damage to
adjoining surfaces, in accordance with the caulking or sealant manufacturer's
instructions
3.05 WARRANTY:
Include coverage for installed sealents and accessories which fail to achieve
airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or do not cure.
0706 BITUMINOUS FILM COATINGS
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
General:
A. This section deals with the cold application of bituminous coatings for
damp-proofing and protective purposes to the vertical surfaces of
perimeter foundations from approximately 150 mm above ground
level down to lap with vapour barrier approximately 250 mm below
finished ground.
B. Related works specified eisewhere:
1. Section 0302 - Concrete Work (Cast In Place & Pre-cast)
2. Section 0701 - Waterproofing and Damp-proofing Vapour

Barriers for Slabs
1.0 2 SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Client full details and
manufacturer's written literature for the material and application, before
materials are brought on site.
2.01 MATERIAL:
A. Reinforcing cloth.
Tyglass or Marglass 250 open weave fiberglass cloth
B. Coatings.
Foundation coating, brush grade as manufactured by Construction
Material Chemical Industries or similar approved by Client in writing.

3.01 Ensure that all holes, penetrations, cracks, defective joints and other
defects in surfaces to be coated have been made good and are properly
sealed. Remove dirt, grease and loosely adhering flakes of materials.
3.02 Apply primary coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
dry surfaces after concrete has fully cured. Lap to polyethylene vapour
barrier using reinforcement.
3.03 Prime Coat. High Penetration Asphalt primer at the rate of 2.5 liters
per 10m2.
3.04 Intermediate Coat: Foundation coating, brush grade at the rate of 7.50
liters per 10m2.
3.05 Final Coat: After previous coats are dry apply final application of
foundation coating. brush grade at the rate of 7.50 liters per 10m2.
Protection: When dry back-fill against bituminous film with clean sand well
watered down for optimum compaction.
0707 CONCRETE WATERPROOFING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
General:
This section pertains to the provisions of Cemtec, Colas or equivalent
waterproofing compound to concrete decks and dropped floor slabs. The
work under this section is intended to be overlaid, generally with cement
mortar bedding and tile work.
Exception:
This section does not include waterproofing to roof decks with habitable
spaces below or to faces of ground floor slab and foundations.
1.0 2 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit samples of proposed material, printed
specifications and application instructions before any material is brought
on site.
B. Manufacturer's Data:
Within 30 calendar days after award of contract submit:
1. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate
compliance with the specified requirements.
2. For information submit three copies of manufacturer's specifications,
label analysis and application instructions. Indicate by transmittal that
a copy of manufacturer's instructions has been distributed to the
applicator responsible for carrying out this work.
A. Ensure all surfaces to receive material are clean, dry and sound with no
deleterious adherences before any work under this section is commenced
.
B. Ensure work is not applied to surfaces when the ambient temperature is
above 35 Degree Centigrade.
C. Protect the work under this section from any damage and avoid
subsequent work for a period of not less than ten days.
D. The product specified under this section shall only be applied by
applicators with the written approval of the manufacturer holder of the
licensed trade mark and as approved by the Client.
2.01 MATERIAL:
Black P.U. liquid waterproofing membrane as manufactured by Construction
Material Chemical Industries (CMCI) or similar approved by Client in writing,

3.01 Surfaces to receive waterproofing under this section shall be free from
voids depressions, loose material or foreign matter.
3.02 Do not proceed with application under adverse conditions and
surfaces shall be thoroughly dry.
3.03 Prepare and prime surfaces to manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 Apply material to manufacturer's instructions to total thickness of
1.5mm (including prime coat). Water-proofing to be returned over the top
of floor slab 100mm high to the width of wall.
3.05 Protect all surface not intended to be coated against spatter.
DIVISION 8:
DOORS AND WINDOWS:
0801 Aluminum Doors and Frames.
0802 Aluminum Windows.
0803 Glazing and Mirrors.
0804 Wood Flush Doors.
0805 Finish Hardware.
0806 Steel Doors and Frames c/w lexan sheet.
0807 Garage Doors.
0801 ALUMINIUM DOORS AND FRAMES
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the furnishing and installation of aluminum doors and
frames and accessories
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Section 0802 Aluminum Windows.
2. Section 0803 Glazing
3. Section 0705 Joint Sealants
4. Section 0805 Finish Hardware
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:

A. Frames shall be constructed of extruded Aluminium alloy, with a
minimum wall thickness of 2.5mm.
B. Frames shall be 110mm wide with 150mm wide sill to patio doors.
C. Doors shall be equipped with flush type latching and locking hardware.
D. Each moving panel shall have two adjustable pre-assembled ball bearing
rollers in the sill section.
E. All open able doors shall have 125mm wide stiles and top rail, bottom rail
165mm.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Samples and drawings showing elevations, joints, glazing, frames,
method of operations and accessories.
2.01 GENERAL:
A. Aluminum doors and frames shall be the product of Alusco, Al wazzani
Salumco, Dhahran, Al Arabi or approved equivalent by the Client.
B. Units shall be suitable for receiving glazing as approved by Owner, or
specified on drawings.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Frames and door shall be of extruded aluminium alloy with a nominal wall
thickness of 2.5 mm and all aluminium extrusions shall have a powder
coated finish and the colour is to be confirmed by the Client.
B. Double sheet sliding aluminurn door with glass panel to be as specified
in Section 0803 – Glazing.
C. Door screen shall be fitted to exterior kitchen door and be full length
made of 2 mm thick aluminium frame wired with 18 x 16 mesh alurninium
cloth of colour to match with door frame.
D. Door and frames shall have manufacturer's standard weather stripping.
E. Submit samples of all extrusions and finishes to Client for approval.
F. All finish hardware shall be as specified in Section 0805 - Finish Hardware.

3.01 The Contractor shall ensure that door openings conform with
dimension and tolerances shown on the drawings.
3.02 Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of units,
hardware and fixing of frames into the wall.
3.03 Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames.
3.04 All joints of both frame and door shall be neatly fitted and secured in
a manner to utilize the full strength of the members connected and provide
a permanent watertight joint.
3.05 Provide non-setting mastic seals around frames and masonry.
3.06 Protect all frames during construction for finish, bending, scratching
and any other deformity.
3.07 Protect all aluminum doors and frames after manufacture in
accordance with manufacturers' recommendations.
0802 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PARTI – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the furnishings and installation of aluminum window
and accessories in the locations and quantities shown on the drawings.
1. Section 0801 - Aluminium Doors and Frames
2. Section 0803 - Glazing
3. Section 0705 - Joint Sealants
1.02 DESIGN CRITERIA:

A. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Hollow extrusions :± 0.25mm
2. Size Tolerances: Dimensions within 1.6mm.
B. Quality Control:
1. Air infiltration test: Window units when tested shall have a maximum
infiltration of 0.6 liters per sec, per meter (Grade A) crack length, when
the differential pressure is held at not less than 150 Pa.
2. Water Penetration Test: Window units when tested shall have no
water penetration for 15 minutes when subjected to a rate of flow of
0.203 m/min./m2 with a differential pressure across window unit of
300 Pa.
3. Window Load Test: Window units when tested for a minimum 800 Pa
positive and negative load for 10 seconds shall have a maximum
deformation of frame on sash member 002 times the span length with
no damage to fasteners or hardware.
4. All operable windows shall be designed so that exterior glazed
surfaces can be readily cleaned from inside.
5. Sliding windows shall be designed so that accumulation of dust and
sand does not impair operation and the tracks can be easily cleaned.
6. All operable windows shall have provision for rust proof (optional)
insect screens, removable from the inside and supplied by the owner.
Allow for track for future fit by the new owner.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Client for approval powder coated
samples (colour to be confirmed by Client) of corner assembly for each
type and accessories.
B. Shop drawings showing elevations and details for each different type of
window and frame.
0802 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS
2.01 GENERAL:
All aluminum windows shall be the product of Alusco, Al wazzani, Salunico,
Dhahran, Al Arabi or approved equivalent by the Client.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Aluminum window members shall be extruded aluminum alloy Frame
and sash members shall have a nominal wall thickness of 2.5mm.
B. All sash shall be carefully machine fitted to hairline joinery standards,
mechanically assembled with screws end sealed in all joints, with
appropriate neoprene or similar joint sealant. Sash shall be equipped
with adjustable rollers. All screws fasteners and accessories shall be
non- corrosive material compatible with aluminum; stainless steel will
generally be considered suitable.
C. Glazing shall be double as approved by owner and in accordance with
Section 0803.
D. Weather strip material shall be neoprene or EPDM compatible with
aluminum. Weld corners of weather strips.
E. Windows shall be provided with a heavy duty finger touch spring
loaded positive lock latch (Germany made).
F. Frames and door shall be of extruded aluminium alloy with a nominal
wall thickness of 2.5mm and all aluminium extrusions shall have
powder coated finish as described in Section 0801.
G. Window screens shall be fitted to all windows and be full length made
of 2 mm thick powder coated aluminium frames wired with 18 x 16
mesh aluminium cloth of colour to match with window frames.
0802 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS

3.01 Comply with manufacturer's instruction for installation of units,
hardware and other components.
3.02 Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or crack of frames
or sash.
3.03 Anchor frames solidly to surrounding construction to prevent
distortion or misalignment.
3.04 Adjust movable units to operate smoothly and to be weather tight
when closed.
3.05 Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3.06 Provide non-setting mastic seals around frames and masonry.
3.07 Protect all aluminum windows after manufacture in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations.
3.08 Test installed windows for leak with field water penetration flood test.
0803 GLAZING AND MIRRORS
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the products, materials, execution and workmanship
of glazing and all associated accessories.
1. Section 0705 - Joint Sealants.
2. Section 0801 - Aluminum Doors And Frames.
3. Section 0802 - Aluminum Windows.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The contractor shall submit samples of each type of glass, glazing
compound, sealants mirror frames and accessories.
B. Certification from the manufacturer stating that all glass is in accordance
with the provisions of the specifications.
2.01 GLASS:
A. All glass shall bear the label of the manufacturer American glasses, Al
Zamil and shall conform in all respects with the requirements of the
specifications.
B. Double glazed window units to be reflective glass, 6 mm to exterior, 6 mm
clear float to interior with 12 mm dried air space in between. Glass for
bathrooms to be double glazed obscured (only one pane of glass to be
obscured).
C. All exterior double sheet sliding aluminum doors, with glass panel on
both sides.
D. Fixed window for stairs shall be 190 x 190 x 80mm glass blocks.
E. Safety glass shall be used for all human impact situations. (Safety glass is
required in all windows where glazing is located less than 800mm above
FFL).
F. Mirrors shall be 6 mm float glass with high quality silvering and copper
based electro depositing protective coating Seal backs with compatible
polyurethane seat coat Mirrors to be set in stainless steel frames.
2.02 Glazing gasket channels and beads of flexible vinyl EPDM or neoprene
for all glass to be framed in aluminum shall be the standard products
furnished by the door and window manufacturer to fit their frames and the
glass thickness detailed. All junctions and corners shall be welded.
2.03 Tapes and setting blocks shall be neoprene.
2.04 Glazing compound shall be as recommended by the glass
manufacturer for the intended application.

3.01 Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, Pieces
which have significant impact damage at edges, scratches or abrasions of
faces, or any other evidence of damage shall not be installed.
3.02 Measure all openings and cut glass and make double glazing units
accurately to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances.
3.03 Clean and remove protective coatings which may cause adhesion
failure or interfere with bond sealants.
3.04 Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of
uniformity in appearance. Face all glass, which has dissimilar faces with
matching faces in the same direction.
3.05 Mirrors shall generally be fixed as indicated on the drawings. In all
cases mirrors shall be spaced away from backing by at least 1.5 mm using
inert P.V.C setting strips at fixing points.
3.06 Use masking tape.
0804 WOOD DOORS
PART I- GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. This section covers the furnishing and installation of wood doors, frames
and accessories, in location and quantities shown on the drawings and as
required.
1. Section 0601 Carpentry and Millwork
2. Section 0801 Aluminium Doors and Frames
3. Section 0805 Finish Hardware
4. Section 0903 Painting
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner/Consultant a sample of each

type of door and copies of manufacturer's technical specifications
including installation instructions.
0804 WOOD DOORS
PART II - PRODUCTS:
2.0 1 MATERIALS:
General:
All goods and products shall be as detailed on drawings and from reputable
manufacturer approved by Client. The Client will select the design in the
workshop drawings. (manufacturer: AI Bawardi or approval equal).
2.0 2 WOOD DOORS:
A. Mahogany semi-solid timber panel and solid wood frame with
architraves for doors. At the locations indicated on the drawings.
B. Flush door (60%) and solid wood frame with architraves for doors, at the
locations indicated on the drawings.
C. All wooden doors for toilets and bathrooms shall be laminated with
Formica sheets all the entire intenor surface (Inner side) of the door.
D. Completed doors shall be sound, rigid and free from defects and warp.
All edges shall be aligned and smooth Doors shall be a minimum
thickness of 44 mm.
E. The width of the lipping shall equal the thickness of the door and the
lipping itself shall not be less than 10 mm thick. Lipping's shall be glued
to the core. Where edges are required to be rebated the lipping shall be
a minimum of 30 mm thick and the rebate shall be formed in the lipping.
F. Joints shall be close fitting, hardwood dowelled or mortised framed and
of strength to maintain the structural properties of members connected,
All adjoining faces and edges shall be flush and smooth.
G. Edges shall be rectangular and solid except that the leading edge shall be
beveled from front to back. Rebated edges shall be at least 13 mm deep.
H. Adhesives: all adhesives shall be waterproof, melamine fortified urea
type.
I. Door frames shall be of quality grade wood of same species and as
detailed on the drawings, Refer to Section 0601.
J. All locks shall be as specified in Section 0805 - Finish Hardware.
0804 WOOD DOORS

PART III -EXECUTION:
3.01 Contractor shall verily that door frames are of the type required for
proper installation of doors in their respective locations.
3.02 Doors shall be installed in strict conformance with the door
manufacturer's written Instructions.
3.03 Do not install doors in frames which would hinder the operation of the
doors.
3.04 Install all finish hardware as recommended by the hardware
manufacturer.
0805 FINISH HARDWARE
PART I- GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTIDN:
A. Work Included:
This section covers the installation of all finish hardware's such as
door locksets, door stops, cabinet handle and door hardware.
1. Section 0102 Quality Control
2. Section 0602 Cabinet Work
3. Section 0801 Aluminium Doors and Frames
4. Section 0804 Wood Flush Doors

A. Manufacturer's unless otherwise approved obtain each kind of
hardware i.e. latch and locksets, hinges, closer etc from one supplier
only. Although several may offer products complying with the
specified requirements.
B. Unless otherwise indicated or directed the colour of white powder
coated for aluminium work and satin stainless steel or chrome finish
hardware for wooden doors shall match that of the door they are
mounted.
C. Codes and Standards:
ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
156.1 - For butt hinges.
1562 - Locks and lock trim.
156.3 - Exit device.
156.3 - Auxiliary locks and associated products.
156.13 - Mortise locks and latches.
156 16 - Auxiliary hardware.

1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
Submit samples of materials and manufacturer's literature indicating details
of material and installation instructions.
2.01 Materials:
A. All materials and accessories shall be the product of a manufacturer and

supplier regularly engaged in the same (Manufacturer: YALE or approval
equal).
The required type of finish hardware and relaled ilems shall include but
not be limited to the following:
1. Hinges.
2. Lock cylinders and keys.
3. Lock and latch sets.
4. Door closers.
5. Door stoppers and door bumpers.
6. Thresholds.
7. Weather strips and seals.
8. Door trims and units.
B. Hardware products and manufacturers:
1. Wood Door Hardware (Except bedrooms):
a. 1½ pairs of stainless steel (butt.) hinges 3.5° x 3.5° Yale SS grade

(A).
b. Mortise lock.
c. Single level, hand door (Italia).
d. Door stop.
2. Wood Door Hardware (For Bedrooms):
a. 1½ pairs of stainless steel (butt.) hinges 3.5° x 3.5° Yale SS grade (A).
b. Door stop.
c. Mortise lock.
d. Single level, hand door (Italia).
3. Aluminum Door Hardware:
a. 1½ pairs of stainless steel Dr Hahn hinges 3.5° x 3.5° .

b. Door stop.
c. Marble threshold with weather strip.
d. CES lock and cylinder
e. Single level, hand door (Italia).
4. Wood Door Hardware (Toilet and bathroom):
a. 1½ pairs of stainless steel (butt.) hinges 3.5° x 3.5° Yale SS grade (A).
b. Door slop.
c. Mortise lock.
d. Single level, hand door (Italia).
e. Marble threshold with weather strip.
5. Mail Box:
a. 300 x 300 x 150 mm stainless steel mail box, 1 mm thick with mirror
finish.
b. Posting slot on outside, with name card holder, key operated at the
side.
3.01 Co-ordinate with other relevant sections as required to ensure proper

and adequate provision in door for installation of the finish hardware in
the required location.
3.02 Prior to installation, inspect location of all hardware and verify that all
necessary provisions have been made. Do not proceed with installation in
areas of discrepancies until they have been resolved.
3.03 Install all finish hardware with matching screws in the quantities and
location shown on the drawings and in full accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations install hardware firmly in place for long
life under the anticipated usage.
3.04 Install each item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations. Whenever cutting and fitting is required to install
hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished
in another way, co-ordinate of removal, storage and reinstallation or
application of surface protection with finishing work elsewhere.
3.05 Set units plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the
attachment substrate as necessary for proper Installation and operation.
Separate aluminum and other corridible metal surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials
Drill and countersink units which are factory prepared for anchorage
fasteners Space fasteners and anchors in accordance With
manufacturer's instructions or as directed.
3.06 Locks and Latches:
A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, provide latches that
comply with ANSI 156.2.
B. Strikes: provide manufacture’s standard wrought box strike for
each latch, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finish to
match hardware set.
C. Lock Throw, provide 16 mm minimum throw of latch on pairs of
doors.
3.07 Lock Cylinders and Keying:
A. Standard system: the Contractor shall submit to Owner/Consultant
and approval a keying system for the buildings The keying system
shall be designed in order to provide the utmost convenience,
safety and security of SAUDI ARAMCO in use of the premises.
B. Metal: construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless
steel or nickel silver.
C. Key Material, provide keys of nickel silver.
D. Key Quantity: furnish 3 keys for each locks.
E. Provide each cylinder with series 1000: Escutcheon rose knob and
outside in chrome plated metal.
=== End Section ===
0806 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
Extent of standard steel external doors and frames is shown and
scheduled on drawings, for main entrance, family entrance, kitchen
service and roof deck access doors.
(Note: Aluminum door for roof central heater room).
o Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute
“Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames”
(SDI-100) and as herein specified.
o Manufacturer: Provide standard steel doors and frames by a local
manufacturer approved by the Client Representative and
specialising in production of this type of work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
o Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication
and installation, including data substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
o Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel
construction, location and installation requirements of finish
hardware and reinforcements. and details of joints and
connections, Show anchorage and accessory items.
o Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference details
and openings as those on contract drawings.
o Samples: Full range of colour samples for Owner/Consultant
selection; 2 samples, 6" square min. of each colour and texture
selected for factory finished doors and frames.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
o Deliver doors cartoned or crated to provide protection during
transit and job storage.
o Inspect doors upon delivery for damage, Minor damages may be
repaired provided finished items are equal in all respects to new
work and acceptable to Owner/Consultant; otherwise, remove and
replace damaged items as directed.
o Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on
wood sills at least 4” high, or otherwise store on floors in manner
that will prevent rust or damage, Avoid use of non-vented plastic
or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If
cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton
immediately. Provide ¼” spacers between stacked doors to
promote air circulation.

PART II- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Galvanised Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial
quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill
phosphatised.
Steel door(s) and frame with decorative grille work and break-resistant
plastic panel (Lexan) rover for main/ family entrance doors, service doors,
guest entrance gate and family entrance gate.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gauge galvanized sheet
material.
Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized items to be built into exterior
walls. Complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
Shop Applied Paint:
Primer: Rust-Inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable
as a base for specified finish paints.
Finish, Manufacturer's standard baking epoxy or enamel paint.
Manufacturer: AI dress or approval equal.
2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL:
 Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and
free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble
units in manufacturer’s plant Clearly identify work that cannot be
permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper
assembly at project site.
 Fabricate exterior doors, panels and frames from galvanized sheet steel.
Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door
construction or by addition of inverted steel channels.
 Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat
Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts.
 Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive
mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish
Hardware Schedule and provided by hardware supplier Comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI A 115 series specifications for door and
frame preparation for hardware.
 For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing
and provisions for fastening to top rail of doors or head of frames, as
applicable.
 Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling
and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project
site.
 Locate finish hardware as Shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown,
in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware",
published by Door and Hardware Institute.
Shop Painting:
 Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units,
including galvanized surfaces.
 Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign
materials before application of paint.
 Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly
finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
 Apply finish coal to doors Indicated as prefinished by electrostatically
spraying and baking, to produce a paint thickness of 1.25 mils.

3.01 INSPECTION:
The Contractor must examine substrate and conditions under which steel
doors and frames are to be installed and must notify the
Owner/Consultant In writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of work, Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General, Install steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance
with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as here in
specified.
B. Placing Frames' Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended
Erection Instructions For Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.
In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and
strike levels.
C. Door Installation: Fit steel doors accurately in frames, within
clearances specified in SDI-100.
D. Adjust and Clean: Prime cost touch up immediately after erection,
sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply
touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove
protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors.
Final Adjustments Check and readjust operating finish hardware
Items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and
proper operating condition.

0807 GARAGE DOORS
PART I- GENERAL:

A. Work Included:
This section covers the furnishing and installation of the Sectional
garage door and all accessories.
1. Section 0705 Joint Sealants
2. Section 1601 Electrical Works
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
All technical brochures, colour samples and shop drawings.
0807 GARAGE DOORS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. The sectional garage door to be supplied by a local manufacturer
approved by the Client Representative (Manufacturer: AI dress or
approval equal).
B. The door is to be remote controlled with manual operation in case of
power failure The motor shall have a built-in auto reverse safety feature.
C. The door shall be factory painted to colour selected by Client
Representative.
D. The motor must be American manufacturer with ¾ hours capacity or
equally approved.
0807 GARAGE DOORS
PART III- EXECUTION:
3.01 The Contractor shall ensure that the door opening conforms to the
dimensions shown on the drawings.
3.02 The door, frame motors etc. shall be fixed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's Instructions.
DIVISION 9:
FINISHES:
0901 Solid Plaster Rendering Stucco Work.

0902 Tiling.
0903 Painting.
0904 Gypsum Wallboard and Ceiling System.
0905 Metal Stud and Ceiling Support Systems.
0906 Marble and Granite Tiling.
0901 SOLID PLASTER RENDERING STUCCO WORK
PART 1- GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the finishing and installation of all internal and
external cement plaster, metal lath and accessories, to complete the
work as indicated on the drawings.
1. Section 0402 Concrete Unij Masonry.
2. Section 0705 Joint Sealant.
3. Section 0903 Painting.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit one sample of each accessory and
manufacturer’s specification and installation instructions for each
plaster accessory required for Client's review and approval before any
material is purchased.
B. The Contractor shall submit for Owner's review and approval two
finished samples of each plaster onto a typical background measuring
not less than one meter square.
PART II- PRODUCTS:
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All goods and products shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacture of all plastering constituents and accessories
including metal lath.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Metal Lath:
1. Where detailed and where required to ensure high standards,
galvanized steel sellf-furring lath weighting 1.5 Kg/m2 for exterior
stucco. Staggered Identifications spaced 88mm part horizontally and
50mm apart vertically hold the body of the lath not less than 6mm
away from the wall.
B. Wire Ties:
Soft annealed galvanized steel wire, not less than 1.5mm (16 gauge) for
tying metal lath to anchor.
C. Plaster Accessories:
1. Corner Beads' Galvanized steel short flange, spring fit angle weighing
75 Kg/300 linear meter.
2. Casing Beads' Galvanized steel of weight 110 Kgl1000 linear meter.
3. Expansion control Joints' Galvanized steel bellows types with
expansion flanges weighing 140 Kg/300 m2.
D. Cement Plaster:
1. Cement As per Portland Cement Section 0303.
2. Aggregate: Aggregate shall be clean, hard, durable, sharp particles
completely free from all deleterious salts.
3. Lime: Lime shall be hydrated finished lime; Lime shall not be used for
exterior plaster.
4. Water shall be potable, clean and free from deleterious amounts of
oils, salts, alkali, organic matter and other harmful materials.
5. Mix Proportions shall be one (1) part cement, four (4) parts sand and
one half (1/2) part hydrated lime.
PART III-EXECUTION:
Note: Allow different thickness of the plaster for decorative panels as shown the
drawing.
3.01 Ensure that all required and necessary insulation has been installed to
building surfaces, pipe and other items.
3.02 Install plaster accessories to plaster bases of substrates with
galvanized fasteners.
3.03 Plaster for exterior surfaces shall consist of three-coat work 19mm
thickness finished with a fine wood float.
3.04 Plaster for interior surfaces of masonry walls to be plastered shall be
not less than two coats for thicknesses up to 12mm thickness and three
coat work for thicknesses above 12mm and up to 15mm thickness, Top
coat shall be best quality Gypsum and fine sharp sand plaster mixed to
manufacturers recommendations.
3.05 Each coat of cement plaster shall be kept continuously moist for a
minimum of 48 hours after application and shall be protected from direct
sunlight for not less than 7 days.
3.06 On surfaces where plaster is to be applied over two differing materials
(e.g. concrete block and poured-in-place concrete and around door,
window and arched openings) a strip of metal lath shall be located at the
abutting edge to prevent future plaster cracking. The overlap on each side
shall be at least 100mm.
3.07 All plastering shall be done when the temperature is between 13
Degree Centigrade and 35 Degree Centigrade. No plastering shall be done
when the temperature is above 35 Degree Centigrade.
3.08 Finished doors, window frames, all aluminum and other surfaces
which do not receive a plaster finish shall be protected during plaster
application.
3.09 3mm thick finishing Coat of gypsum to be applied to all plasterboard
surfaces to walls.
3.010 Plaster for interior surface to underside of concrete floor and roof
slabs to be three coats to thickness 15mm finished smooth to received
texture coating finish (see Section 0903).
0902 TILING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. General:
This section covers the provision and installation of all floor and wall tiling
as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1. Section 0707 Concrete Waterproofing
2. Section 0901 Solid Plaster Rendering Stucco Work
3. Section 0903 Painting
4. Section 0904 Gypsum Wallboard and Ceiling Systems.
5. Section 1001 Bathroom Fixtures
6. Section 1002 Bathroom Accessories
A. Manufacturer:
The products used in the work of this section shall be produced by
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products
and with a history of production and quality acceptable to the
Owner/Consultant.
The quality, colour and design shall be established by samples supplied by
the Contractor and approved in writing by the Owner/Consultant, and it
shall be no less quality than the material specified in part II- PRODUCTS of
this section.
B. Installer:
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained
and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar
with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper
performance of the work in this section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
1. Samples:
Within 30 days of contract award, submit complete samples of the
complete range of colours and patterns of tiles from the range 01at least
one manufacturer. Not less
than two different colour-ways shall be submitted from both wall and
floor tile range, Each colour-way shall also be capable of being supplied
with all ceramic accessones.
2. Shop Drawings:
Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, penmeter conditions,
junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion Joints,
thresholds, accessories, and setting details.
1.04 STANDARDS:
The standard required to be met in this section shall be those as defined, and
set out in the Tile Council of America Inc. – “American National Standard
Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tiles".
Ceramic Wall Tiling to: ANSI A108.4.
Ceramic Floor Tiling to: ANSI A108.1.
0902 TILING
PART II -PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. All materials shall be new and the best "Grade One" of their respective
kinds and shall be manufactured by Saudi Ceramics, RAK or approved
equal.
1. Bathrooms & toilets, kitchen, dirty kitchen & store, laundary room,
maid's room, water heater and store room:
a. 300 x 300 x 8 mm, 300 x 600 x 8 mm, 200 x 200 x 8 mm or 400
x400 x 8 mm un-glazed (non-slip) ceramic tiles for floor.
b. 300 x 600 x 6 mm, 200 x 200 x 6 mm or 600 x 600 x 6 mm ceramic
tiles for wall (For bathroom, toilet and wash areas).
c. 300 x 100 mm high ceramic tile skirting.
d. Colour and decorative design for ceramic tiles to be selected by
Owner.
2. Ground floor, first floor and roof deck floor area (Except above
mentioned areas).
a. 400 x 400 x 8 mm or 800 x 800 x 8 mm unglazed ceramic tiles for
floor.
b. 400 x 100 mm high ceramic tile skirting.
c. Colour and decorative design for ceramic tiles to be selected by
Owner.
3. Staircase and landing:
a. 30mm thick marble for stair landing.
b. 30mm thick marble for steps with three cut grooves behind 6mm
radius rounded edges and 20mm thick marble riser.
c. 20 mm thick x 100mm high marble skirting.
d. Marble material from grade A or B (refer to section 0906).
4. Roof Deck and Upper Roof Deck area:
a. 250 x 250 x25mm Terrazo tiles for roof deck floor.
b. Gravel ballast finish for upper roof deck floor.
5. Main/Family/Service entrance area:
a. 400 x 400 x 20 mm marble tile (Cecilian /gemco/ omani or other
equal marble tiles).
b. 100 mm marble skirting.
c. Granite material from grade A or B (refer to section 0908).
B. Bedding screed shall be 1:3 cement, sand mixed with latex.
C. Cement based adhesive use "Iaticrete" 4237 or similar approved.
D. Grout for wall and floor tiles shall be of matching colour according
10approved samples submitted by Contractor, Grout shall be pre-mixed
as Balfloor/Balwall or equal approved The Contractor to submit
manufacturer's full technical data for approval of the Owner/Consultant.
E. Approved material to be used for installation of wall and floor tiles shall
be mixed and used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written
recommendations.
2.02 EXTRA STOCK:
Upon completion of this section. deliver to Owner an extra stock of one
carton of not less than 25 pieces of each colour and type of tile used in the
building, including all trims and accessories.
0902 TILING
PART III-EXECUTION:
2.01 INSPECTION:
Examine the areas to be done under this section and ensure that all
preceding and preparatory work of other sections IS complete and
satisfactory, Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of the work, Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have
been achieved.
2.02 INSTALLATION:
Note: Allow for minimal cutting ot tiles on the location of the floor tiling
around drains and wall tiling around sockets, etc.
A. Floors:
Proceed with laying in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and quoted standard all as approved by the
Owner/Consultant. Lay bedding screed to entire area with 10 mm
Foam Polystyrene full depth perimeter breaker strip, carefully
maintaining levels and falls where necessary and where indicated to
fall drains. Before bedding has set while still plastic dust with neat
cement, spray fine mist of latex fixative and lay tiles to line, tamping
them to form a firm bond true to levels and falls as indicated avoiding
all Voids under tiles Maintain joints and insert temporary spacer in full
depth of expansion and control joints, Any hollowness, hair cracks,
chips will not be accepted and shall be immediately replaced A water
flow test is to be carried out prior to grouting of tiles.
B. Walls:
Wall tiling shall generally be by the adhesive method Set out to allow
for sanitary fixtures and bathroom accessories. Spread adhesive on
surface to be tiled with notched trowel of type recommended by the
manufacturer for the surface and type of tile. Cover surface uniformly
without bare spots. Apply adhesive only in areas which can be covered
with tile before the adhesive "films" over. Remove any adhesive that
films over and refloat with fresh adhesive. Fastening heads for
Gypsum Linings shall be covered directly with adhesive and tile with
no finishing compound Refer Section 0905.
C. Grout wall and floor tiles without joint voids or skips, with neat grout
(colour to be approved), of creamy consistency, rub well-in and polish
off Clean off grout to depth of shoulder of cushion edge. Rake-out
perimeter joints subsequently to receive sealant of matching colour.
D. Movement joints shall be sealed and caulked using silicone at top and
bottom of walls, at fillings, at doors and window frames, and
polysulphide for floor, strictly according to the Manufacturer’s written
recommendation and to Section 0705 Use backing breaker strip or
foam polyethylene backing rod to sealed joints.
E. On completion keep tiles moist for 72 hours. Clean off tiles if
necessary on unglazed tiles only using 1:10 dilution of Muriatic Acid at
least 10 days after grouting but only under written approval of the
Owner/Consultant. Neutralize, polish and leave clean for final
inspection.
F. Avoid usage of tiles less than half tile width.
G. All floors are 10be water tested for level and water tightness.
H. Selling of Ceramic Floor Tile:
Floor tile shall be set generally as for wail tile and in accordance with
ANSI A108.2, Use Portland cement mortar setting for floors on
substrates, Use commercial grout for grouting wall and floor tiles.
Colour pigment shall be mineral oxide unaffected by lime, cement or
weathering.
Tile shall be pressed and beaten into position to obtain full contact
with mortar bed with no Voids in the mortar.
If tile is rib-backed, a layer of mortar shall be troweled on the back of
each tile prior to placing on the mortar bed.
Paper and glue shall be removed within one hour after tile is set and
all tiles that are out of line or level shall then be adjusted.
Colour of the tile shall be determined by the Owner or his
representative.
0903 PAINTING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
Paint and finish all exterior and interior exposed surfaces listed on the
Painting Schedule in Part 3 of this Section, in accordance with the types
of finish shown on the Finish Schedules in the Drawings and as specified
herein.
B. Related works described elsewhere:
Priming or priming and finishing of certain surfaces are specified to be
factory performed or installer performed under pertinent other sections.
C. Work not included:
1. Do not include painting which is specified under other sections.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in
concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, pipe
spaces, and duct shafts, Inside of service rooms and cupboards will be
finished.
3. Metal surfaces of Powder Coated aluminium, stainless steel.
chromium plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials will not
require painting under this Section except as may be specified herein.
4. Do not paint any moving surfaces of parts of operating units,
mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators, linkages, sink
ages. sensing devices, and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Do not paint over any required labels or equipment identification,
performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
D. Definitions:
The term "paint", as used herein, means all coating systems materials
including primers, emulsions, rubber finish, epoxy, enamels, sealers,
fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate,
or finish coats.
A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section.
B. Qualifications of Manufacturer' Products used in the work of this section
shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of
similar Items and with a history of successful production acceptable to
the Client.
C. Qualification of Workmen:
1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of the work of this Section, who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the specified requirements and the materials and methods
needed for their execution, and who shall direct all work performed
under this Section.
2. Provide adequate numbers of workmen skilled in the necessary crafts
and properly informed of the methods and materials to be used.
3. In acceptance or rejection of the work of this Section, the Client will
make no allowance for lack of skill on the part of workmen.
D. Paint Coordination:
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coots used.
2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying
the prime coats to be used and ensuring compatibility of the total
coating system for the various substrata.
3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the
specific finish materials to ensure that compatible prime coats are
used.
4. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers, or remove the
primer and reprime as required.
5. Notify the Client in writing of anticipated problems in using the
specified coating systems over prime-coating supplied under other
Sections.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General:
Comply with provisions of Section 1
B. Manufacturers' Data:
Within 30 calendar days after award of the Contract, submit:
1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and
installed under this Section.
2. Manufactures' specifications and other data required to
demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements.
3. For information only submit three copies of the manufacturers'
specifications, including paint label analysis and application
instructions for each materials specified. Indicate by transmittal
that a copy of each manufacturer's instructions has been
distributed to the applicator.
Upon receipt of review comments, make all revisions and
corrections, and resubmit if so required.
C. Samples:
1. Following the selection of colours and finish by the Client, as
described In Paragraph 2.10, below, submit samples for the Client's
review.
a. Provide three samples of each colour and each finish for each
material on which the finish is specified to be applied. These
samples also become a guide for establishing acceptability of
surface textures.
b. Except as otherwise directed by the Client samples shall be
approximately 20cm x 25cm.
c. If so directed by the Client, submit samples during progress of the
work of this Section in the form of actual application of the
approved materials on actual surfaces to be painted.
2. Revise and resubmit each sample as requested until the required
finish, colour, and texture are achieved Such samples when approved,
shall constitute standards for colour and finish for acceptance or
rejection of completed work.
A. Delivery of Materials:
Deliver all materials to the job site in original, new and unopened
containers bearing the
Manufacturer’s name and label showing the following information:
1. Name of title of material.
2. Fed. spec, number, if applicable.
3. Manufacturer's stock number.
4. Manufacturer's name.
5. Contents by volume for major constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Application instructions.
8. Date of Manufacture/Shelf Life.
B. Storage of Materials:
Provide proper storage to prevent damage to; and deterioration of, paint
materials.
C. Protection:
Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before,
during, and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all
other trades.
D. Replacement:
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Client and at no additional cost to the
Client.
A. Surface Temperatures:
Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to
be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are below 7 Degree
Centigrade or above 35 Degree Centigrade, unless otherwise permitted
by the manufacturer's printed instructions as approved by the Owner.
B. Weather Conditions:
Do not apply paint In Dust Storms, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative
humidity exceeds 65%. or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise
permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions as approved by the
Client. Application may be continued during inclement weather within
the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
0903 PAINTING
PART II- PRODUCTS:
2.01 PAINT MATERIALS:
A. Design is based on use for texture coatings and paint products

manufactured by JOTUN PAINTS LTD, Equal products of other
manufacturers approved in advance by the Client, may be substituted
in accordance with the provisions of Section on Substitutions.
B. General:
Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as
regularly manufactured by paint materials manufacturer's approved
by the Client. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's
identification as a standard best-grade product will not be acceptable.
C. Durability:
Provide paints of durable and washable quality. Do not use paint
materials which will not withstand normal washing as required to
remove pencil marks. ink, ordinary Soil, and similar material without
showing discolouration, loss of gloss, staining, or other damage.
D. Colours and Glosses: Clear varnish finishes:
1. The Client will select colours to be used in the various types of paint
and will be the sole judge of acceptability of the various glosses
obtained from materials proposed to be used by the Contractor.
2. Colour Schedules: The Client will prepare a Colour schedule with
samples for the guidance of the painter and reserves the right to
select, allocate, and vary colours on different surfaces throughout
buildings, subject to the following limitations.
3. Exterior Work: A maximum of 5 different dark tones shall be
allowed with variations for trim, doors, miscellaneous woods, and
metal work. Use only light and alkali proof pigments.
4. Interior Work: A maximum of 8 different pigmented colours will be
used with variations for trim and wall surfaces, Ceilings shall be
white Wood trim shall be finished where directed in clear e.g.,.
polyurethane varnish.
5. Darktones: Approximately 15% of all in tenor colours will be deep
darktones but will be subject to Client's specific instruction.
E. Undercoats and Thinners: Provide undercoat paint produced by the
same manufacturer as the finish coat. Use only the thinners
recommended by the paint manufacturer. And use only to the
recommended limits. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coal,
and thinner material as parts of unified systems of paint finish.
F. Standards' Provide paint materials which meet or exceed the Paint
Industry standards.
2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT:
A. General:
For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as
recommended tor application of the particular paint by the
manufacturer of the particular paint, and as approved by the Client.
B. Compatibility:
Prior to actual use of application equipment, use all means necessary
to verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible With the
material to be applied and that the integrity of the finish will not be
jeopardized by use of the proposed application equipment.
All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete
and proper Installation of the work of this Section, shall be new, first-
quality of their respective kinds, and as selected by the contractor subject
to the approval of the Client.
0904 PAINTING
PART III-EXECUTION:
3.01 SURFACE:
A. Inspection: Prior to Installation of the work of this Section, carefully
inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such
work is complete to the point where this Installation may properly
commence. Verify that painting may be completed in strict accordance
with the original design and with the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by the Client. Ensure that high levels
of lighting are provided to allow at any time detailed inspection 0/
surfaces and proper conditions for application.
B. Discrepancies: Do not proceed in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been /fully resolved.
3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION:
A. General:
1. Mix and prepare painting materials In strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Client.
2. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.
3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of
paint In a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue.
B. Stirring: Stir all materials before application to produce a mixture of
uniform density, and as required during the application of materials
Do not stir into the material any film which may form on the surface.
Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION:
A. General:
1. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures in strict
accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations as
approved by the Clients.
2. Remove all removable items which are in place and are not
scheduled to receive paint finish, or provide surface-applied
protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations.
3. Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the
removed items by using workmen skilled in the necessary trades.
4. Clean each surface to be painted until they are completely free
from dirt, dust, laitance, oil, grease and loose materials prior to
applying paint or surface treatment
5. Remove oil and grease with clean clothes and cleaning solvents of
low toxicity and a flash point in excess of 38 Degree Centigrade,
prior to start of mechanical cleaning.
6. Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust & other
contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall into wet newly
painted surfaces.
B. Preparation of Wood Surfaces:
1. Clean all wood surfaces until they are free from dirt, oil ,and all
other foreign substance.
2. Smooth all finished wood surfaces exposed to view, using the
proper sandpaper Where so required, use varying degrees of
coarseness In sandpaper to produce a uniformly smooth and
unmarred wood surface.
3. Unless specifically approved by the Client, do not proceed with
painting of wood surfaces until the moisture content of the wood
is 12% or less as measured by dry-weight process or a moisture-
meter approved by the Client.
C. Preparation of Metal Surfaces:
1. Thoroughly clean all surfaces until they are completely free from
dirt, oil, and grease.
2. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the Initial cleaning and then
treat the surface thoroughly with phosphoric acid, etc., remove all
etching solution before proceeding.
3. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint.
3.04 PAINT APPLICATION:
Note: Application is as per manufacturer's recommendation and
specification.
A. General:
1. Touch-up all shop-applied prime coats which have been damaged
and touch-up all bare areas prior to start of finish coats
applications.
2. Slightly vary the shade of succeeding coats, Do not apply additional
coats until the completed coat has been Inspected and approved,
only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered
in determining the number of coats applied.
3. Sand and dust between enamel coats to remove all defects visible
to the unaided eye from distance of five feet.
4. On all screw- fix removable panels and all hinged panels, paint the
back sides to match the exposed sides.
B. Drying:
1. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, Modify the period as
recommended by the material manufacturer to suit adverse
weather conditions.
2. Oil-base oleo-resinous solvent-type paints shall be considered dry
for re-coating when the paint feels firm does not deform or feel
sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb, and the application
of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion
of the undercoat.
C. Brush Application: Brush-out and work all brush coals onto the
surfaces in an even film. Cloudness, spoiling, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections will not
be acceptable.
D. Spray Application:
1. Confine spray application to metal framework and similar
surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior.
2. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide
the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats, Do not double back
with spray equipment for the purpose of building up film
thickness of two coats in one pass.
E. Completed work shall match the approved sample for colour,
texture, and coverage Remove, refinish, or re-paint all work not in
compliance with specified requirements.
3.05 PAINTING SCHEDULE:
A. General:
Painting required under this Section is called for on the drawings,
Paint types or equal are defined below.
B. Exterior Metal:
1. First Coat, Zinc Phosphate Primer
2. Second Coat Polyamide Epoxy Enamel
3. Third Coat: Urethane Epoxy Enamel
C. Interior Finish:
1. On wall surfaces all areas:
a. First Coat: Primer
b. Second Uotun-"Fenomastic" paint or similarly approved by

Coat: client
c. Third Coat: Uotun- “Fenomasiic” paint or Similarly approved by

client
2. On ceilings to all areas:


Coat: client

client
3. On Gypsum Board:

Coat: client

client
4. On metal, use:
a. First Coat: Zinc phosphate pnmer
b. Second Alkyd Undercoat
Coat:
c. Third Coat: Alkyd semi- glossy enamel
D. Exterior Finish:
1. On walls of building:
b. Second Uotun-profile Decor or similarly approved by client

Coat:
c. Third Coat: Uotun- profile Decoror Similarly approved by client
2. Exterior of boundary wall:

b. Second Uotun-profile Decor or similarly approved by client

Coat:
c. Third Coat: Uotun- profile Decoror Similarly approved by client
3. Interior of boundary wall:

b. Second Uotun Heavytex (hopper gun pressed) or equal

Coat: approved by client
c. Third Coat: Uotun Heavytex (hopprt gun pressed) or equal

approved by client
E. Miscellaneous Surfaces and procedures:

1. Exposed Mechanical Items:
a. Electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts,
grilles, registers, vents, and items of similar nature:
finish to match the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces
or as directed by the Client. Refer Sections, Division 15
& 16.
b. Paint visible ductwork and support structures behind
vents, registers, grilles and above dropped ceiling a
dark colour as indicated on the colour Schedule to be
issued or approved by the Client during the course of
the contract.
F. Exterior Plaster: Refer Section 0901.
G. Interior Woodwork, Natural Finish:
1. Stain as directed by Client using spirit wiping stain.
2. Three coats S.G. moisture cure clear finish a polyurethane
varnish.
H. Interior Woodwork, Painted Finish:
1. Remove and fill knots with approved filler or treat knots with
approved compound.
2. Apply one coat of Alkyd base primer.
3. Apply one coat of Alkyd undercoat.
4. Apply one coat of Alkyd semi-gloss.
I. Exterior Woodwork, Natural Finish:
Three coats Exterior oil based timber stain, the first coat thinned as
recommended by manufacturer and applied to all faces of each
member before assembly.
J. Pain Paint Finish for Callings:
Apply smooth normal plain paint coatings (Fenomastic by jotun) to
rendered and plastered ceilings in strict accordance, with -
manufacturer's recommendation and specification to achieve the
desired finish.
0904 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
Provide all gypsum drywall and accessories, complete, in place, as shown
on the drawings, specified herein, and needed for a complete and proper
Installation.
1. Metal stud and ceiling Support Systems - Section 0905
2. Ceramic tiling - Section 0902
3. Painting - Section 0903

A. Standards: Comply with standards specified in this Section as listed in
Section 1.
B. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this Section
be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged In manufacture of
similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the
Client.
C. Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen
who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper pet10rmance of the work of this Section.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General:
Comply with provisions of Section 1.
B. Manufacturer’s Data:
Within 30 calendar days after award of the Contract submit:
1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished &
installed under this Section.
2. Manufacturers' specifications and other data required to demonstrate
compliance with the specified requirements.
3. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures when
approved by the Client will become the basis for inspecting and
accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used the work.
A. Protection:
Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before,
during, and after Installation and to protect installed work and materials
of all other trades.
B. Replacements:
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval Of the Client and at no additional cost to the
Client.
C. Delivery and Storage:
Deliver all materials to the Job site in their original unopened containers
with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store In strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Client.
Keep off the ground and protect from moisture, protect corners and
edges from damage.
0904 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM
PART II-PRODUCTS:
2.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM:

A. General:
All gypsum wallboard systems shall use wall board to conform to ASTM
C1396 & SASO 887 and Fed Spec, SS-L-30d Type VII grade x, taper-edge,
12.5mm unless shown otherwise and of the grade and form specified
below. Supply the gypsum wallboard in 1200 mm widths and in such
lengths as will result in a minimum of joints Alternate vapour barrier to
external walls may be incorporated on back face of gypsum wallboard in
form of regular "Gyp-Foil", Refer Section 0702 with skim finish thereafter.
Moisture resistant wail/ceiling board shall conform to ASTC C631 and Fed,
Spec SS-L- 30d, type II grade R, X, W, taper-edged 12.5 mm thick, for
Single-ply application in bathroom/Toilet/Wash and kitchen areas.
12.5 mm thick fiber cement board ceiling in main/family entrance areas
(if applicable).
2.02 METAL TRIMS:
A. Metal trim features for gypsum wallboard shall be formed from zinc-
coated steel not lighter than 0.55mm nominal thickness (26 gauge and
shall conform to Fed, Specification QQ-S775, Type I, Class d or e.
B. Casing beads shall be channel-shaped with a concealed wing not less than
22mm wide, and an exposed wing. The exposed wing may be covered
with paper cemented to metal and shall be suitable for joint treatment.
C. Corner beads shall be angle-shaped with wings not less than 22mm wide
and perforated for nailing and joint treatment, or with combination metal
and paper wings, bonded together, not less than 32mm wide and suitable
for joint treatment.
D. Edge beads shall be angle-shaped with wings not less than 19mm wide.
Concealed wing shall be perforated for nailing and exposed wing edge
folded flat. Exposed wing may be factory finished in a while colour.
2.03 JOINTING SYSTEM:
A. The jointing system shall include reinforcing tape and compound
designed as a system to be used together and shall be used only as
recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard Jointing
compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.04 FASTENING DEVICES:
For fastening the gypsum wallboard in place, use flathead screws,
shouldered, especially designed for use with power-driven tools, not less
than 25mm long, with self-tapping threads and sell-drilling points.
All other materials not specifically described herein required for a complete
and operable installation of the work of this Section, shall be new, first
quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the approval of the Client.
0904 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTM
PART III- EXECUTION:
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:

A. Inspection:
Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect the
installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is
complete to the point where this installation may properly commence,
Verify that gypsum drywall may be installed in strict accordance With
all pertinent codes and regulations, the manufacture's
recommendations as approved by the Client, and the original design.
B. Discrepancies:
Do not install gypsum drywall until all unsati5factory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
Install the gypsum wallboard with the separate boards in moderate
contact but not forced into place, At internal and external corners,
conceal the cut edge of the board by the overlapping covered edges
of the abutting boards, Stagger the boards so that corners of any four
boards will not meet at a common point except in vertical corners.
B. Ceilings:
Install the gypsum wallboard in largest possible sheet sizes to ceilings
with the long dimension of the wallboard at right angles to the
supporting members, except that wallboard may be installed with the
long dimensions parallel to supporting members that are spaced
400mm on centre when attachment members are provided at end
Joints, In installation procedure, the ceiling shall be in place prior to
the wall coverings.
C. Walls:
Install the gypsum wallboard in largest possible sheet sizes to studs at
right angles to the furring or framing members. Make end joints,
where required, over furring or framing members.
D. Attaching:
Drive the specified screws with clutch-controlled power screw-drivers,
spacing the screws at 250mm or centers at ceilings and walls.
E. Access Doors:
By careful coordination with the Drawings, install the specified access
doors where required, anchoring firmly into position for long life
under hard use and aligning properly to achieve an installation flush
with the finished gypsum drywall surface.
3.03 JOINT TREATMENT:
A. General:
1. Inspect all areas to be joint treated, ascertaining that the gypsum
wallboard fits snugly against supporting framework.
2. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be
performed, maintain temperatures of not less than 55 Degree F. for
24 hours prior to commencing treatment, for the entire period of
treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried.
3. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or
hand tool.
4. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with
additional drying time in poorly ventilated areas.
B. Embedding Compound:
Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform
layer, Do not cover heads of fastenings subject to later covering of wall
tiling, see Section 0902. Spread the compound not less than 75mm
wide al joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the
tape in the compound, then spread a thin layer of compound over the
tape. After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding
compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform
coat to not less than 150mm wide at joints, and feather edged when
thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points.
C. Finishing Compound. After embedding compound is thoroughly dry
and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound
of the whole surface of the wallboard to a maximum thickness of 3
mm.
3.04 CORNER TREATMENT:
A. Internal Corners:
Treat as specified for joints, except that the reinforcing tape shall be
folded lengthwise through the middle and fitted neatly into the
corner, Feather out finishing compound as B.2 below.
B. External Corners:
1. Install a corner bead fitting neatly over the corner and secured with
the same type fasteners used for applying the wallboard, spacing
the fasteners approximately 150mm on centers and driving
through the wall board into the framing or furring member.
2. After the comer-piece has been secured into position, treat the
comer with joint compound and reinforcing tape as specified for
joints, feathering the joints compound out from 200 to 250mm on
each side Of the corner.
3.05 OTHER METAL TRIM:
A. General:
The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and all
requirements for metal trim in connection with the work of this
Section, Carefully study the Drawings and the installation; provide in
place all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of
the gypsum wallboard used.
B. Installation:
Install the metal trim in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommended methods of installation, providing not less embedment
and finishing than specified above for corner treatment.
3.06 CLEANING UP:
In addition to the requirements of Section on Cleaning of these
Specifications, use all necessary care during execution of this portion of
the work to prevent scattering of gypsum wallboard scraps and dust and
to prevent tracking of joint and finishing compound onto floor surfaces.
At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space,
promptly pick up and remove from the working are all scraps, debris, and
surplus material of this Section.
0905 METAL STUD AND CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included:
The work in this section covers all metal framing members for non-
structural walls, wall furring and ceiling support systems as outlined
and defined on the drawings.
1. Section 0904 - Gypsum Wallboard System
2. Section 0702 - Building Insulation
A. Standards: Comply with standards specified elsewhere as listed In
Section 1 Ensure all metal framing components conform 10the
requirements of ASTM Standard Grade C446, Grade A or the
requirements of any standard which updates this.
B. Qualifications of Manufacturer:
Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by
manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and
with a history of successful production acceptable to the Client.
C. Qualifications of Installers:
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are
completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section and
following sections.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. General:
Comply with Section 1.
B. Manufacturer’s Data:
Within 30 calendar days after award of the contract, submit.
1. Complete manufacturer's data and specifications required to
demonstrate the full system and standards so that it will comply
with the specified requirements including accommodation of utility
services.
2. Manufactures' recommended installation procedures.
3. Complete list of all components, materials and fastening systems.
C. The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures when
approved by the Client, will become the basis for inspecting or
rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.
A. It is a requirement of the particular system offered that it will
accommodate with least possible modification, all required electrical,
sanitary and other service lines and will provide and allow the firm
fixing and anchorage of all fillings and fixtures.
B. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all components and materials to the job
site in original unopened containers with intact labels, Store In
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as approved by
the Client.
0905 METAL STUD AND CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEM
2.01 METAL STUDS AND CEILINGS:

General:
All components shall be of the highest quality galvanized, zinc coated,
medium tensile steel cold rolled to accurate dimension and profile and in
long unbroken lengths; all of the one manufacturer unless otherwise
approved by the Client and to nominated standards.
All metal studs and accessories shall moot or exceed the minimum
requirements of Fed, Spec. QQ-S-698 and Fed. Spec. QQ-S-775d, Class d, for
the item and use intended.
2.02 METAL STUDS SYSTEM:
Metal studs shall be 75 and 100mm minimum depth, straight, either lipped
"Z" sections or lipped channel section of not less than 0 6mm thickness and
shall be in full unbroken lengths from bottom to top track channels.
Horizontal bridging shall be provided where necessary for securing fillings,
fixtures and other framing but in any case shall be at not more than 800mm
centers vertically and at intersections of ceilings etc.
2.03 CEILING SUPPORTS AND HANGERS:
A. Fixing to Cast-In-Situ Concrete Floor concrete panels - purpose made
hangers and supports to be fixed by "impact method" (e g. Hilti studs).
B. Ceiling Supports:
1. Ceiling Section - Shall be top hot section not less than 0.5mm thick,
26mm height and 80mm wide.
2. Intermediate Channels - Shall be 0 9mm thick. 4Smm high, 15mm
face.
3. Perimeter Channels - Shall be O.5 mm thick, 72mm high and 30mm
face.
4. Installation - Ceiling Section (Runners) at 600mm centers, channels
at 1200mm centers.
5. Hangers: Capable of supporting 40Kg/m2.
2.04 ACCESSORIES:
Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, tracks, Clips,
anchors, fastening devices, and all other accessories required for a complete
and proper installation, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the
steel studs used.
2.05 Fastenings used shall be appropriate to the purpose and be corrosion
resistant and fully capable of resisting all forces imposed on them by
subsequent work.
All other materials not specifically described herein but required for a
complete and robust installation shall be new, first quality of their respective
kinds and subject to the approval of the Client.
0906 METAL STUD AND CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART III-EXECUTION
3.01 CONDITIONS:
A. Prior to installation coordinate with others as necessary and
determine the requirements of other work sections to the need for
location of framing and provision for additional fixings, members and
anchor points not shown but required for the completion of the
finished work of other sections, Failure to determine such
requirements will not absolve the contractor to provide such
provisions in the finish work, under this Section.
B. Prior to installation of the work of this section, carefully Inspect the
Installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is
complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
Verify that Metal Stud and Furring may be Installed in strict
accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the
manufactures' recommendations as approved by the Client, and the
original design.
C. Discrepancies:
Do not Install Metal Stud or Furring until all unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
Accurately set out all member before commencing installation,
making due allowance for the work of other Sections. Ensure all
members are erected true to line and plumb with all additional
members at corners and Intersection to receive linings and fittings.
Ensure set out allows subsequent linings to button centre lines of
members.
B. Stud Work:
Generally set out bottom and top track channels to line and studs at
600mm centers and as necessary. Bridging shall be set out accurately
to horizontal lines at not more than 800mm centers vertically and as
required. Secure bottom tracks with masonry anchors, end and edge
studs and top tracks with screws at not more than 300mm centers Use
fastenings appropriate to the location.
C. Ceiling Support System:
Generally set out ceiling sections (runners) and intermediate channels,
locate and fix hangers with anchors, fix ceiling sections and channels
to hangers and level to provide horizontal fixing for plasterboard. Fix
perimeter channel to all wall junctions.
D. Coat all surfaces of metal studs in contact with concrete or masonry
with suitable damp- proofing compound.
E. Tolerances:
Align all partition and wall assemblies to a tolerance of one in 200
horizontally and one in 500 vertically.
F. Co-ordination:
1. Space the members as required for compliance with all pertinent
regulations, to give proper support for the covering materials, and
as indicated on the drawings.
2. Carefully coordinate all requirements for backing and other
support of items to be mounted on the finished covering.
3. Carefully coordinate all requirements for pipe and other items
designed to be housed within the partitions and wall and ceiling
systems.
0906 MARBLE TILING
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. General:
This section covers the provision of installation of marble thresholds,
treads and risers to stairs, main and family entrance as shown on the
drawings and specified herein.
A. Manufacturer:
The products used in the work of this section shall be produced by
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of these
products and with a history of production and quality acceptable to
the Client.
The quality colour and design shall be established by samples supplied
by the contractor and approved In writing by the Client and it shall be
no less quality than the material specified in Part II- PROOUCTS of this
section.
B. Installer:
completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work in this section.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
Within 30 days of contract award, submit complete samples of the
complete range of colours and pattems of marbles from the range at least
one manufacturer. Not less than two different colour- ways shall be
submitted.
1.0 4 STANDARDS:
The standards required to be met in this section shall be those as defined,
and set out in ASTM CS03 and for soundness, with M.I.A. requirements.
0906 MARBLE TILING
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. General:
All materials shall be new and the best grade of their respective kinds
and shall be manufactured by Cecilian / Omani / Gemco or approved
equal.
B. 30mm thick marble for treads and landing 20mm thick for risers to
stair with three cut grooves behind the 6mm radius rounded edge for
each step with 20mm thick x 100mm high skirting. Shall be marble
from grade (A) material of approval color and design.
C. 30mm thick marble threshold at exterior door and toilet doors.
D. 400 x 400 x 20mm thick marble for main, family and service entrance
area, shall be made from grade (A) material of approval color and
design.
E. Bedding screed shall be 1:3 cement, sand mixed with latex.
F. Cement based adhesive use "Laticrete" 4237 or similar approved.
G. Grout shall be pre-mixed as Baifloor / Balwall or equivalent.
0906 MARBLE TILING
OART III- EXECUTION:
3.01 INSPECTION:
Examine the areas to be done under work of this section and ensure that
all preceding and preparatory work of other sections are complete and
satisfactory. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have
been achieved.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Thresholds:
Thresholds fixing shall generally be by the adhesive method. Spread
adhesive on surface to be tiled with notched trowel of type
recommended by the manufacturer for the surface. Cover surface
uniformly without bare spots Apply adhesive 1only in areas which can
be covered the adhesive "films" over. Remove any adhesive that films
over and refloat with fresh adhesive.
B. Treads and rises to stair shall bedded in white cement and sand mix
and laid to the correct level and alignment so as to adhesive equal sizes
and threads through the stairway.
C. Marble tiles to main entrance shall bedded in cement and sand mix
and laid to the correct level.
DIVISION 10:
SPECIALTIES:
1001 Sanitary Fixtures.
1002 Bathroom Accessories.
1001 SANITARY FIXTURES
PART I- GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the supply and installation of all sanitary fixtures
including all carriers, supports, anchors and accessories, in the location
and quantities shown on the drawings and as required.
1. Section 1501 - Plumbing Systems.
2. Section 1002 - Bathroom Accessories.
A. ANSI- American National Standards Institute.
A112.19.2 Vitreous China Sanitary Fixtures.
B. 8SI- British Standards Institution.
3402 Quality of Vitreous China Sanitary Appliances.
1.0 3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit copies of manufacturer's catalogues containing technical
specifications for fixtures proposed to the Owner/ Consultant for
approval.
B. Shop drawings showing the location of fixtures, the method of
installation and fittings / accessories.
PART II –PRODUCTS:
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All fixtures shall be SAUDI CERAMIC, RAK or equal approved and
furnished by a manufacturer or supplier regularly engaged in the
manufacture or supply Of sanitary fixtures.
B. All fixtures shall be of make and model selected from a high quality
available range. See specific drawings for details of fixtures,
equipment and fillings required to be used in conjunction.
1. Western Water Closet:
a. W.C. bowl.
Cistern tank.
Flush system.
b. Seat cover.
c. Complete fixing accessories.
2. Bath Tub:
a. Acrylic bath tub from local manufacturer with bath panel and
sliding DUSCHOLUX enclosure.
b. Set of pop-up waste, overflow & p-trap.
c. Telephone shower, GROHE original.
3. Shower Tray:
a. Acrylic shower fray from local manufacturer.
b. Waste strainer.
c. Telephone shower. GROHE original.
4. Perennial Spray:
a. GROHE original, c/w vacuum breaker, CPL angle stop valve,
hose, hand spray & hook.
5. Pedestal Lavatory:
a. Pedestal wash basin, white vitreous china lavatory with
pedestal & centre hole for faucet.
b. 1 ¼ trap for lavatory.
c. Single lever mixer, GROHE original.
6. Vanity Basin:
a. MAROMIX or similar approved artificial granite counter top
with half rounded edges and 100mm high splash-back,
complete with built-in wash basin.
b. 1 ¼ trap for lavatory.
7. Kitchen double bowl stainless steel Sink (Single bowl for dirty
kitchen):
a. 20 mm thick artificial granite resin work counter lop with half
rounded edges and 100mm high splash-back, complete with
built-in double bowl stainless steel Sink.
b. Double p-trap assembly (PVC).
c. Sink disposer, KENMORE (USA).
d. Basket strainer.
e. Single lever mixer, GROHE original.
8. Laundry / Utility Sink (if applicable):
a. Artificial granite counter top with stainless steel sink.
b. With 3 holes faucet drilling.
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS:

A. All fixtures and equipment shall be mounted level, sure, rigid and flush
With wall or floor as appropnate.
B. Co-ordinate with other relevant sections as required to ensure proper
and adequate provision in framing and wall finish for installation of the
selected toilet and bathroom fixtures and accessories in the required
location.
C. Inspect location of all fixtures and accessories and verify that all
necessary provisions have been made, Do not proceed with
installation in areas of discrepancies or where work of other sections
is deficient until they have been resolved.
D. Fastening for all accessories shall be made of the concealed type
where available.
3.02 Furnish and set all hangers, support, brackets etc for proper
Installation of all fixtures and equipment. Supports shall be in accordance
with recommendations of fixture manufacturer, and if built into partitions
walls, shall be installed as wall construction progresses. Contractor shall
be responsible for stability of all fixtures and furnishing all drain carriers
on other laterals, necessary to accomplish this. Exact mounting height
shall be as shown on the drawings.
3.03 Water supplies to all fixtures shall be valved at fixture.
3.04 All fixtures shall be left thoroughly clean, defect-free and free from all
marks, foreign substances and sticking papers etc.
3.05 Provide one isolation stop valve for each toilet/ bathroom space.
3.06 Caulk around all fixtures and adjacent surfaces with a white silicone,
fungicidal type.
1102 BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. General:
This section covers the provision and installation of all bathroom
accessories, as shown on the drawings specified herein.
1. Section 1001 - Sanitary Fixtures.
2. Section 0803 – Glazing.
3. Section 0902 - Tile Work.
A. Qualification of Manufacturer:
Products used in the work of this section shall be produced by
manufacturer's regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar
products and with a history of successful production acceptable and
approved by the Owner/Consultant.
B. Qualification of Installer:
completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this section.
1.03 SUBMITIALS:
A. Product Data:
The following material/document should be submitted for review and
approval of the Owner/Consultant prior to start procurement process.
1. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.
2. Manufacturer's specifications.
B. Samples:
1. Accompanying the above submittals, submit samples of each
toilet/bathroom accessory proposed to be furnished and installed
under this section.
2. Samples will be returned to the Contractor at the site of the work
and may be incorporated into the finished work, provided they are
identified and their locations noted.
2.01 PRODUCTS HANDLING

A. Protection:
Use all means necessary to protect the materials before, during and
after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other
trades.
B. Replacements:
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and/or
replacements necessary, to the satisfaction of the Owner/Consultant
and at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. General:
1. Anchors and Fasteners:
Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a retaining
force commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be
mounted, and well suited for use with the supporting construction.
Where exposed fasteners are permitted, provide oval head
fasteners with finish matching the accessory.
2. Design:
Materials are based on use of products from GROHE or GERMANY
as shown on the drawings.
B. Bathroom Mirrors:
600 x 900 x 6 mm thick or approved equal bathroom mirror (bevelled
edge) with light and glass shelf as shown on drawing.
C. Bathroom & Toilet Accessory Items:
Bathroom & toilet accessories shall be from GROHE or GERMANY
made only and shall be designed to fit 200 x 200 mm tiles. The location
of accessory is as shown in the detailed drawings and as follows:
1. Toilet roll (tissue paper) holder with chrome cover GROHE or
GERMANY.
2. Soap dish holder – chrome GROHE or GERMANY.
3. Towel rail I Towel ring – chrome GROHE or GERMANY.
4. Shampoo and soap shower basket – chrome GROHE or GERMANY.
5. Towel rack-chrome GROHE or GERMANY.
6. Perennial spray GROHE original.
7. Telephone shower for bath tub and shower tray GROHE original.
8. Bath tub & shower enclosure DUSCHOLUX.
PART 111-EXECUTION:
3.01 INSPECTION:
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will
be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of the work Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 CO-QRDINATION:
Throughout construction of substrate surfaces, use all means necessary
to ensure proper and adequate provision for concealed support devices
and for finished openings to receive the work of this section.
3.03 INSTALLATION:
Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
as approved by the Owner/Consultant, anchonng all components firmly
into position for long Iile under hard use.
DIVISION 11:
APPLIANCES:
1101 Schedule of Kitchen and Other Appliances.
1101 SCHEDULE OF KITCHEN AND OTHER APPLIANCES
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
General:
This section covers the supply and installation of kitchen and other
appliances, namely electric water heaters, washer, dryer,
refrigerator/freezer, food disposer, cooking range, extract hood.
1101 SCHEDULE OF KITCHEN AND OTHER APPLIANCES
PART II- PRODUCTS:
2.01 GENERAL:
A. All appliances to be new, of the latest model and delivered to the site
in the manufacturer's packing labeled clearly to indicate date of
manufacture.
B. Colours of trim to be selected from the manufacturer's standard
range of colours and trim.
C. All colours and trim for the appliances to be matching in each
dwelling.
2.02 PRODUCTSHANDLING:
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials
before, dunng and after installation and to protect the work and
materials of all other trades.
B. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all
repairs and/or replacement necessary, to the satisfaction and at no
additional cost to the Owner/Consultant.
2.03 DESCRIPTIONOFAPPLIANCES:
1. Electric water heater for Drivers Room, 50 liters capacity by Ariston or
approval equal, (as per drawing details).
2. Centralized electric water heater, 300 liters capacity by A.O. Smith or
approval equal, (as per drawing details).
3. Kenmore 30" slide in type, self-cleaning, coil elements electric range.
4. KDK range hood - 72 watts, 700mm wide, 150cfm, 230V/1P/60Hz.
5. Kenmore disposer - heavy duty ¾ HP.
6. Kenmore 25 cu. fl. Refrigerator.
7. Kenmore washer - 16.0 kg capacity.
8. Kenmoredryer-160kg capacity.
DIVISION 15:
MECHANICAL:
1501 Plumbing system.
1502 Description of HVAC system.
1503 Fire protection system.
0501 PLUMBING SYSTEM
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included:
This section covers the furnishing and Installation of all plumbing
systems in the location and quantities shown on the drawings.
1. Section 1001 – Sanitary Fixtures and Accessories.
2. Section 0204 - Underground Piping & Utilities pits.
1.0 2 QUALITY STANDARDS:
A. Comply with all requirements of the National Plumbing Code (NPC),
Saudi Arabian Codes and Standards, and International Plumbing Code
(IPC)..
B. ASTM D2665-78 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste, Vent Pipe and Fittings.
C. ASTM B88, Types K and L (ASTM 888M, Type A and B), water tube
annealed temper or type M hard temper.
ASME A40.8-55 National Plumbing Code. Minimum Requirement for
Plumbing.
D. ASTM - American Society for Testing & Materials.
D1785 - PVC Plastic Pipes sch 40,80,120.
D1784 - Compounds for PVC and CPVC.
D2466 - PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings (Schedule 40).
D2464, D2467 - PVC Sch. 40, 80, 120 - PVC sch, 40 Socket Type, PVC
Sch.80.
ASME B16 18, Cast copper alloy fittings.
ASME B16 22 wrought copper, solder joint fittings.
ANSI/ASME B16.26, Cast copper alloy fittings for flanged copper tubes.
ANSI/ASME B16.29, Wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder
joint drainage fittings.
E. American Water Works Association (AWVVA).
B300 Series Standards – Disinfection.
F. Saudi Arabian Standards:
SAS 11- Electric Water Heaters.
SASO 14' Unplasticized poly vinyl chloride (u PVC) for potable water.
SASO 15: Methods of testing of Unplasticized poly vinyl chloride (u
PVC) pipes for potable water.
G. The plumbing system shall be tested in accordance With the material
standard plumbing code procedure.
1.0 3 HEALTH AND SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:
All works undertaken in relation to this specifications are to be completed
in full accordance with the respective health and safety requirements
established by the following:
King don of Saudi Arabia's legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes.
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data, manufacturer's certificate and certificate of
compliance to Specification, QA/QC certificates reference codes and
standards on each item of equipment for all materials specified, for
the Owner/Consultant review and approval prior to procurement.
B. Submit descriptive literature for fixtures and equipment specified
herein.
C. Submit written procedure for solvent welding of plastic piping joints.
D. Submit written procedure for copper piping brazing methods.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for appliances and fixtures.
F. Sample of the different sizes of pipes, fittings, hangers to cover all the
waste and venting system.
G. Submit shop drawings showing all Internal and external water supply
system in isometric with all associated fittings and specialties and
enlarge layouts and sections of wet areas.
H. Prior of testing the plumbing and water system the Contractor should
submit for review and approval of Owner/Consultant the manual of
testing procedure for the different request tests under this Section.
1501 PLUMBING SYSTEM
2.01 COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPING MATERIAL:

A. Pipe (below and above groul1d):
Cold water supply piping shall be PPR Type 3 pipe as per SASO-14, Din
8062 and ISO 161/1 - class 5.
B. Fittings:
Fittings to match pipe used and where possible from the same
manufacturer or schedule 80 or class-5 confirming to ASTM D2464,
D2467.
C. Joint solvent:
Use fast-drying solvent for 32 mm sizes and smaller Solvent to be
furnished by manufacturer of pipe used.
D. Flanges where it is required shall be cast bronze with flat ground face
and bolt holes spot faced. Flanges shall be rated for 1MPa water
working pressure.
E. Gaskets shall be of a material suitable for the fluid, temperature and
pressure for which they will be used.
2.02 HOT WATER PIPING MATERIALS:
A. Hot water supply - pipe shall be PPR Type 3 Schedule 80 as per ASTM
02846. All domestic hot water supply and return shall be PPR Type 3
pipes, with rubber or approved insulation.
B. Fittings:
Fittings to match pipe used and where possible from the same
manufacturer or Schedule 80 or class 5 confirming to ASTM F437 and
F439.
C. Joint Solvent:
For use in Joints of PPR Type 3 pipes to be furnished by manufacturer
of pipe used.
2.03 ACCESSORIES:
A. Flexible pipe connectors shall be chrome plated. Connectors shall be
minimum of 300 mm in length with threaded male or flanged ends as
required for proper installation.
B. Water hammer arrestors shall be provided in the location shown on
drawings and be according to the Plumbing and Drainage Institute of
the United States.
C. Vacuum breaker shall be of type for indoor exposed type in
accordance to Plumbing and Drainage Institute of the United States.
2.04 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES:
A. Hose bibs with built-in vacuum breaker shall be rough brass short
pattern, indexed tee handle (Saudi ceramics, Grohe or other equal and
approved), 12 mm male inlet, 12 mm hose threaded outlet, Single for
concealed piping.
B. Vacuum breaker for internal fittings shall have chrome plated brass
body, as Saudi Ceramics, Grohe or other equal or approved.
C. Furnish and install all valves with the required strainers in domestic
water system wherever required for the control and servicing of the
system of piping.
a. All mains, branch mains, sub branch mains which supply four or
more fixtures and all risers shall be valved in such a manner that
it will permit their isolation from the system of piping they are
part of.
b. Each item of equipment shall be individually valved.
D. All check valves in horizontal piping shall be swing type check valves.
All check valves in vertical piping shall be Silent "non-slam" type.
E. Pressure reducing valve shall have bronze body construction, stainless
steel integral strainer renewable stainless steel seat, with pressure
gauge, suitable for pressures up to 300 Ibs, set for 50 Ibs.
F. Water-Hammer Arresters:
1. Water-hammer arresters shall be commercially manufactured
products consisting of bellows arranged to absorb the energy of
pressure waves generated by valve closure in a line in which the
water is flowing. Arresters shall be nonferrous construction, shall
be rated as to capacity, and shall be certified in accordance with
POI WH 201.
2. Install in water supply lines to plumbing fixtures as required by POI
WH 201.
3. Install in upright position, in locations and of size in accordance
with standard POI WH-201, and elsewhere as required.
G. Automatic Air Vent:
1. Automatic air vents on pumps, mains, and where indicated on the
drawings shall be of ball float construction. Vent inlet shall be not
less than 19 mm and the outlet shall be not less than 6 5 mm orifice
shall be 3.2 mm. Trim shall be corrosion-resistant steel confirming
to FS QQ-S-S763 or FS QQ-S- 766. Vent shall be fitted with try-cock
Vent shall discharge air at any pressure to 1034 kpa (150 psi).
Outlet shall be copper tube routed as indicated and approved.
2. Automatic air vents shall have a cast iron body and cap, asbestos
gasket, heat treated chrome steel valve and valve seat for purpose
of hardness and wear resistant seats, stainless steel float.
2.05 WATER HEATERS:
A. Water heaters Will be comprised of two different capacities as shown
on the drawings.
Note: Capacity of water heater as specified in the drawing.
a. Central water heater (vertical, floor standing) for centralised
water heating located in the roof deck floor.
b. Water heater (vertical, wall mounted) for driver's room.
B. Electrical loading for water heaters shall be as shown and indicated on

the drawing. Brand is to be A. 0. Smith, Ariston or Kenmore for 300
liter and 50 Liter capacity water waters and approved by the
Owner/Consultant.
C. Water heaters shall be provided With two stage heating elements one
at top and one at the bottom of vessel container.
D. The water heater interior surface will be glass lined and the sides and
top of the tank outside shall be covered with thick lining of Insulator
to retard heat loss. Each unit will be furnished with magnesium anode
rods rigidly supported, and will be furnished with combination
temperature and pressure relief valve.
E. Voltage and combined wattage of the heating elements shall be as
required to satisfy the loading. Wiring shall be so arranged that, when
required by thermostats, both heating elements will operate
simultaneously.
F. Heaters shall be furnished with adjustable mounting supports.
G. Water heaters shall be provided with circulating pump including
thermostat automatic 110-170° F {44°C-77°C) temperature range and
required thermo-sensors, pressure vessel for expansion and back flow
preventer.
Pump shall be bronze fitted. Install line size butterfly, ball, or gate
valve and strainer on pump suction, Install line size spring loaded
check valve and butterfly, ball, or gate valve on discharge.
H. Backflow preventers :
Bronze body, stainless steel and brass trim.
Relief ports and test cocks.
Tight seating check valve assemblies.
If the valves are flanged, flange bolts and rubber gaskets shall be
provided for attachment of valves to each end of backflow preventer.
Means to service backflow preventer while installed in pipe, shall be
provided.
Suitable melting flanges, unions, or nipples shall be provided as
necessary for installation of back flow preventer.
The dimensions, connection Sizes, capacity, and pressure drop at
design capacity.
2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
Type hangers 10 mm diameter galvanized steel hanger rods space on 1,5
meter on centers for pipe 13mm diameter or less, 1.8 meter on centre for
pipes up to 25 mm diameter. Inserts shall be provided in the concrete
floor slabs for supporting the piping.
2.07 SLEEVES:
a. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place
at all points where pipe pass, through masonry or concrete
panels, except unframed floors on earth.
b. Pipe sleeves (except sleeves through footing) shall be of
sufficient diameter to provide approximately 6 mm
clearance around the pipe or insulation.
c. Pipe sleeves in floors/walls shall be PVC pipe, Sch. 40.
Sleeves In floor shall extend not less than 25 mm and not
more than 50 mm above and the space around the pipe shall
be packed with plastic material and made watertight.
d. Pipe sleeves in footings shall be PVC and shall be not less
than 100 mm larger In diameter than the pipe to be installed.
e. Flashing sleeves shall be installed where pipes pass through
water proofing membrane, floor slabs and walls. The sleeves
shall be provided with an internal flashing flange or clamping
device to which a flashing shield be of sixteen ounce, soft
sheet copper, shall extend not less than 200 mm from the
sleeves and flashing flanges and shield be thoroughly
mopped to the membrane.
f. The space between the pipe and sleeves shall be made
weather tight by inserting a picked oakum gasket and filling
the remaining space with weather proof sealant.
2.08 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS:
a. All soil, waste and vent pipe lines shall be polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) Sch. 40 and size of pipes and fittings shall be
according to International Plumbing Code.
b. All joints shall be air and water tight. For joining PVC pipes,
use PVC cement.
c. Floor Drains:
I. Floor drains shall comply with ANSI A112 21.1.
II. The contractor shall provide all gaskets and accessories
required to install floor drains In PVC drain pipe.
III. Open hub drains for Indirect or equipment waste shall be
as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
IV. Floor drains serving water heater areas shall be of deep
seal type or shall be discharged to the indirect waste
funnel (IWF).
V. Floor drains shall be supplied With.
Body material: Gray iron.
Seepage Flange: Required.
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet: Bottom.
Top or strainer material. Nickel bronze.
Top of body and strainer finish: Satin Nikaloy.
Top shape, Round.
Top loading Classification: Light duty
Inlet fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded
or spigot outlet.
Trap Material: Cast iron.
Trap pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
Trap features: Trap seal primer valve drain connection.
Bottom inside caulk connection suitable for PVC pipe
connection.
Flashing clamp and waterproofing membrane.
Leveling adjustment.
Floor drain / cover Top
I. 150 mm diameter, polished bronze, for rest
rooms, toilets, laboratory rooms and first aid
areas.
II. 220 mm diameter, cast iron equipment rooms.
VI. Floor cleanouts:
Floor cleanouts shall be supplied with:
I. Cast iron body with adjustable housing.
I. Inside caulk connection suitable for PVC or
other drain pipe connection.
II. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and
gaskets.
III. Adjustable housing material: Cast Iron with
threads.
IV. Frame and cover material and finish: Nickel-
bronze, copper or stainless steel to suite
room finish.
V. Frame and cover shape Round.
VI. Ferrule with plug.
VII. Round polished brass top, secured.
d. Floor drain to be cast brass or aluminum-bronze body with
integral trap and adjustable nickel-alloy polished strainer,
side outlet, diameter of strainer 100 mm, chrome finish.
e. Cleanout to be floor cleanout spigot or hub connection with
internal gasket and cast nickel. Allow polished covers where
inside and cast brass where located outside.
f. Drain pipe slope shall not be less than 2%.
g. Fittings to match pipe and where possible to be from same
manufacturer.
2.09 ROOF DRAIN (RAINWATER) SYSTEM:
Roof dome type cast iron drain and painted cast iron body with splash pad
system, as per detail shown in architectural drawing.
1501 PLUMBNG SYSTEM
3.01 GENERAL PIPING AND INSTALLATION:

A. Piping:
1. Conceal all pipe installations in pipe chases, utility spaces, below grade
of floors, etc unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between
piping for proper maintenance.
3. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal or
bent piping will not be permitted.
4. Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or other foreign materials
during the construction period. At the completion of the project, all
dirt and foreign matter in piping shall be removed completely.
5. Piping passing through exterior building walls shall be caulked.
6. Provide drain lines from all relief valves and condensate pans and run
drain line full size to the nearest floor or equipment drain.
7. Water piping shall be securely anchored to insure proper direction of
expansion and contraction.
8. Verify existing grades, inverts and topographic conditions prior to any
trenching, excavation, or installations. In the event existing conditions
prevent installation in accordance with contract documents,
immediately notify the Owner/Consultant.
9. Horizontal piping shall slope uniformly without sags or humps to
provide for complete drainage of systems and elimination of air.
10.Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site,
worked into place without springing or forcing, and shall clear all
Windows, doors and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of
building structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted,
install to permit free expansion and contraction without damage.
11.Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize flushing
connections, etc as required to properly clean and test systems.
12.Co-ordinate piping installations with structure, lighting, electrical
conduit and all other materials and equipment.
13.provide flanges on all valves, apparatus and equipment having 75 mm
and larger connections.
B. Joints:
1. Any leaking joint shall be completely disassembled and replaced
with new materials.
2. All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be cleaned and solvent
cement applied for full circumferential cover.
3. Copper Joints shall be made using 95-5 Tin-Antimony solders ASTM
B32.
C. Accessibility:
Locate all equipments that must be serviced, operated, or maintained,
in fully accessible positions. Deviations from the drawings may be
discussed with the Owner/Consultant and proceed after approval.
D. Mechanical Cutting and Patching:
1. Contractor shall be responsible for all the cutting, fitting, or
patching of his work which may be required to make its several
parts come together properly and fit It to receive, or be received,
by work of other trades. Cutting of structural members shall not be
done without approval of Owner/Consultant.
2. Place sleeves through all walls, floors and ceilings during the initial
construction where it is necessary for piping to go through. When
this is not done, do all cutting and patching required for the
installation of the work. Any damage caused to the building by this
cutting and patching, shall be corrected at no additional cost.
3. Patching of all openings for new Installations and all openings
resulting from the removal or relocation of any installations shall
be done by craftsmen skilled in the particular trade affected, with
same materials as of adjoining openings.
3.02 SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM:

1. Horizontal lines shall be supported by well secured heavy-strap
hangers. Vertical lines shall be secured strongly by hooks to the
building frame and a suitable bracket or chair shall be provided at
places where they start.
2. All main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to
and above the roof line to act as vents, except where otherwise
specifically indicated.
3. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall run as close as possible to underside of
roof, with horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming
traps. Vertical pipes may be connected into one main vent riser above
the highest vented fixtures.
Where an end of circuit vent pipe for any fixtures or line of fixture is
connected to vent line serving other fixtures, the connections shall be
at least 1200 mm above the floor on which the fixtures are located to
prevent the use of any vent line as waste.
Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more
fixtures shall be provided with vents before the last fixture unless
separate venting of fixtures is noted.
4. Rough-in for pipes and fixtures shall be carried along with the building
construction. Correctly located openings of proper sizes shall be
provided where required in the walls and floors for the passage of
pipes.
5. All changes in pipe sizes on soil, waste and drain lines shall be made
with reducing fillings or reducers.
All changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of forty
five degrees wyes, or long sweep bends, except that sanitary tees may
be used on vertical stacks and short quarter bends or elbows may be
used in soil and waste lines where the change In direction of floor is
from the horizontal to the vertical and on the discharge line from the
water closet.
6. All vent pipes passing through the roof shall be flashed as indicated on
the drawing.
7. Sail and waste below grade shall be 2% minimum towards flow for 4"
diameter and below and 1% for pipes above 4" diameter unless
otherwise specified. Install immediately after excavation, Lay pipe so
that entire length bears on firm soil. Excavate for hub. Do not backfill
until installation has been observed and approved by the
Owner/Consultant. Verify elevations of the sewer line at different
point before installation.
Soil and waste above grade shall be as below grade piping. Hang each
entirely to its slope. Support vertical stacks at each floor, both
horizontally and vertically.
Vents slope up to high paint, connect multiple vents to single vent
before penetrating roof. Hang each length of vent pipe from structure
to grade.
8. All vertical piping shall be supported at each floor level with clamps
and spring hangers The maximum spacing for horizontal pipes of 100
mm diameter or larger shall not exceed 2.0 meters. For pipes less than
100 mm diameter the spacing of hangers shall be maximum of 1.50
meters on centers.
9. Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls, partitions or
floors and fitted into place at time of construction Each sleeve shall
extend through its respective wall, floor, and shall be cut flush with
each surface except where clamping flanges are used.
10. AII stacks shall be provided with accessible cleanouts positioned
above the flood level of the highest fixture.
3.03 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEM:
A. Installation:
1. All supplies, hardware, trim, traps, etc to fixtures and equipment
shall be chrome plated if exposed to view.
2. No underground or underslab waterpiping within building shall be
permitted unless specifically approved by the Owner/Consultant.
3. Water pipes shall not be run or laid in the same trench with building
sewer or drainage piping. The bottom of water pipe at ail points
shall be at least 300 mm above the top of sewer line when crossing
occur.
4. Devices installed in the potable water supply system for protection
against backflow or back siphonage shall be maintained in
accessible position and installed In the direction as specified by the
manufacturer.
5. Domestic water systems shall be flushed free of all foreign material
prior to usage. Sterilization shall be performed in accordance with
the AVWVA recommendation.
B. Testing and Balancing Procedure:
1. The Contractor shall completely test all water system as part of
work. The term "water system" shall be understood and intended
to mean all cold and hot water connections and associated
equipment connected to the system including the building
irrigation system.
2. The testing work shall be supervised by certified personnel
experienced in testing procedure.
3. All water system piping shall be tested for maximum working
pressure equivalent to 344 5 Kpa (50 PSI) air pressure or 150% of
the area working pressure, valves shall be tested for maximum
working pressure equivalent to 230 Kpa air pressure as specified by
International Plumbing Code and Regulation of Saudi Building ~
code.
3.04 TESTING PLUMBING AND WATER SYSTEM:
A. Test, Flushing and Sterilisation:
1. The plumbing system shall be tested In accordance with the
National Standard Plumbing Code Procedures.
The test requirements shall be as follows:
a. Sewage systems - 3 meter head from the last highest
fixture/fitting for 24 hours duration.
b. Hot and cold water supply -10 bars pressure for 24
hours duration.
B. Defective Work:
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material
shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and test shall
be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. No
caulking of screwed joints or holes will be accepted.
C. Operational Test:
Upon completion of and prior to acceptance of the installation, the
Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to
demonstrate satisfactory functional and operational efficiency. Such
operating test shall cover a period of not less than 24 hours for each
system and shall include the following Information in a report with
conclusion as to the adequacy of the system.
a. Time, date and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest
fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operational of each valve and faucet.
e. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
f. Operation of each floor drain by flooding with water.
g. Operation of each vacuum breaker and backflow preventer.
D. Slerilization of Hoi & Cold Water System:
After pressure test have been made, the entire domestic hot and cold
water distribution system to be sterilized shall be thoroughly flushed
with water of sufficient velocity until all entrained dirt and other
foreign material have been removed, before Introducing chlorinating
material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine
conforming to AWWA 8301 or hypochlorite conforming to AVWVA
8300, Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with
AVWVA M20.
E. Hot & Cold Water System Flushing:
After tests are completed, potable water piping shall be flushed In
general, sufficient water shall be used to produce a minimum water
velocity of 0.76 mps through piping being flushed. Flushing shall be
continued until discharge water shows no discoloration. System shall
be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned
and replaced in line, After flushing and cleaning, systems shall be
prepared for service by immediately filling water piping with clean,
fresh potable water Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to
finish, furnishings, or parts of the building, due to the Contractor’s
failure to properly clean the piping system, shall be repaired by the
Contractor. When the work is complete, the hot-water system shall be
adjusted for uniform circulation. Flush valves and automatic control
devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.
3.05 WARRANTY:
The Contractor must provide a 3 year warranty for plumbing work from
the date of final acceptance.

1502 DESCRIPTION OF HVAC SYSTEM
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
This section covers the furnishing, testing, shipment, installation, and
placing in satisfactory service of the air conditioning equipment as
specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
Specification and standard referenced in this specification (including
addenda, amendments and errata listed) shall form part of this
specification to the extent indicated by reference thereto In case of
difference between reference specifications or standards and this
specification, this specification shall govern.
AHRI Air-conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating. Refrigerating and Air conditioning
Engineers.
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors National
Association Inc.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
UL Underwriters laboratories Inc.
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
ANSI American National Standard Institute.
NEC National Electric Code.
NFC National Fire Code.
NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
All regulations and standards shall be of the latest issue unless governing
authorities require on earlier issue.
Units will be rated In accordance with the latest edition of ANSI /AHRI
Standard 210/240: 2008.
Units will be certified for capacity, efficiency, and listed in the latest ARI
directory.
Unit construction will comply with latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE and
with NEC.
Units will be constructed in accordance with UL standards and will carry
the UL label of approval. Units will have a c-UL approval.
Unit cabinets will be capable of withstanding Federal Test Method
Standard No. 141 (Method 6061) 500-hr salt spray test.
Air-cooled condenser coils will be leak tested at 150 psig and pressure
tested at 300 psig.
1.0 3 SUBMITIALS:
A. Shop Drawings and Samples:
1. Contractor shall submit shop drawing, engineering data and
samples of materials for approval by the Owner/Consultant.
2. Shop drawings shall include schedule of all materials, detail
drawings of the Installation, assembly construction, methods of
attachment, size of components and positions as well as relations
with other trades e.g. electrical, plumbing etc.
3. Contractor shall install according to approved shop drawing and
shall be only approved equipment and materials.
4. All materials and equipment shall be brand new.
B. As-built Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manual,
Instructions:
1. The Contractor shall record all changes arising during the execution
of the work so that as-built drawings can be prepared accordingly.
These drawings shall detail all relevant data concerning makes,
types, number, code numbers, capcities, quantities.
2. After the approval by Owner/Consultant, the Contractor shall
submit two (2) sets of prints and one (1) set of soft copies of
drawings in a compact disc.
3. Contractor shall supply three (3) copies of complete maintenance
and operation instructions manual of each piece of equipment, for
the approval of the Owner/Consultant. These instruction shall not
consist of manufacturer's advertising literature or catalogues, but
shall be genuine and clearly written instructions that will guide In
the proper operations of the equipment.
4. The Contractor shall supply the as-built drawings and the operating
and maintenance instructions as soon as possible, but not later
than (8) weeks after practical completion of the works.
5. Included with the Instructions manual shall be a maintenance
schedule for the pnncipal Items of equipment furnished under this
contract and complete diagrams of all installations.
1.0 4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. All materials required for the Installation of the villa including window
air conditioning units, DX Mini split units and ventilation system shall
be delivered in time to avoid any delay In progress of the work.
B. Materials shall be delivered to the site in their original wrappings or
boxes with unbroken seals bearing the name of the manufacturer and
the brand.
C. The Contractor shall consult the Owner/Consultant and shall arrange
with him for the allocation of sheds and storage areas on site for the
Contractor's materials and equipment. The Contractor shall not store
materials in areas other than those set aside for the purpose.
D. All materials shall be stored so as to protect them from damage or
deterioration before fixing. Materials stored in the open shall be
suitably covered to protect against rain, excessive heat or sunshine.
The installation of conduits and cables, distribution panels and
temporary lightings on site needed by the Contractor is on his account
and shall be made only in concern with the building contractor.
E. Damaged or defective materials shall be replaced at no cost to the
Owner.
F. Handle materials and equipment carefully to prevent damage.
1.0 5 REQUIREMENTS:
A. Materials and equipment furnished under this specifications shall be
of standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of such materials or equipment and shall be the
manufacturer's latest standard design that complies to the
requirements of this specifications.
B. Materials or products specified by name of manufacturers, brand or
trade name or catalog reference shall be the basis of final agreed price,
and furnished under the contract. Where two or more materials or
products are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the
Contractor Should the Contractor wish to use materials or products
other than those specified, he shall so state prior to commitment of
contract, naming the proposed substitutions and indicating what
difference if any, will be made in the based price, including changes it
cost of all work affected thereby.
C. Contractor shall procure all equipment and materials specified In the
drawings or In this specifications and shall install the window air
conditioning units and mini split units until completion and according
to conditions, graphic or verbal descriptions that appear In the
drawings or in this specifications. All electrical equipment must be
designed specifically for 60 Hertz electrical supply.
2.01 GENERAL:
All equipment brand shall be the product of LG or approval equal and
delivered to the work site In perfect condition.
2.02 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS:
Mini DX Split Air Conditioning Units:
A. General:
The unit shall be complete, consisting of evaporator units(indoor
unit) and remote air cooled condensing unit (outdoor unit).
Indoor unit shall be either horizontal or vertical draw-through
construction and shall either be free air blow or ducted type as
required.
The separate assemblies shall be designed to be used together and
ratings are based on matched assemblies.
The outdoor control panel in NEMA class 4 enclosure shall be
designed for easy connection with terminal blocks clearly identified
for easy termination of power and control wiring with the indoor
unit.
The outdoor unit shall be assembled on a heavy - gauge Integral
steel base. designed for outdoor installation, complete with
weather proof control panel.
B. Direct expansion split type air conditioner includes support
hangers, control fillers, refrigerant, refrigerant piping and
insulation, electrical wiring connection, condensate drain lines,
anchor, thermostats and vibration isolator.
Condenser Fans - Condenser fan will be direct-drive propeller type,
discharging air upward or horizontally.
Condenser fan motors will be totally enclosed, 1-phase type with
class B insulation and permanently lubricated bearings. Shafts will
be corrosion resistant Fan blades will be statically and dynamically
balanced. Condenser fan openings will be equipped with PVC-
coated steel wire safety guards.
Compressor - Compressor will be hermetically sealed The
compressor type shall be air cooled reciprocating / rotary and it
shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators.
Condenser Coil - Condenser coil will be air cooled. Coil will be
constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper lubes
which are then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.
Evaporators Fans - Evaporator fans shall confirm to AMCA 210 and
shall be forward curved type or backward inclined centrifugal type
specially designed and suitable for the operating pressure. Fan
motors shall confirm to NEMA MG2. Motar starters shall confirm
to NEMA ICS 1. Motors shall be totally enclosed type. Motar
starters shall be magnetic across- the line type with weather-
resistant enclosure.
Direct expansion coils - Direct expansion coils shall be fin-and-tube
type constructed of seamless copper tubes of minimum thickness
equal to 0.63 mm and the aluminum fins of minimum thickness
equal to 0.19 mm, mechanically banded or soldered to copper
tubes. Casing and tube support sheets shall not be higher than 1.52
mm (16 gauge) galvanized steel, farmed to provide structural
strength. When required, multiple tube supports shall be provided
to prevent the tube sag Each coil shall be tested at the factory
under water at not less than 2070 kap air pressure and shall be
suitable for 1380 kpa working pressure. Coils shall be mounted for
counter flow service. Coils shall confirm to ARI 410.
Refrigeration Components - Refrigeration circuit components will
include liquid line shutoff valve with sweat connections, suction
line shutoff valves with sweat connections, system charge of
refrigerant R22, and compressor oil.
Controls:
Complete packaged control system shall be provided as required
for the safe and proper operation of each unit including high and
low pressure cutout witches and "fan-auto-on" switches on the
thermostat. All other controls Including motor starters and safety
controls shall be mounted inside the enclosure and all wiring
thereof shall be factory wired.
Condenser controls:
a. Head pressure control shall be provided to ensure
condensing temperature for proper system operation at all
ambient temperatures down to 0°C.
Air Volume Control:
b. Solid state variable speed fan motor controller may be
provided In lieu of volume dampers to control air-flow over
coil, Control shall be set for a minimum of 35°C saturated
refrigerant condensing temperature.
Condenser Start-Up Control:
a. Condenser with start-up control package which permits
start-up of compressor regardless of low ambient
temperatures shall be provided. Package shall temporarily
bypass system low pressure-state to permit start-up
whenever minimum ambient temperature is below design
evaporator coil suction temperature.
Refrigerant Circuits:
a. Entire refrigerant circuit shall be dehydrated, purged and
charged with refrigerant and oil at factory, charges shall be
the full amount required for operation.
2.03 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:
A. General:
1. Roof type air conditioners shall be designed, constructed,
assembled, rated and tested in accordance with ARI 210/240
and 340/360 and ANSI. Unit shall have capacities to meet the
design conditions specified or indicated.
B. Description:
1. Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior
installation; consisting of compressor, indoor and outside
refrigerant coils, Indoor fan and outside coil fan, refrigeration
and temperature controls, filters and dampers.
C. Performance Rating:
1. Cooling capacity of unit shall meet both the sensible heat
requirements and total heat requirements indicated. In
selecting unit size, true allowance shall be made for "sensible
to total heat ratio" to satisfy required sensible cooling capacity.
2. Submittals shall include catalog selection data which accounts
for sensible to total heat ratio, entering air-conditions at
evaporator and condenser entering air conditions.
3. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) should not be less than 10.
D. Casing:
1. Galvanized-steel conforming to ASTM A53M, construction with
enamel paint finish, removable panels or access doors with
neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts,
minimum 12.5 mm (½ in.) thick thermal insulation, knockouts
for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain
connection and lifting lugs.
E. Indoor Fan:
1. Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with fixed or adjustable
motor sheaves, grease-lubricated ball bearings and motor.
F. Return/Exhaust-Fan:
1. Forward curved, airfoil or airfoil plug, centrifugal, belt driven
with adjustable or fixed motor sheaves, grease-lubricated ball
bearings and motor. Mount fan and motor assembly on base
with rubber in shear isolators. Mount fan and motor assembly
on base with spring isolators having 50 mm (2 In.) deflection.
G. Outside Coil Fan:
1. Propeller type, directly driven by permanently lubricated motor.
H. Refrigerant Coils:
1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing
with equalizing type vertical distributor. Provide phenolic epoxy
corrosion- protection coating to both coils.
I. Compressor:
1. Hermetic or semi-hermetic compressors with integral vibration
isolators, Internal over-current and over-temperature
protection, internal pressure relief and crankcase heater.
J. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor.
2. Outside call and fan.
3. Indoor coil and fan.
4. Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.
5. Check Valves.
6. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
7. Refrigerant dryer.
8. High-pressure switch.
9. Low-pressure switch.
10.Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient
temperature operation or loss of air.
11. Independent Refrigeration circuits.
12. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
13. Charge of refrigerant.
14. Hot-Gas Bypass:
a. Factory-installed valve.
15.Timed Off Control:
a. Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after 5
minutes.
K. Filters:
1. 50 mm (2 in.) thick, fiberglass, pleated or throwaway filters in
filter rack.
L. Heat Exchanger:
1. Aluminized steel or stainless steel construction for natural or
propane-gas-fired burners with the following controls:
a. Redundant dual gas valve with manual shutoff.
b. Direct-spark pilot ignition.
c. Electronic flame sensor.
d. Induced-draft blower.
e. Flame rollout switch.
M. Outside-Air Damper:
1. Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 or 0 to 100% outside air, with
manual slide and fully modulating, spring-return damper motor
and hood.
N. Economizer:
1. Return and outside air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-
air fitter and hood.
a. Damper Motor:
1. Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum
position.
b. Control:
1. Electronic-control system uses outside-air temperature,
mixed-air and outside-air temperature, outside-air
enthalpy, mixed-air temperature and selects between
outside-air and return-air enthalpy to adjust mixing
dampers.
c. Relief Damper:
1. Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood.
O. Power Connection:
1. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-
mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and
control-circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker.
P. Unit Controls:
1. Solid-state control board and components contain at least the
following features:
a. Indoor fan on/off delay.
b. Default control to ensure proper operation after power
interruption.
c. Service relay output.
d. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.
e. Field-adjustable control parameters.
f. Defrost control.
g. Dehumidification control with dehumidistat.
h. Economizer control.
i. Gas valve delay between first- and second-stage firing.
j. Indoor-air quality control with carbon dioxide sensor.
k. Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to -
17,78°C (O°F).
l. Minimum run time.
m. Night setback mode.
n. Return-air temperature limit.
o. Smoke alarm with smoke detector installed in supply air.
p. Low-refrigerant pressure control.
q. Digital display of outside temperature, supply-air
temperature, return-air temperature, economizer
damper position, indoor-air quality and control
parameters.
Q. DDC:
1. Install stand-alone control module providing link between unit
controls and DDC temperature control system Control module
shall be compatible with temperature-control systems as
specified in SECTION 15910.
R. Electromechanical Thermostat:
1. Staged healing and cooling on sub-base with manual system
switch, on-heat-auto-cool and fan switch auto-on.
a. Night setback operation with single-stage healing control
with 7-day or 24-hour lime clock with battery backup.
b. Fan-proving switch to lock out unit if fan falls.
c. Dirty-filter switch.
S. Thermostat:
1. Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling
setup with 7- day programming; and the following:
a. Touch sensitive keyboard.
b. Automatic switching.
c. °c (°F) readout.
d. LED indicators.
e. Hour/day programming.
f. Manual override capability.
g. Time and operational mode readout.
h. Status indicator.
i. Battery backup.
j. Sub-base with manual system switch (on-heal-auto-cool)
and fan switch (aula-on).
k. Fan-proving switch 10lock out unit if fan fails.
l. Dirty-filter switch.
T. Optional Accessories:
1. Cold-Weather Kit:
a. Electric heater maintains temperature in gas burner
compartment.
2. Service Outlets:
a. Two, 115 V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type.
3. PVC or copper condensate drain trap.
4. Dirty-filter switch.
5. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire, Hail guards of
steel, painted to match casing.
6. Step-down or flush diffuser with aluminum grilles, insulated
diffuser box with flanges and interior transition.
7. Power exhaust fan.
8. Vertical vent extension.
U. Roof Curb:
1. Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing and factory-
installed wood nailer; minimum height of 350 or 600 mm (14 or
24 in.).
V. Horizontal Discharge Roof Curb:
1. Steel with corrosion-protection coating, insulation, gasketing
and factory-installed wood nailer and configured to convert
from down flow to horizontal airflow: minimum height of 650,
750, 925 or 1025 mm (26, 30, 37 or 41 in.),
W. Isolation Curb:
1. Rigid upper and lower steel structure with vibration isolation
springs having 50 mm (2 in.) static deflection and vertical and
horizontal restraints; with elastomeric waterproof membrane.
2.04 VENTILATION FANS:
1. Refer to the equipment schedule for ratings, capacities, and
motor voltage requirements Brand is to be Green heck, KDK,
XPELAIR or approval equal for exhaust fans on kitchen and fan
type shall be belt drive centrifugal inline.
2. Toilet fans shall be wall mounted propeller fan, Provide solenoid
operated outdoor louver shutter for all wall mounted fans and
louver color shall match With the wall color The brand shall be
KDK, XPELAIR or equal approved.
3. Fans shall be licensed to bear the "Air Moving and Conditioning
Association, Inc." Certified ratings seal. Ratings shall be not less
than the values indicated, and shall be based on 21 Degree
Centigrade standard air.
4. Construction shall be in accordance with the AMCA classes of
construction.
5. Fan wheels shall be statistically and dynamically balanced.
6. Furnish all accessories indicated.
7. Fan shall be direct drive motor designed for continuous
operation with flexible aluminium duct wall connection.
2.05 PIPE VALVES AND FITTINGS:
1. Furnish and Install all piping fittings, and specials shown, noted on the
drawings, specified, or required for the complete and operable
mechanical installation.
2. Pipe shall be type and class and joined as described below:
a. Condensate Drainage:
1. Condensate drainage pipe shall be PVC schedule 40.
2. Provide a deep seal P-trap at each air fan coil unit.
b. Refrigerant Pipe:
Type "L" hard drawn copper joined by wrought copper sweat
fillings made up with 95-5 solder and a suitable flux.
3. Valves: Fumish and install valves shown, noted or required for piping
systems.
3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation
recommendations, Install items requiring removal for servicing
with adequate clearance so as not to require removal or damage of
other items to permit their own removal.
B. Provide supports and hangers required for proper Installation of
equipment.
C. Refrigerant piping shall be installed as shown in the equipment
detailed drawings.
D. Refrigerant piping insulation shall be provided as shown in the
equipment detailed drawings.
E. Testing, Balancing and Start-up:
1. Testing, adjustment. and start-up of mechanical systems
shall be performed as described below All necessary test
equipment, instruments, materials, and labour required
for performing all the test described in these
specifications shall be provided as a part of the work of
this Section.
2. Test, balance and adjust all the system to the drawings
and specification, In accordance with the intent and
requirements of the ASHRAE Guide - Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing (Chapter 37, 2003 ASHRAE Application
Handbook).
3. Test all condensate drainage piping from air treatment
and handling equipment by plugging outlets and filling to
high point of each such drain.
Repair or replace all defective materials, and retest until
proved tight.
3.02 WARRANTY:
The Contractor must provide a 3 year warranty for pipe installation for
gas and drain from the dale of final acceptance and 5 year for compressor
and 1 year for other parts of the mini spill units.
1503 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. This section covers the selection, installation, inspection and testing
of fire protection equipments for housing projects as specified herein
and as shown on the Drawings. Portable fire extinguishers are
intended as a first line of defense to cope with fires of limited size.
2. This specification contains minimum design requirements, safety
considerations and mechanical equipment requirements based on the
reference standards listed above.
3. The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment
required to make the work complete and ready.
4. Provide fire extinguishers of type, size and capacity for each cabinet
and other locations Indicated.
2.0 REFERENCES:
NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NFPA10 Portable fire extinguishers
NFPA17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
ANSI/UL American National Standard institute / Underwriter's
Laboratories
ANSI/UL 299 Standard for Dry chemical fire extinguishers
3.0FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

1. Fire extil1guishers:
A. The classification of the fire extinguishers shall consist of an
alphabet that indicates the class of fire on which a fire extil1guisher
has been found to be effective, proceeded by a rating number
(class A and B only) that Indicates the relative extil1guishing
effectiveness.
B. Portable fire extinguishers shall be maintained in a fully charged
and operable condition and shall be kept ill their designated places
at all times when they are not being used.
C. Fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously located where they will be
readily accessible and immediately available in the event of fire.
Preferably, they shall be located along normal paths of travel,
follow the design drawings for appropriate location of installation.
D. The minimum number of fire extinguishers needed to protect a
property shall be determined as per NFPA 10, chapter 5.
Frequently, additional extinguishers can be installed to provide
more suitable protection.
E. Fire extinguishers shall be provided for building protection can be
considered also for the protection of occupancies having a class A
fire potential.
2. Material:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:
Carbon steel, complying with ASTM Al008M, commercial quality,
stretcher leveled, temper rolled.
3. Mounting Brackets:
1. Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of
sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguisher
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
4.0 EXECUTION:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire
extinguishers and mounting brackets.
2. Mounting Height:
a. Install extinguishers at a height Indicated below.
i. Install fire extinguishers mounted on hangers or brackets
attached to a wall so that the top of the extinguisher is
not more than 1.067 m above the floor.
ii. In no case shall the clearance between the bottom of the
fire extinguisher and the floor be less than 100 mm.
3. Locations:
A. Install extinguishers at locations below:
a. Install fire extinguishers at locations specified on the
drawings or as directed by the authority having jurisdiction.
b. Fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously located, along
normal paths of travel, including exits from areas.
Extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view.
c. Install portable fire extinguishers on the hanger or in the
bracket supplied or placed in the fire extinguisher cabinets
provided. Verify that the extinguisher operating instructions
face.
DIVISON 16:
ELECTRICAL:
1601 ELECTRICAL WORK.
1602 LIGHTING FIXTURES.
1603 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.
1604 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM.
1601 ELECTRICAL WORK
PART I – GENERAL:
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Scope of Work Included:
This Section covers the supply, installation, testing and putting into
operation of all mentioned electrical installation as specified herein,
complete and in perfect working order, notwithstanding any item or
system component not mentioned in the drawings / specifications but
necessary for system operation shall be provided by the contractor The
Contractor shall be responsible for locating exact position of the
equipment, upon the written approval of the Owner/Consultant prior to
installation. Wherever details are lacking, working drawings shall be
submitted by the Contractor to owner/ consultant for approval.
Workmanship shall be of the best accepted standard practice for such
installation.
A. Applicable Codes and Standards:
1. Saudi Arabian Standards Organisation – SASO.
2. STC (Saudi Telecom Company) Ministry of Communications, KSA.
3. Ministry of Industry and Electricity,KSA.
4. BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Service International).
5. Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).
6. Saudi Building Code.
7. National Electnc Code US – 2011.
8. Ministry of Communication, KSA.
B. All electrical work shall be carried out in accordance With the latest issue
of National Electric Code, regulations for the Electrical equipment of build
published by IEEE, where not in contradiction with the local power supply
authority requirements.
All equipment and materials specified under this section must be
manufactured in strict compliance with approved specifications
Acceptance test shall conform to the requirements of approved codes
and standards. All materials to be used shall be subject to the approval of
the Owner/Consultant before being ordered or Installed. Samples shall be
submitted along with the technical material submittal for all systems'
components. The Contractor however shall make sure that the different
materials of each system fit together and form a homogeneous
installation irrespective of the Owner/Consultant prior approval.
Any work which is not In accordance with the local authority regulations
or upto the satisfaction of the Owner/Consultant shall be removed and
repaired at the Contractor’s own expense. All materials supplied must be
standard factory finished or painted to the requirements of the
Owner/Consultant.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Complete technical submittals of materials and equipment proposed for
incorporation in the work including the following:
1. List shall include manufacturer's name and material or equipment
identification such as styles, types or catalog numbers for complete
identification purposes, country of origin.
2. Include complete set of catalogs (original) covering these submittals.
3. Compliance statement shall indicate compliance with appropriate
standard as specified and must be part of technical submittal.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for equipment not readily identifiable
by information named above and will be submitted for, but not limited to
abinets, panel boards, supports etc.
C. Installation and testing / commissioning method statements.
D. As built drawings in soft and hard copies.
E. Submit samples of each type of material intended for the proposed work.
2.01 GENERAL:
All goods and products covered by this specification shall be from
manufacturers and suppliers regularly engaged in the manufacture or
supply of electrical materials and accessories.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. WIRE, CABLE AND CONNECTORS:
1. Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors, which conform to
the relevant specification, made of manufacture's standard
materials, designed and constructed as recommended by
manufacturer and as required for the installation. (Manufacture:
Riyadh cables or approved equal).
2. Provide colour coding for single conductor as follows ( as per Saudi
Building Code Table 51-2):
ØA ØB ØC Neutral
230 Volts and Brown Brown Black Grey Blue
Insulated equipment ground green and yellow,
3. Building wire shall not be less than 4,0 mm2 for power and 4.0 mm2
for lighting tinned copper annealed class B standard, 600 Volts,
Shall be PVC insulated wires with 70° C.
4. Main and sub-main cables shall be multiple stranded, tinned,
copper for sized as indicated in drawing; rated 90°C for XLPE (cross
linked polyethylene) 600V/1000V or approved equal and these
shall be constructed and tested according to IEC 60227 and BS-
6004.
Thermostat cable shall be 2.5 mm2 tinned copper, 7 conductors,
600 Volt, vinyl jackets, IPCEA color coded.
B. RACEWAY SYSTEM:
1. Non-metallic Conduit: Conduit shall be rigid PVC, schedule 40,
moisture resistant, flame retardant, resistant to impact and
crushing. (Manufacture. NEPRO, FABCO, SAPPCO or approved
equal).
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1. Electrical metallic tubing shall be manufactured in accordance
with ANSI C80.3.
2. Electrical metallic tubing larger than Trade Size 2 shall not be
used.
3. It shall generally be used for routing lI1e cables for branch
circuits, control circuits and signal circuits, except for the
following conditions and locations:
a. Locations where there are a possibility of crushing and
damaging during installation or utilization.
b. Damp and wet locations or conditions.
c. Corrosive locations or conditions.
d. Hazardous classified areas.
3. Flexible Steel Conduit: Conduit shall be flexible steel, zinc coated,
thread less, liquid-tight and moisture-proof, conforming to ANSI
C33 92, safety standard for flexible metal conduit Fittings shall be
as recommended by the conduit manufacturer, thread less hinged
clamp type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast iron.
Conduits and fittings used in wet areas shall be extruded with Black
or Grey Thermoplastic cover.
4. Conduit Supports: Conduit hangers and supports shall be
galvanized cast malleable iron or structural steel, with galvanized
nuts and bolts. Supports shall be as recommended by the conduit
manufacturers.
5. Electrical Accessories: Electrical accessories, including switches,
junction boxes, pull boxes and socket outlets, shall be in
accordance to relevant IEC/ SASO standards.
C. WIREWAYS, CABINETS & BOXES:
Materials:
a. Cabinets: Provide cabinets constructed of code-gauge steel
minimum 2 mm thick, for surface or flush mounting as
Indicated on the drawings. Unless scheduled otherwise on
the drawings, use NEMA Type 3R galvanized cabinets in
outdoor location, and use primed and grey bake-on
enameled NEMA 1 cabinets in dry, indoor areas.
b. Boxes: 1. This is applicable for back boxes for switches &
socket outlets, tap, Junction and pull boxes.
2. Boxes shall be suitable for use in ambient temperature up to at
least 55 degree Celsius. In all other respects they should
conform to IEC 60670.
3. Terminations In junction, switch and outlet boxes shall be of
screwed type.
4. Provide switch, outlet, tap, junction and pull boxes with screw-
fastened cover. Where required, provide weatherproof boxes,
NEMA Type 3R enclosures, with gasketted covers and flanges
designed to prevent entrance of rain water. Junction and pull
boxes shall be cadmium or zinc coated sheet metal for indoor
application.
5. Where required watertight boxes, provide watertight boxes
constructed of galvanized cast metal with gasket, bolt-on
covers, with tapped holes in bosses or hubs for conduit
entrances With integrally cast mounting lugs.
c. Wire ways: Provide wire ways assemblies of the sizes and
configurations indicated.
D. PANELBOARDS:
1. General: The Contractor shall furnish and Install at locations as
shown on the drawings approved panel boards of a type indicated
and specified herein. Panel boards shall comply with the applicable
sections of NEC and NEMA and shall be as manufactured by
General Electric, Westinghouse Electric Corporation, Legrand,
Siemens, ABB or equivalent approved.
2. Dead front safe type, panel boards conforming to NEMA and SASO
Standards are to be provided. The copper bus size, the number of
branch circuits, their amp rating and number of poles for each
panel board is noted on the drawings. Panel boards should have
solder less lugs, or connectors, in the correct number and sizes for
conductors, on Incoming side and on the load side of each branch
circuit, and on ground and neutral bars.
Provide an insulated neutral bus and a bonded equipment ground
bus, mounted at the opposite end of the structure from the mains,
and having numbered screw or lug terminals for connection of
wires.
3. Interiors: Interiors shall be completely factory assembled with
Screw or Bolt-on Main Breakers / Isolators and DIN rail mounted
Branch Circuit Breakers. They shall be designed such that switching
and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent
units and without removing the main bus connectors.
4. Bus bars:
Main bus bars shall be plated copper, sized in accordance with
standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to
a maximum of 50°C above an ambient of 40°C maximum. (A ground
bus shall be included in all panels.).
Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bar taps for
panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence
phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busbar shall have a
suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral
connection.
5. Circuit breaker:
a. Branch and main circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type and
shall have frame sizes, trip settings, and number of poles as
indicated on the drawings.
b. All circuit breakers shall have their trip rating clearly marked
and visible. Branch and main MCGBs rated 400 Volts shall
have an interrupting rating of not less than 25 KA rms
symmetrical/or as shown In the drawings, at rated voltage
and shall be calibrated at 50°C.
c. MCCBs should conform to IEC 60947 - 2. They should be
provided with thermo magnetic trip releases as per ratings
indicated In the drawing. Thermal releases adjustable from
0.7 to 1 of nominal current and fixed magnetic trip at 10
time's of nominal current.
d. MGB are to be provided with thermal release and
Instantaneous magnetic release type C. they should have an
Interrupting capacity of not less than 14 KA. MGBs should be
as per lEC 60898 -1.
e. Manufacturers: Provide breakers manufactured by one of
the following (breakers selected should be compatible with
panel board selected): General Electnc, Legrand, Schneider
Electric, Siemens, ABB, Westinghouse, Mitsubishi Electric.
6. Enclosures: Ready to use panel board cabinets shall be constructed
of sheet steel minimum 2 mm thick and shall be of suitable size to
provide adequate space around the perimeter for risers and
outgoing circuits. The enclosures should be fitted with DIN rails,
plates, and face plates.
Outgoing MCCB or MCBs are to be fitted in a row.
A directory frame with transparent cover shall be furnished and
installed on the inside of the door of each panel board.
All cabinets shall be lockable and supplied with master keys.
Enclosure degree of protection should be NEMA 1 - indoor type.
A directory card with clear plastic cover shall be supplied mounted
on the inside of each door. Directory should be Arabic and English.
Provide an engraved nameplate for each panel section.
At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be
provided.
Enclosures shall be provided with removable blank ends.
E. WIRING ACCESSORIES:
1. Includes all receptacles, switches, wall plates, flexible cable outlets
& spur units. Equipment should be Legrand, General Electric, ABS,
Siemens, Pass & Seymour or equivalent make.
2. Switches:
a. Switches shall be flush mounted with the operating handle
in upward position when in the "ON" position.
b. Switches used on lighting branch circuit shall be quick make,
quick break, with silver alloy Contact, rocker, operated with
quick operating mechanism rated at 16 amperes, 250 volts
AC or higher capacity as required by the circuit controlled in
accordance with the drawing.
c. Switches shall be single, duplex, triplex, two way flush
mounted type as indicated on the drawings.
d. Plates:
i. Plates shall be of rectangular shape to the approval of the
Owner/Consultant.
ii. Fixing screws shall be chromium plated and polished.
Screw head shall be finished to suit plate.
iii. Plates shall be designed to match associated devices.
Plates for multigang switches shall be provided as
required/ indicated in the drawings.
iv. Plates for all electrical devices on walls shall be impact
resistant plastic, and of the same pattern and color
throughout.
3. Receptacle outlets:
Provide single or duplex type receptacles, 13 amperes, 250 Volts,
with metal plaster ears, side wiring, as per BS1363: Part 2. Outlets
can be switched or without switch, as indicated in the drawing.
4. Special purposes power receptacle outlets:
These shall be single, rated 13 A, 45 A, 50 A, 250 Volts, polarized, 3
or 4 wires grounding type, flush mounted, as per BS 1363: Part 2,
as shown in the drawing.
5. Range Receptacles:
Range receptacles shall be single, 50 amperes, 250 volts polarized,
3 wire grounding type, flush mounted.
6. Flexible cable outlets:
Flexible cable outlets shall be conforming to BS 5733 fitted with
clamp and outlet membrane as required in the drawing.
7. Weatherproof switches and receptacles:
Weatherproof Switches shall consist of acceptable flush mounting
switches as specified herein NEMA type 4 gusseted through a shaft
in the matching cast metal boxes. Switch enclosures shall be type
MC or MCC, made by Crouse hinds Co, Syracuse, N.Y or equivalent.
Gusseted and weatherproof cover including corrosion
resistant fasteners shall be provided Weatherproof receptacles
shall be standard single flush receptacles as specified herein
gusseted cast metal NEMA type enclosures, with gusseted cover
screw.
F. SAFETY/DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
1. General: Provide safety and disconnect switch with rating and sized
as shown on the drawings.
2. Enclosures: Provide NEMA I, for indoor enclosures and NEMA 3R/4
for outdoor enclosures for switches.
G. MOTORS AND MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT:
1. Motor Operating Characteristics:
Motors shall be rated for 60 HZ operation at the following
voltages:
Motor Size Voltage Phase
1.5 hp and smaller( as per 230 Single- phase

equipment std.)
230 V single phase may by used for Kitchen equipment, pumps and
major appliances.
Motors shall have a horsepower rating based on continuous
operation at full load, 50°C maximum ambient, and 1.0 service
factor without exceeding the requirements of NEMA.
2. Magnetic Starters:
Magnetic starters shall be weather proof with 50 degree
Celsius operating temperature, as specified in NEMA ICS,
Industrial Controls and Systems, and shall be fitted with
ambient compensated thermal overload relays, sized for
nameplate amperes and service factors. Overload relays
for starters shall have normally closed contracts that are
manually reset with the compartment door closed.
Starters for single-phase motors shall be manual type with
two pole-toggle units for across-the-line-starting, and
fitted with one overload element. Starters shall be surface
or flush mounted.
The control voltage for all starters and for all control
circuits shall be 230 V unless otherwise specified.
3. Controls:
Unless otherwise indicated or required by the driven
equipment, all starters shall be provided with heavy duly
start-stop push buttons, one red pilot light, one green pilot
light and one reset pushbutton. Push buttons shall be a one
unit momentary contact "START” or "STOP" with normally
open and normally closed contacts as required by the
wiring diagrams and with lockout attachments. All devices,
such as push buttons, selector switches and pilot lights
shall be the heavy-duly-type.
All starter pushbuttons shall be labeled in Arabic and
English, stating which machine they control, and the
functions of the various buttons. Words such as START and
STOP shall be used.
4. Enclosures:
Individually mounted starters shall be totally enclosed in a
metallic enclosure of the required NEMA lype4. It shall not
be possible to open the enclosure door with the starter
energized.
5. Motor Features:
a. Insulation:
The motor windings shall be epoxy-coated or otherwise
suitably treated so that the insulation is moisture-
resistant and non-hydroscopic. Motor windings shall
have class B insulation as specified in NEMA MG-1 for
specified operating conditions, Class F insulation may be
used when approved.
b. Enclosures:
Motor enclosures shall be severe duly, totally-enclosed
fan-cooled (TEFC) or totally-enclosed non-ventilated
(TENV), whichever is standard for the rating. It should
be as per standard of pump manufacturer but should be
suitable for installation in underground pump room.
6. Finish:
Motors shall be painted as specified In the manufacturer's
standard specifications for hot and humid conditions. The
color shall be grey.
7. Identification:
All motors shall have a stainless steel nameplate giving a
complete motor description as specified in NEMA MG1,
including AFBMA bearing replacement numbers. The
direction of rotation, in reference to the phase sequence
terminal marking, when viewing the motor from opposite
the drive end, shall be shown.
H. GROUNDING:
1. Low voltage distribution system shall be provided with a separate
green and yellow insulated grounding conductors for each single or
three-phase feeder. The required grounding conductors shall be
Installed in common conduit with the related phase and/of neutral
conductors Single phase branch circuits required for 230 Volts
lighting, receptacle and motors shall consist of phase neutral and
ground conductors installed in common conduit.
2. The electrical system ground and equipment ground shall be
connected to the common ground base. All equipment metal
frames shall be adequately connected to the ground bus. Ground
rods of copper-clad 16 mm diameter, 3.0 m long shall be installed
as shown in the drawings. High electrical conductivity with soft-
drawn bare-stranded copper wire ground cable should be used to
form the ground grids. PVC insulated copper conductors shall be
for final connections of formed ground grids to structures,
equipment etc.
3. All grounding medium shall be bonded together This shall include
electric, telephone and TV antenna system ground and other
underground metallic piping, where they enter into the building
The common ground connections shall be made by using main size
conductors and connectors. Grounding system shall be as shown
on the drawings.
4. If a total ground resistance of 5 ohms or less is not obtained with
tile ground rod, a longer rods or additional rods shall be installed
until a combined ground resistance of 5 ohms or less is obtained.
I. OTHER RELATED WORK:
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and
perform all operations necessary for the installation of hand holes
and manholes.
a. Provide excavation, shoring, bracing, backfilling, grading
etc in accordance with the applicable portions of the
specification. Concrete shall be 25 N/mm2 concrete and
shall not be constructed until final conduit grading has
been determined, including any field changes required
by underground interferences. Shop drawings shall be
submitted for all hand holes and manholes.
b. Cable racks are to be heavy duty type with adjustable
arms, and free moving porcelain saddle Insulators.
Pulling in irons shall be provided opposite each duct
entrance and as detailed.
B. Metering Equipment:
a. Contractor shall coordinate with SEC for power supply and
metering arrangements, Owner will be responsible for all the
required fees.
b. Kilowatt hour meter opening at boundary wall shall be
provided as required and approved by SEC.
PART III - EXECUTION:

A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the Contractor
shall be installed and all worn shall be performed in a first class
workman-like manner and should have structural cabling system
certificate In conformity with the best trade practices, to produce
satisfactory results, in a safe, neat, orderly appearance and to
facilitate operating, servicing, maintaining and repairing.
B. The Contractor shall provide chases, holes and openings for
installation purposes and carefully fit around, repair, patch and
otherwise make this worn acceptable.
C. Prior to starting the electrical and structured cabling system
approved plan for installation, the Contractor shall verify the
correct voltage, phases and current consumption of all utilization
equipment to be connected. Branch circuit wiring, voltage and
circuit breakers must be adequate in each case. Construction
should be well understood and all scheduled before the approved
materials are obtained.
D. RACEWAY SYSTEM:
1. Install all sight exposed conduit parallel to building lines.
2. Do not locate outlet boxes or conduit In structural columns,
except as shown on the drawings.
3. All conduit field bends shall be made using approved bending
machine.
4. Conduits shall be offset where necessary to enter boxes, fitting
and etc in order to improve appearance of the work.
5. Installation of conduit shall comply with the following:
a. Supports shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 1 80 m
on centers.
b. Conduits shall not be supported by wire.
6. Do not support any conduits from duct work, mechanical or
plumbing piping equipment etc.
7. Any run of conduit between outlet and outlet, between fitting
and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall not have more
than the equivalent of four quarter bends including those bends
located Immediately at the outlet or fitting,
8. Provide pull boxes as required in accessible locations.
E. WIREWAYS, CABINETS AND BOXES:
1. All boxes shall be rigidly secured in place, not supported by
the conduit.
2. Front edge of box in concealed wiring system shall be flush
with finished wall or ceiling.
3. Except as otherwise noted on the drawings, cabinets (panel
board) shall be installed 200 cm (6 feet 6 inches) from
finished floor to top of cabinet. Home network cabinet shall
be installed as shown in designed drawings.
4. Use grounding bushings/cable for all wire/cables at
termination points.
F. INSPECTION AND TESTING:
1. After the electrical and telecom structured cabling system
installation is complete, tests shall be made to demonstrate that
the entire system is in proper working order and in accordance with
the drawings and specifications. Insulation, ground resistance UTP
cable test shall be made before operating tests. The Contractor
shall submit the test report of insulation, UTP cable and ground
resistance.
2. The cost of all tests shall be paid by the Contractor, including
expense incident to retests resulting from the failure of any
equipment or a part which cannot meet the required specification.
All wiring and equipment found defective, or failing to meet the
specified requirements shall be replaced by Contractor without
charge, unless written acceptance for repair is given.
3. The Contractor shall provide suitable cabling and electrical
instrument including voltmeter, ammeter, tachometer and/or
other testing tools as required with a up to date valid calibration
certificate.
G. GUARANTEE AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK:
1. The Contractor shall warrant whatever equipment and material
he provides to be in perfect condition and to replace entirely at
his own expense any portion of the equipment or material
which show defect or faulty workmanship for a period of one
year after the acceptance of the system.
2. All systems, herein specified and/or shown on the drawings
shall be in operating condition satisfactory to the Owner and
applicable codes and standards.
1602LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART I – GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. To supply, install, connect and test lighting fixtures:
The work includes the provision of labor, material, equipment,
transportation and services required to completely furnish, install,
connect, test and commission to operate In proper order all lighting
fixtures as shown on the drawings and herein specified and as required.
Section 1601- Electrical Work.
A. Lighting fixture shall be of type and manufacturers as as specified In the
“schedule of lighting Fixtures”, except products of similar type and
features of approved equal manufacturers are acceptable.
1. The fittings have to be of good quality and the housing thereof
must be made of lacquered metal or as per specified product
details. The fittings must comprise rotor lamp sockets and a ground
terminal has to be provided.
2. All fixtures and lamps shall be new components of the same type,
Size, rating, functional characteristics and make should be
interchangeable.
1.0 3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable
level of quality for materials and products. The Contractor may propose
alternative codes and standards provided they are of equal or better quality
than the referenced codes and standard and are submitted for review and
approval.
SAUDI ARABIAN STANDARDS ORGANISATION:
SASO 54 PVC Insulated flexible cords with circular copper conductors.

SASO 56 Methods of test for PVC-insulated cables and cords with circular
copper conductors.
SASO 79 Aluminium products Part I. Sheets, strips, plates. Bars and structural
sections.
SAS080 Testing methods of aluminium products Part I, sheets, strips, plates,
bars and structural sections.
SASO 138 Methods of test for tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting
service.
SASO 139 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service.
SASO 146 Methods of tests of ballasts for fluorescent lamps.
SASO 147 Ballasts for fluorescent lamps.
ASTM - AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS:
ASTM A507 Steel Sheet. Minimum thickness 1 25mm.

A53 Type S Steel Pipe.
A276 Type 316 Stainless Steel.
B209 Alloy No. 3003-1114 or 5005-H14
Aluminium Sheet and Plate. Minimum thickness 1.25mm.
B221 Alloy No. 6063-TS Extruded Aluminium
Minimum Thickness 2.78mm.
B85 Alloy No. G8a Die-Cast Aluminium
Minimum thickness 4.75mm.
D635 Rate of Burning or Self-Supporting Plastic.
D2240 Hardness of Plastics.
D1026 Flexible Cellular Materials of Expended Rubber.
D1400 Measurement of Dry Film Thickness.
B117 Salt Spray Testing.
B137 Weight of Coating on Anodic ally Coated Aluminium.
B244 Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings.
B136 Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminium.
A386 Zinc Coating on Assembled Steel Products.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE:
ANSI C7B Lamps

C8.24 Ballasts
1.0 4 SUBMITTALS:
a. Shop drawings and manufacturer's literature including: Electrical ratings,
dimensions, mounting details, materials, required clearances,
terminations, wiring & connection diagrams, Photometric Curves for
each fixture type, color, watts, volts etc for each lamp type for each
fixture, diffuser & controls, List of Manufacturers - whose fixtures have
been offered by the contractor.
b. Manufacture's catalogue, installation, operation and maintenance
instruction and recommended spares list with prices.
c. Factory test report.
d. The contractor shall submit field test report, after completion of testing
& commissioning.
1.0 5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Provide on each fixture and its components a recognized mark of the testing
authority.
Ship each unit securely wrapped packaged and labeled for safe handling in
shipment and to avoid damage or distortion.
Store lighting fixtures in a secure and dry storage facility.
1.0 6 HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENT:
All works under taken in relation to this specification are to be completed in
full, in accordance with established health & safety requirements of Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia.
1602 LIGHTING FIXTURES
2.01 GENERAL:
All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be, when
available, from an in-kingdom supplier. Make of the lighting fixtures
should be Inara, Philips, Thorlux, Saudi lighting Co., Oppel lighting with
lamps Osram, Philips, Opple lighting, National lighting, Nardeen or
approved equivalent.
2.02 REQUIREMENT FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES:
Lighting fixtures, body, housing, diffusers and reflectors shall be of the
shape, size and material shown on drawing or other approved
documents.
2.03 LAMPS:
All lamps shall conform to ANSI C78.
Fluorescent Lamps shall operate on 230 Volts, 60 Hz supply with the
Following requirements:
Walt rating: As shown.
Type: Rapid start for 30 Wand 40 W.
trigger start for 20 W.
Bulb size: T -S, T-8 to T-12 or equivalent and length as shown In
the drawings.
Base: Upto & including 40W: Medium bi-pin.
Above 40W: Recessed double Contact.
Compact fluorescent lamps shall be having built in
ballast.
2.04 LAMPHOLOERS AND STARTERS:
Lamp holders, starters and starter holders for fluorescent lamps shall
conform to IEC 60400 and shall be with automatic type starter with holder
or combination lamp holder and starter holder rated 660W, 250V.
White thermosetting phenolic compound base and body, silver plated
phosphorous bronze contacts, self-aligning neoprene gasket face.
2.05 BALLAST:
a. Ballast for fluorescent lamps shall be thermally protected type, high
frequency electronic ballast.
b. Operate on 230 Volts, 60 HZ, supply, load rating Suitable for the lamps.
c. The ballast shall operate the lamps in a manner that will not adversely
curtail the normal life of the lamp. The light output shall not vary by
more than +/- 5% for a variation of +/- 10% variation of the Input
voltage about the central design voltage. Light output shall remain
constant for a +/- 5% variation of the input voltage.
d. The noise level, from 600mm from the installed fixture, shall not
exceed 3Odb.
e. The ballast shall have high power factor and shall not be less than
95%.
2.06 DIFFUSER:
The diffuser shall be made of one piece Virgin acrylic, clear acrylic, or
polycarbonate plastic or as specified in the' Schedule of lighting fixtures'
and shall have the following characteristics:
a. Inner surface of the diffuser shall be diffusing type while outer surface
shall be smooth.
b. The diffuser shall be self-extinguishing type as determined by ASTM
D635
c. It shall be resistant to shrinking, warping, crazing, cracking or
discolonng, either in service or when stored In normal condition in the
manufacturer's standard shipping containers.
2.07 CONSTRUCTION OF LUMINNAIRES:
1. The metal parts of luminaries shall be formed to prevent warping and
sagging. Housing and other parts of the frame, shall be true, straight
(unless intentionally curved) and parallel to each other as designed.
2. Wire ways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall
accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to
the wiring.
3. Luminaries shall be made from minimum 0 91 mm (20 gauge) housing.
Minimum 0.76mm (22 gauge) housing shall be acceptable provided
they have strengthening embossed rib and break formations, which
give the equivalent rigidity of 0 91mm housing.
4. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, frame etc. shall
be free of light leaks.
5. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed
position and shall not be mounted on removable reflectors or wire
ways.
6. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without bending
when the fixture is in the installed position and latches shall function
easily by finger action without the use of tools.
7. All lighting fixtures shall be provided with a specific means for
grounding their metallic parts to an equipment grounding conductor.
2.08 GASKETS:
Keyed Gasket:
One piece extruded solid neoprene having Type A durometer hardness
of 30 plus or minus five when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
Self-retaining Gasket:
One piece closed cell sponge neoprene, soft or medium density, with the
following additional requirements:
Resistant to aging, heat, ultra-violet light, water, oil weathering and
setting as determined by ASTM D1056 and shall be cemented to
components with resilient neoprene sealing compound compatible with
the finish. Adhesive shall not be applied to the diffuser.
Heavy duty stainless steel latches. catches, release mechanism,

screws, bolts, studs. nuts, hinges, rivets. washers and springs
additional requirements with the following
Latches and catches Captive type
Operating hardware Self-retaining type
2.09 FINISH:
Baked Enamel:
Non-specular finish consisting of six-stage hot cleaning wash, phosphate

coat, prime coat and finish coat of sprayed white or other color acrylic
enamel, baked at 177°C (350°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes, with the
following additional requirements:
Dry film thickness per ASTM D1400 1: 1.25 mm (minimum).
Undercutting of enamel film from scored line after exposing to 10 per cent
salt spray for 1.500 hours, per ASTM 3117 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) maximum.
Baked white enamel after 100 hours exposure to fadeometer: 86 percent,

minimum reflectance factors, no appreciable visual colour change.
Porcelain Enamel:
Opaque fused vitreous surface flush with 88 percent average reflectance

factor.
Alzak coating 14 stage process for permanently sealed specular or semi
specular finish, as shown in accordance with patented electrolytic process.
Anodic Coating:
AA-M22C22A41, minimum coating thickness, 08 mm, coating weight 0.054
milligrams per mm2 hot water seal overall, tested in accordance with the
following requirements:
Coating weight: ASTM B137
Coating thickness: ASTM B244
Sealing test: ASTM B136
Undercutting of anodic film from scored line after exposing to 10% salt spray
for 1,500 hours, per ASTM BII7:1.6 mm (1/16 Inch) maximum.
Zinc Coaling: ASTM A386
Factory Painting:
Consisting of through chemical cleaning wash, phosphate coat, coat of trust

inhibiting primer and finish coat of sprayed Federal Colour No, 20040 Paint.
Field Painting:
Not permitted without Client approval.
2.010 LIGHTING FIXTURES:

Lighting fixtures shall be furnished and installed complete with necessary
parts, lamps, all as herein specified and as shown on the drawings. All
lighting fixtures shall operate on 230 Volts, 60 Hz, power supply, unless
otherwise shown.
1602LIGHTING FIXTURES
3.01 GENERAL:
Except as may be described in Part II and Part III of this Section refer to
the applicable provisions of Section 1601.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
Furnish, assemble, install and wire up complete, all lighting fixtures
Fixtures shall be complete with lamps, lamp holders and all necessary
accessories. All fixtures shall be wired in accordance with temperature
limitations.
Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted by approved means. Pendant-hung
fixtures shall be equipped with approved ball type aligners.
Provide adequate protection for fixtures during construction. At
completion of work, all fixtures clean and free from foreign materials.
Before starting the manufacture of any fixtures under this Section, the
Contractor shall submit complete technical of each fixture specified The
Contractor shall submit a complete sample of all of the fixtures specified.
The Contractor shall note that proper framing of the ceiling shall be
provided for all recessed fixtures. All fixtures recessed in plaster ceilings
shall be provided with plaster boxes. The ceiling installation, air diffusers
etc must be in line and present a neat and orderly appearance. Recessed
fixtures shall be removable from below to allow access to an outlet in the
ceiling.
Furnish and set all inserts, anchors, studs and hangers for the support of
lighting fixtures and respective equipment and make all necessary
adjustments required thereto Where fixtures are surface mounted, neat
holes shall be cut in the hung ceilings as required for the fixture supports.
All supports, hangers, channels, bolts etc shall be galvanized. Two
supports shall be provided for each fluorescent fixture, one at each end
of the fixture.
1603 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART I- GENERAL:
1.0 1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The work covered under this Section consist of furnishing and installing
a complete fire alarm system including functional components shown on
drawings and as described in these specifications.
B. Applicable Codes and Standards:
1. Saudi Arabian Standards Organization – SASO.
2. N F P A (National Fire Protection Association of U.S.A).
3. National Electrical Code U.S.A.
4. Underwriters Laboratory.
1.0 2 SUBMITTALS:
Submit samples of each type of material intended for the proposed work.
1603FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
2.01 BIDDER QUALIFICATIONS:

A. The system shall be installed, connected and tested under the
supervision of an authorized manufacturer's representative normally
engaged in this type of work and shall have performed such work for
at least the past three years and shall be prepared to furnish such
evidence to Architect / Engineer if requested.
2.02 INSTALLATION:
A. The equipment furnished under this specification shall be the standard
product of one manufacturer.
All components and the system as a whole shall conform to applicable
standards. All work in conjunction with this installation shall meet the
provisions of the National Electrical Code.
2.03 SERVICE FACILITIES:
A. The equipment manufacturer's service department must stock parts
for the equipment installed and shall provide factory trained
personnel.
2.04 TESTING:
A. Before shipment, each piece of equipment shall be tested to ensure
proper operation and conformance with manufacturer's published
specifications.
Notification of completion of testing shall be provided.
B. Before acceptance, each unit of the alarm system shall be tested by
the manufacturer's factory trained representative in the presence of
Architect /Engineer. Tests of smoke detectors electrical test and a
smoke test. The smoke test conducted shall be similar to the UL test
as performed under the requirements of UL 167 and shall be as
follows:
1. Shredded paper, 1f4Kg, 6mm to 9mm wide, 150mm to 600mm
long, strips of newspaper placed in the hardware cloth receptacle;
150mm openings, approximately 300mm diameter, 600mm high,
150mm clearance between shelf and bottom, ignition by match at
bottom centre.
2. Units being tested must respond within two minutes maximum.
C. Contractor will supply all materials and equipment for tests and shall
conduct the tests.
D. Contractor shall inform to Architect/Engineer the system is ready for
testing and the Architect/ Engineer shall set the test date.
2.05 FINAL ACCEPTANCE:
A. Before final acceptance all detectors shall be tested In the presence of
the Architect/Engineer, and certify that the units are in satisfactory
operating condition.
B. The complete fire alarm system shall operate satisfactory before final
acceptance.
2.06 MATERIALS:
General:
A. Contractor shall supply and install a complete and ready- to- use fire
alarm system as described herein and shown on the drawings. The
intent of these specifications IS to provide a complete and
satisfactorily operating system complete with all equipment and
installation materials required, whether or not enumerated here In or
B. It is the intent of this specification for a single source fire alarm
manufacture to supply all detectors in the system.
C. Upon completion of system installation and before final inspection,
Contractor shall thoroughly check the fire alarm system. He shall
certify in a letter to Architect / Engineer that each smoke detector and
complete system have been checked and are as specified, that all
items have been prepared and Architect / Engineer has been
instructed in the fife alarm system.
D. Upon acceptance of fire alarm system, equipment manufacturer shall
assume complete responsibility for replacement of any defective
equipment during warranty period of one year at no cost to Owner.
E. Primary power source shall be 220 V, 60HZ as provided (See drawings).
System operation shall be 24V DC unless specified otherwise.
F. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish wiring diagrams and equipment
specification submittals for Architect / Engineer approval prior to
installation.
G. System wiring shall be installed in accordance with this specification
manufacturer’s recommendations as shown in relevant drawings and
shall be run in conduit as required by this specification, sizes, as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer and in strict
accordance with the NEC, systems shall be test free from ground
opens or short circuits. Circuitry shall be two wire, Class B supervised.
All wiring to be colour coded.
H. The equipment herein described and specified establishes a minimum
set of standards for product quality. Contractor shall be required to
submit information on the equipment for approval.
2.07 EQUIPMENT:
A. SMOKE DETECTORS:
Smoke detector shall be products of combustion detection devices
and shall be installed in locations as shown on the plans or called for
in the specifications. The following generic wording of fire alarm
devices is included and made a part of this specification.
1. All products of combustion detectors shall be as follows:
a. Detectors shall be of the solid state photo-electronic type,
long life LED and shall operate on the light scattering,
photodiode principle.
b. Detectors shall have an accessible control for field
adjustment of sensitivity. (Delay timing and delay circuits are
not considered to be sensitivity adjustment).
c. Detectors shall be fully self- compensating for the effects of
velocity, changes in temperature, humidity and atmospheric
pressure.
d. Detectors shall be capable of operating with ambient
temperatures of 320 to 1200F.
e. Detectors shall incorporate a visual indication to indicate
normal or alarm condition.
f. All detectors shall be Underwriters, Inc. and/or Factory
Mutual approved and shall have passed the UL long-term
stability test.
g. Housing of all units shall be metal or plastic material of
industrial type specifically designed to protect the unit from
rough handling.
h. Manufacturer's descriptive, specifications, cuts and
diagrams shall be submitted for approval prior to purchase
and Installation.
i. Replacement of any detector shall be at the expense of the
manufacturer and shall not result in any charge, whatsoever,
to the Owner.
j. Qualified manufacturer's representative will instruct the
company Engineer In maintenance, operation and
adjustment of the units.
1. Contractor shall supply copies of all pertinent
manufacturer's literature on system, bound in hard cover
binders.
D. BATIERY MODULE:
The fire alarm control unit shall be provided with a standby power in
the event of commercial power failure. The module shall consist of
maintenance- free, sealed lead cells and 24V DC supply. The battery
module shall have a size to meet 10 hours (minimum) standby capacity
and 15 minutes of alarm. The battery module may be housed on a
separate module enclosure similar to the fire alarm control unit
enclosure.
E. CONDUCTORS:
Conductors shall be sized to prevent excess voltage drop and shall be
colour coded.
1603 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART III –EXECUTION:

A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall
be installed and all work shall be performed in a first class workman-
like manner, in conformity with the best trade practices, to produce
satisfactory results, In a safe, neat, orderly appearance and to facilitate
operating, servicing, maintaining and repairing.
B. The Contractor shall provide chases, holes and openings for
installation purposes and carefully fit around, repair, patch and
otherwise make his work acceptable.
C. Prior to starling lI1e fire alarm system installation, the Contractor shall
verify the correct voltage, phases and current consumption of all
equipment to be connected.
D. PVC conduit shall be used where embedded in concrete and
galvanized rigid steel or EMT conduit shall be used to run through
hollow wail/ceiling spaces.
3.02 OPERATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE SYSTEM:
A. A representative of the equipment manufacturer shall instruct the site
personnel in the operation and functions of the system with the
presence of Clients' statutory agency representative for approval.

1604 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. VIDEO INTERCOM SYSTEM:
1. Video intercom system consists of entrance door stations and villa main
station and sub stations. The system also includes an electric door
opening system.
2. Door Intercom systems can be a press-to-talk system allowing speech
between the door station arid villa main station and communication
between villa stations.
3. The integrated loudspeaker and microphone shall be for tropical
conditions and shall be frost and weather protected.
a. Door Station:
1. The door station box shall be made of galvanized sheet steel and shall be
provided with rubber gasket to assure weatherproof attachment of the
cover.
2. The metal front plate shall include illuminated nameplate and push-
button, an Indicating lamp for "ready to communicate".
b. Master Station:
1. The master station shall be wall mounted type and shall be capable of
calling any station In the system and receiving calls from all stations.
2. The master station shall have the following minimum features:
 On-off switch for turning the system on and off.
 LED light to show whether the system is on or off. This will appear on
the master arid the slave stations.
 Volume contral to regulate the listening and talking volume.
 The master station shall operate from 230v, single phase, and 60Hz
supply.
 Telephone type handset for communication.
 Ability to call one handset at a time and selectively a number of
handsets.
 The master station shall have a visual and audio indicator to show
when any telephone handset is calling.
 Push button to release the entrance electric door latch.
c. Sub Station:
1. Substation handsets shall be capable of accepting calls from master
stations and making calls to the master station.
2. Handset shall be wall mounted type.
d. Execution:
1. Furnish and install the intercom system complete including all
conduits, wires and accessories as shown in the drawing.
2. The Intercom system shall be located and installed as shown and as
specified herein and on the drawings unless otherwise directed.
3. Submit for approval before any materials are delivered to
site/installed, with complete shop drawings and technical material
submittals.
4. Equipment shall be as manufactured by AIPHONE, Samsung, LG, or
from any approved equivalent.
B. DATAITELEPHONEIIPTV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:
1. Furnish and install telecom distribution system complete With all
conduits, wires and related accessories.
2. All telecom distribution system shall be located and installed as
shown in the drawings.
3. Outlets shall be single, wall flush mounted using standard type
boxes complete with terminal units and cover plates. (Face plate
standard color: white).
4. All telecom distribution system materials including cables, splicing
materials, conduits and fittings, terminals, boxes or boards,
grounding materials, installation wiring and other appurtenance
shall be supplied by the contractor unless otherwise noted.
site/installed, with complete shop drawings and technical material
submittals.
a. Cables and Conduits:
1. Data/ Telephone/ lPTV distribution cables - category 6 UTP
plenum cables shall be O,63mm , solid copper conductor,
polypropylene insulation, full color coding, 4 pairs. Non-
hygropylene jacket, 0.24mm aluminum inner shield, 0.15mm
outer shield polyethylene modified petrolatum filling
compound, polyethylene outer jacket.
2. A separate grounding wire shall be installed in all conduits,
all distribution boxes and cabinet; and bond the main
telecommunication grounding cable to the common
electrical grounding grid with not less than a 6AWG
grounding cable.
3. Conduits to outlets shall be minimum 25 mm, per outlet
unless otherwise specified on the drawings. All conduits shall
be rigidly installed, adequately supported and properly
reamed at both ends. Sections of conduit shall be joined with
approved couplings and conduit terminations in outlet
boxes, pull boxes etc and shall he made using approved
fittings.
4. Outside conduits should be installed as per the drawings. All
the empty ducts should be equipped with 6mm nylon rope
and closed properly with suitable duct plugs at both ends.
site/installed, with complete shop drawings and technical
material submittals.
6. Cables shall be as manufactured by bolden cables, or from
any approved equivalent.
b. Socket outlets:
1. Data/Telephone/IPTV socket outlets shall be flush mounted
in wall using standard type boxes with RJ45 modular jack,
bracket, and face plate with mounting screws. Standard
color white.
2. Provide boxes, conduits and pull boxes as specified in
section 1601 2.02 B & C.
3. Materials shall be as manufactured by Legrand, ABS, AI
fanar or from any approved equivalent.
4. Home network cabinet / Network enclosure shall be (NEMA
type 1):
 Flush mounted enclosure type with hinged cover;
 horizontal and vertical module mounting holes for
maximum flexibility.
 Provision to mount power strip and lock kit.
 Material: 20-18 gauge steel.
 Finish: White, powder coat.
 Cabinet shall be as manufactured by net select
Hubbel or any approved equivalent.
C. SMATV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM:
1. Furnish and install SMATV distribution system complete with all conduits,
wires and accessories.
2. The SMATV distribution system shall be located and installed as shown on
the drawings.
3. Outlets shall be single, wall flush mounted using standard type boxes
complete with terminal units and cover plates. (Face plate standard color:
white).
4. SMATV distribution system materials including cables, splicing materials,
conduits and fittings, terminals, boxes or boards, grounding materials,
installation wiring and other appurtenance shall be supplied by the
contractor unless otherwise noted.
5. A separate SMATV distribution system shall be provided in driver's
quarter as shown in the drawings.
6. Submit for approval before any materials are delivered to site/installed,
with complete shop drawings and technical material submittals.
a. Cable, conduit and splitter:
1. Provide co-axial cable RG6 type with 75 Ω characteristic
impedance, construct with polyethylene low--density
dielectric core, aluminum alloy braid over aluminum foil
tape for 100% shielding and covered with polyethylene
protective jacket insulation.
2. Splitter: Indoor/outdoor type, stainless steel, non-
corrodible, waterproof housing with glide path spring loaded
connectors, 75Ω required One entry terminal will be labeled
as the input connection All other terminals shall be
used as outputs. Un-used outputs shall be fitted with
suitable matched termination. Based on the dish type can
use LNB with splitter type also.
3. Conduits to outlets shall be minimum 25 mm, per outlet
unless otherwise specified on the drawings. All conduits shall
be rigidly installed, adequately supported and properly
reamed at both ends. Sections of conduit shall be joined with
approved couplings and conduit terminations in outlet
boxes, pull boxes etc and shall he made using approved
fittings.
b. Socket outlets:
1. SMATV socket outlets shall be flush mounted in wall using
standard type boxes with a female RF connector modular
jack, bracket, and face plate with mounting screws, Standard
color white.
2. Provide boxes, conduits and pull boxes as specified in section
1601 2.02 B. & c.
3. All materials shall be as manufactured by Jerrold Electronic,
Legrand, ASB, Al fanar, or from any approved equivalent.
4. All installation shall be in accordance with RC
telecommunication standards.
DIVISION 17- REFERENCES I ABBREVIATIONS:
A. In conjunction with the requirements of Special Condition "Standards and
Codes", the listings below are acceptable standards.
B. References to recognized standards are by use of the abbreviations listed
below.
C. References to standards are not limited to those mentioned below.
D. Local/ Gulf Standards.
E. International Standards:
1. GSMO Standard and Metrology Organization for G,C C.
2. MPWH Ministry of Public Works and Housing.
3. RCAC Royal Commission Architectural Code.
4. RCBC Royal Commission Building Code.
5. RCCA Royal Commission Administration Codes.
6. RCEC Royal Commission Electrical Code.
7. RCEM Royal Commission Engineering Manual.
8. RCFC Royal Commission Fire Code.
9. RCMC Royal Commission Mechanical Code.
10. RCPC Royal Commission Plumbing Code.
11. RCSC Royal Commission Structural Code.
12.SASO Saudi Arabian Standard Organization.
13. SCS Saudi Electric Company Construction Standards.
14. SDS Saudi Electric Company Distribution Standards.
15.SES Saudi Electric Company Engineering Standards.
16.SMSS Saudi Electric Company Material Specification Standards.
17. STC Saudi Telecommunication Company.
1. AA Aluminium Association, Inc.

2. AABC Associated Air Balance Council
3. AAMA Architectural Aluminium Manufacturers Association
4. AAN American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.
5. AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transpiration Officials
6. AATCC American Assoclallon of Textile Chemist and Colonst.
7. ABPA Acoustical and Board Products Association.
8. ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association.
9. ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association.
10. ACI American Concrete Institute.
11. ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories.
12. ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association.
13. ADC Air Diffusion Council.
14. AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturing Association.
15.AGA American Gas Association.
16. AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers.
17. AI The Asphalt Institute.
18.AIA American Institute of Architects.
19. AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association.
20. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction.
21. AISE Association of Iron and Steel Engineers.
22.AISI American Iron and Steel Institute.
23.AITC American Institute of Timber Construction.
24. AMCA Air Moving and Control Association, Inc.
25. ANSI American National Standards Institute, International.
26. AOAC Association of Official Analytical Chemists.
27.APA American Plywood Association.
28.API American Petroleum Institute.
29.ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
30.ASA Acoustical Society of America.
American Society of Architectural Hardware.
31.ASAHC Consultants.
 See Door and Hardware Institute.
32. ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council.
33. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers.
34. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air- Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
35. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
36.ASQ American Society for Quality.
37.ASPE American Society of Planning Engineers.
38. ASSE Architectural Society of Sanitary Engineers.
39.ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
40. AWI Architectural wood work Institute.
41. AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association.
42.AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau.
43. AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute.
44. AWS American Welding society, Inc.
45.AWWA American Water Works Association, Inc.
46. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.
47. BIA Brick Institute of America.
48. BS British Standard.
49. CABO Council of American Building Officials.
50. CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute.
51. CAUS Color Association of United States.
52.CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.
53.CDA Copper Development Association, Inc.
54. CFFA Chemical Fabrics and Film Association.
55. CER Code of Federal Regulations.
56. CGA Compressed Gas Association.
57. CIM Chlorine Institute Manual.
58. CIRIA Construction Industry Research and Information Association.
59. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
60. CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association.
61. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission.
62. CRI Carpet of Rug Institute.
63.CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel institute.
64. CS Commercial Standards of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) -
See NIST.
65.CSI Construction Specifications Institute, Inc.
66.CTI Cooling Tower Institute.
67. DHI Door & Hardware Institute.
68. DIN Deutsches Insitut fur Normung.
69. DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association.
70.DOT Department of Transportation.
71. EIA/TIA Electronic Industries Association / Telecom Industries Association.
72. EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturer Association.
73. EPA Environmental Protection Association.
74.FCI Fluid Control Institute.
75.FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association.
76. FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation.
77. FM Factory Mutual System.
78. FS Federal Specifications.
79. FSSM Food Services Sanitation Manual.
80. GA Gypsum Association.
81. HEI Heat Exchanger.
82. HEI Heat Exchange Institute.
83.HFES Human Factored Ergonomics Society.
84. HI Hydraulic Institute.
85. HI Hydronics Institute.
86. HMI Hoists Manufacturers Institute.
87.HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association.
88.IBC International Building Code.
89. ICBN International Code of Botanical Nomenclature.
90. ICBO International Conference of Building Officials.
91. ICC International Code Council.
92. ICNCP International Code of Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants.
93. IEC International Electro technical Commission.
Mm Millimeter
cm Centimeter
M Meter
LM Linear meter
In. Inch
Ft Foot
Sq.mm Square millimeter
Sq.cm Square centimeter
Sq. m Square meter
Sq. ft Square feet
Cu.m Cubic meters
G Grams
Kg Kilogram
Ib Pound
c Centigrade (Celsius)
f Fahrenheit
A Ampere
V Volt
Kv Kilovolt
Hr Hour
Kg/ sq. cm Kilogram per square centimeter
KN/m Kilo newton per meter
kPa Kilopascal
MPa Mega pascal
Psi Pounds per square inch
Psig Pounds per square inch gage
DB Direct Burial
Ppm Parts per million
TDS Total dissolved solids
AC Alternating current
DC Direct current
GE General Electric
No. Number
min minimum
Max. maximum
% percent
Schedule B- Attachment III
Issue for construction (IFC) Drawings
1. Issue for construction Drawing shall be provided through separate print out
with stamp and signed by SAUDI ARAMCO.
ENDOF SCHEDULE B- ATTACHMENT III
Schedule B- Attachment IV
Technical & commercial Bill of Quantity (BOQ)
1. Technical & Commercial Bill of Quantity shall be referred to Schedule C

Attachment II (1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0,) in this Contract for villa Type B, C, D and
Preliminaries.
END OF SCHEDULE B- ATTACHMENT IV

Scope of work
Procurement & Construction of three Local Mosques- (2) 450 Capacity and (1)
650 Capacity
REVIEWED BY:
Safwani
Date and Signature

75 434

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

75 434

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3Scope of Work

Review Sequence 161 Reviewer 161 Reviewer Approved by

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page

3.1. 5 PC Contractor’s Responsibilities:

3. 2 MOBILIZATION, TEMPORARY WORKS & PERMANENT WORKS:

3.4 2 Architectural Work:

3.4.4.12.2 The PC Contractor shall furnish

3.4.4.12.3 The fire protection system shall

Area 1 (Mock- up) 3 10 Months 10 Months from receiving

Area 2 127 20 Months 18 Months from receiving

Area 3 120 26 Months 24 Months from receiving

Area 4 241 38 Months 30 Months from receiving

Total 491 39 Months The project shall b e handed

Schedule No 1. Project Phases and Schedule.

7.2 Cabinet (Bedroom & Storage Cabinets):

Villa/ Ground First Floor Men Majlis Dining Reference

Review Sequence 161 Reviewer 161 Reviewer Approved by

7. Other items (Portable office Requirements):

Review Sequence 161 Reviewer 161 Reviewer Approved by

1. Methods and Specifications for Roads and Asphalt Laying:

Specification 1101 Schedule of Kitchen and Other

c. The mobilization should commence Within 14 days after the

FINAL ACCPETANCE AS-BUILT

30.0 MOCK-UP SAMPLE:

0103 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

2.0 3 Drinking Water:

2.0 6 Client's Field Offices:

B. Temporary Site Facilities shall consist of:

1. Office facilities at site.

2. Shaded Parking Area.

4. New brand office.

Once the Contractor Provided Site Facilities are no longer

Contractor shall provide the following services:

A. Provide / Refer to the Contract Schedules

2.0 10 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Communications:

A. The Contractor shall provide, supply, install and maintain

B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when

C. Lighting and power of the Contractor Camp, accommodation

2.0 11 Non-Electric Utilities:

All non-electric utilities supply, installation, testing, flushing and

0103 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

1.0 2 Termination and Remova!

1.0 3 Project Identification and Temporary Signs:

A. Prepare project identification signs as specified standard detail

A. Operate temporary facilities and conduct construction by

1.0 5 Installation / General:

=== End of section ===

1.0 1 Temporary Fences and Barricades:

Part 2 & 3 - Products & Execution:

1.0 3 Project Identification Sign:

A. Painted signs with painted lettering:

B. Erect at appropriate locations to provide required information.

1.0 5 Quality Assurance:

0105 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS

0105 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS

3.0 1 Project Identification Sign:

A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair

B. Relocate informational signs as required by progress of the

1.0 2 Record Document Submittals:

B. The record documents are as follows:

1.0 3 Operating and Maintenance Instructions:

A. Special cleaning for specific units of work shall be as specified in the